JP2023174793A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of allowing a player to easily recognize a specific display as an object of a specific light emitting performance.SOLUTION: A game machine can perform performance control for allowing light emitting means to emit light in a mode corresponding to a specific light emitting performance continuously even during a variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting performance, and for completing light emission at predetermined completion timing before completion of the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting performance, and performs special completion control for completing light emission of the light emitting means at specific completion timing later than the predetermined completion timing when light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emitting performance of the light emitting means is not completed at the predetermined completion timing because of occurrence of a predetermined event.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 10-22

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can perform variable display and can be controlled to advantageous conditions that are advantageous to players.

In conventional gaming machines, based on the fulfillment of a predetermined condition (entering the starting area of the game ball), a display means displays a specific display (a pending display or an active display) based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. There is a system that can execute a pre-read notice indicating that the variable display will be controlled in an advantageous state even before the start of the variable display, for the variable display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition.

Furthermore, some conventional game machines are capable of executing a pre-read notice (specific light emission effect) by causing a light emitting means provided in the game machine to emit light (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP2016-105941A

However, in Patent Document 1, depending on the timing at which the display of the specific display is started and the timing at which the specific light emission effect is started, it becomes difficult for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. It is possible that Furthermore, in Patent Document 1, there is a possibility that the specific light emission performance cannot be completed normally due to the generation of static electricity, for example, which may give a sense of discomfort.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and also to ensure that the light emission in the mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect is normal. To provide a game machine that can reduce discomfort when the game is not finished.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine capable of variably displaying multiple types of production identification information and capable of controlling an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light;
a display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
Effect execution means capable of executing a specific display effect of displaying the specific display and a specific light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on a predetermined condition being satisfied;
a state control means capable of controlling to a specific state;
an updating means capable of updating the numerical information based on execution of the variable display;
The state control means is capable of controlling the state to the specific state when a specific condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating device becoming a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times;
The display means is capable of executing a specific notification effect that notifies that the specific condition is satisfied when the specific condition is satisfied,
The specific notification performance is a performance that reduces the visibility of the performance identification information,
The performance execution means executes the specific light emission performance so that the light emission of the light emission unit becomes recognizable to the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display performance,
further comprising a sound output means capable of outputting a sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect corresponding to the specific light emission effect,
The sound output means is capable of outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect,
The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed,
Even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, the light emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, and at a predetermined ending timing before the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect ends. It is possible to control the effect to end the light emission,
If the light emission of the light emitting means in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission performance is not terminated at the predetermined end timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the light emitting means of the light emitting means may emit light at a specific end timing subsequent to the predetermined end timing. Perform special termination control to terminate the
It is characterized by
Furthermore, the gaming machine of means 1 is
The variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information are executed, and when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed, it is possible to control the display to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state). A gaming machine,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., pending display and active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A specific display effect that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a part that displays a pending display or an active display in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ) ), and a specific light emitting effect (for example, a flash effect when winning a prize) that causes the light emitting means to emit light;
Equipped with
The effect executing means executes the specific light emitting effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIG. -28, as shown in Figures 10-29 (A) to 10-32 (H), and Figures 10-49 (A) to 10-50 (D), before the display of the pending display is completed. The part that lights up the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning a prize),
The rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) (If the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning, the percentage of control to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed)
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g. winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g. main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body). lamp 9d);
The first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous period winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous period winning flash effect); A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start timing of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F has a brightness of C1 and (The part that blinks at cycle T1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the brightness is C2 and blinks at cycle T2),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner that corresponds to the specific light emission effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner that corresponds to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, FIG. 10-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d flash at a brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. During the period, the part that blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0),
The effect execution means can start the specific light emission effect before the start of the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), When executing start effect B, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body, etc. the part where the lamp 9d emits light),
moreover,
State control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 As shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the updating means that can update the numerical information based on the variable display being executed (for example, As shown in FIGS. 12-13, the state control means includes a part for executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the state control means makes the numerical information updated by the updating means a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. By this, it is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, As shown, the updating means (the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100) is used when variable display of the first identification information is executed and when variable display of the second identification information is executed. It is characterized in that the numerical information is updated depending on the case (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100).
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect In this case, the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous by causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the specific display. Furthermore, even if the gaming state changes and any identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be relieved and increasing his motivation to play.

Further, the embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include the invention related to the following means A. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, gaming machines have been known that can be controlled to a special state in which a variable display is more easily executed than in a normal state, as shown in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2005-95449. For example, Patent Document 1 states that even if the number of times the special figure game is executed in the normal gaming state (the number of times the variable display is executed) reaches 1000 times (special number of times), when a jackpot (advantageous state) does not occur, Conditions are met), the gaming state is controlled to be variable, the probability that a jackpot will be determined as a result of the special pattern game is increased to about 1/100, and jackpots are more likely to occur in subsequent special pattern games. It is stated that. Furthermore, in Patent Document 1, when a jackpot does not occur even when the number of special figure games (the number of executions of variable display) reaches 1000 in a normal gaming state, a time saving state is generated instead of a variable probability state. It is stated that it can be used as a product.

However, in conventional gaming machines, there has been insufficient consideration of interest when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a special number, and during the period before and after that.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that is rich in interest.

(Means A) The gaming machine according to the present invention executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and provides an advantageous advantageous state when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. (for example, a jackpot game state), and a state control means (for example, in FIG. 12-17 As shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display are executed. The state control means includes an update means (for example, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. 12-13) that can update the numerical information based on the When the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display, the special condition can be controlled to be in a special state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13). As shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is , the numerical information is updated depending on whether the first identification information is displayed variably or the second identification information is variably displayed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the game control microcomputer 100), a predetermined suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in FIG. 12-52 (C1), ( C2), the background image changes, as shown in Figure 12-53 (B), there is a blackout at the start of the fluctuation, as shown in Figure 12-54 (C), there is a blackout at the end of the fluctuation, etc.) The system further includes an executable special notification performance execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-23, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638), and the predetermined suggestion performance execution means is configured to satisfy the special conditions. In the previous period, the rate at which the predetermined suggestion performance is executed is the same (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-44, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A). (See Figure 12-50).
According to such a configuration, by suddenly executing the special notification effect, it is possible to give surprise to the player and increase interest.

Note that this invention may have only the matters specifying the invention stated in the claims of this invention, or it may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention stated in the claims of this invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view of a pachinko game machine. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. FIG. 2 is a front view of the image display device. (A) and (B) are diagrams illustrating production control commands. It is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing display result determination table 2. (A) is a diagram showing a configuration example of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. It is an explanatory diagram showing a variable display result, a fluctuation pattern, and a relationship. It is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a data holding area for game control. (A) is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control data holding area, (B) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of the reception command buffer at the time of starting winning, and (C) is the configuration of the active display buffer. It is a figure which shows an example. It is a flowchart which shows an example of starting prize winning determination processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of winning random value determination processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of command analysis processing. It is a part of a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a prefetch notice setting process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the display pattern and the presence or absence of execution of the pending display notice effect as a pre-read notice. It is a part of a flowchart which shows an example of specific display start effect execution processing. It is a figure which shows the performance aspect of the specific display start performance A. It is a diagram showing a performance mode of specific display start performance B. It is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process. It is a flowchart showing an example of a winning flash effect execution process. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing presentation modes of a flash effect at the time of winning in the first period and a flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. It is a figure which shows the execution rate of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. (A) is a front view of the pachinko game machine with the game effect lamp lit at high brightness (C1), and (B) is a front view of the pachinko game machine with the game effect lamp turned off. be. A front view of the pachinko gaming machine in a state where the game effect lamp is lit at low brightness (C2) and a pachinko game machine showing the transition of the light emission mode of the game effect lamp when the game effect lamp is lit at low brightness. FIG. When a starting winning that is eligible for the winning flash effect occurs, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, the lighting of the winning flash lamp, the game effect lamp, and the starting gate lamp, and the timing of displaying the effect image and silhouette image. FIG. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the winning flash performance occurs during the variable display. In the case of a starting winning that is subject to the winning flash effect in the modified example, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, the lighting of the winning flash lamp, the game effect lamp, and the starting gate lamp, and the display of the effect image and silhouette image. 3 is a timing chart showing the timing of . It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a timing chart showing the timing of the lighting of the winning flash lamp, the game effect lamp, and the starting port lamp, the display of the effect image and the silhouette image, and the operation of the movable body in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. It is a timing chart showing the timing of displaying a flash lamp and a silhouette image at the time of winning in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a performance mode in a variable display that is a target of a flash performance when winning a prize in a modified example. They are a timing chart showing the timing of the operation of the winning flash lamp and the movable body in a modified example, and a diagram showing the determination ratio of the timing at which the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp changes. It is a figure which shows the display mode of a hold display and an active display in a modification, the suggestion content of each display mode, and the selection ratio at the time of the winning slash effect execution decision. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating presentation modes in a hold display and an active display when a winning flash effect is executed in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating presentation modes in a hold display and an active display when a winning flash effect is executed in a modified example. FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating presentation modes in a hold display and an active display when a winning flash effect is executed in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a figure which shows the performance mode when the starting winning which becomes the object of the flash performance at the time of winning occurs during the variable display in a modified example. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in characteristic part 108IW. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability for each setting value. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability for each setting value. It is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type determination table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining time saving type. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature section 108IW. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern table in the feature section 108IW. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the production control command. It is a flowchart showing game control main processing in the feature section 108IW. It is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart showing special symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of an external output signal. It is a flowchart showing jackpot end processing. FIG. 7 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in the feature section 108IW. It is a flowchart showing a specific example of production control main processing in the feature section 108IW. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. 3 is a flowchart illustrating a specific example of command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows customer waiting demonstration performance control processing. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a telop display execution lottery table and a telop mode determination lottery table. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a presentation mode of a telop display while waiting for a customer. It is a flowchart which shows advance notice setting processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of a pre-read preview performance execution determination table, a pre-read preview performance type determination table, and a pre-read preview performance mode determination table. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of each performance type of a look-ahead preview performance. It is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the look-ahead preview performance in the time-saving state via jackpot and the time-saving state via relief. 3 is a flowchart showing variable display start setting processing. It is an explanatory diagram showing a concrete example of a notice production execution decision table and a notice production mode decision table. It is a flowchart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows production processing during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows waiting processing per special figure. It is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to relief time reduction. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a production mode of a time-saving rush production. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a production mode of a false countdown production and an effect production. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design process processing in modification 1. It is a flowchart which shows special symbol stop processing in modification 1. 7 is a flowchart illustrating next change postponement processing in Modification 1. FIG. 7 is a timing chart for explaining execution timing of effects when executing a variable display that shortens rescue time in modification example 1. FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram for explaining Modifications 2 to 4 of the method of selecting a variation pattern during a time saving state based on relief time saving. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a variation pattern setting process in Example 2. FIG. 7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing in Example 2. FIG. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a preview performance execution determination table and a preview performance mode determination table in Example 2; 12 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in the second embodiment. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode until the transition to the relief time reduction in the second embodiment. FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the relief time reduction in Modification 1 of Embodiment 2; FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the effect mode until the transition to the relief time reduction in Modification 2 of Embodiment 2;

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(form)
Type 1 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that can perform variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., pending display and active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A specific display effect that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a part that displays a pending display or an active display in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ) , a specific display start effect) and a specific light emission effect that causes the light emitting means to emit light (for example, a flash effect when winning a prize);
Equipped with
The effect executing means executes the specific light emitting effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIG. -28, as shown in Figures 10-29 (A) to 10-32 (H), and Figures 10-49 (A) to 10-50 (D), before the display of the pending display is completed. The part that lights up the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning a prize),
The rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) (If the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning, the percentage of control to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed)
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g. winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g. main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body). lamp 9d);
The first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous period winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous period winning flash effect); A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start timing of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F has a brightness of C1 and (The part that blinks at cycle T1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the brightness is C2 and blinks at cycle T2),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner that corresponds to the specific light emission effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner that corresponds to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, FIG. 10-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d flash at a brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. During the period, the part blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0).
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect In this case, the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous by causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the specific display.

The gaming machine of Form 2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1,
The specific display effect is performed by an appearance effect section (for example, FIG. 10-15, FIG. 10-30(D) to FIG. 10-32(H), FIG. 10-49(B)) where the appearance effect of the specific display is executed. ~ As shown in Figure 10-50 (D), the part where the appearance animation in which the pending display and active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top is displayed by the performance control CPU 120 executing the specific display start performance execution process. ), and a periodic effect part (for example, FIG. 10-15, FIG. 10-30(D) to FIG. As shown in 10-32 (H) and FIGS. 10-49 (B) to 10-50 (D), the performance control CPU 120 executes the specific display rotation display performance execution process, thereby displaying pending display or active display. is displayed as a rotating animation), and
The timing at which the display of the specific display is completed is the start timing of the periodic effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, from the timing at which the appearance animation of the pending display or active display is completed, (The part where the rotation animation of these pending and active displays starts)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the player's attention to the specific display.

The gaming machine of Form 3 is the gaming machine described in Form 1 or Form 2,
The effect execution means can start the specific light emission effect before the start of the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), When executing start effect B, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body, etc. (The part where the lamp 9d emits light)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the specific light emission effect is started before the start of the specific display effect, the specific light emission effect can be made more conspicuous.

The gaming machine of Form 4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 3,
The specific display effect includes an appearance effect in which the specific display appears (for example, a specific display start effect),
The display means displays the specific display in a plurality of different display modes (for example, a specific display start effect A that only executes an appearance animation in which a pending display and an active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top, and a first pending display in which the character A is It can be displayed in a specific display start effect B) that executes an appearance animation in which the pending display and active display gradually appear from the bottom to the top after acting on the memory display area 135SG005D and the active display area 135SG005A,
The period of the appearance effect varies depending on the display mode of the specific display (for example, specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds and specific display start effect B is 1.2 seconds),
The specific light emission effect is started before the end timing of the shortest appearance effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-49(A) to 10-50(D) , the part where the winning flash effect starts before the end timing of specific display start effect A)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, regardless of the display mode of the specific display, the specific light emission effect can be started before the appearance effect ends, so that the player can surely see the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect. Recognizable.

The gaming machine of Form 5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 4,
The effect executing means starts the specific light emitting effect after once controlling the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means to a low brightness state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-28, 10-29(A), 10-29(B), FIG. 10-49(A), and FIG. 10-49(B), when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F , the part that turns off the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission performance.
Note that the "low brightness state" in the present invention includes not only a state in which light is emitted at low brightness but also a state in which no light is emitted.

The gaming machine of Form 6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 5,
The effect execution means starts the specific light emitting effect after once controlling the display means to a low visibility state (for example, as shown in Modification Example 135SG-11, when executing a flash effect at the time of winning, the image (The part that starts the flash effect at the time of winning after reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 by reducing the brightness of the backlight etc. built into the display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the start of the specific light emission performance.
Note that the "low visibility state" in the present invention refers to a state in which the visibility of the display means is lower than the previous state, and the visibility of the display is reduced by a method other than reducing the brightness of the display means. It also includes a degraded state.

The gaming machine of Form 7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 6,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a suggestive effect (for example, a preview effect) that suggests that the variable display will be controlled in an advantageous state while executing the variable display, and is capable of executing a suggestive effect that indicates that the variable display will be controlled in an advantageous state. 10-29(A) to 10-48(n), and 10-49(A) to 10-68( As shown in (n), the part where the winning flash effect can be executed depending on whether the preview effect is being executed or not),
A variable display compatible sound corresponding to the variable display (the variable display compatible sound shown in FIG. 10-28), a suggestive performance compatible sound corresponding to the suggestive performance (the preview performance compatible sound shown in FIG. 10-29(A)), Sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect (sound corresponding to the winning flash effect shown in FIG. 10-29(B)) corresponding to the specific light emission effect;
The sound output means is
When the specific light emitting effect is executed while the variable display compatible sound is being output, the specific light emitting effect compatible sound can be output with priority over the variable display compatible sound that is being output (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-29 (B), when executing the winning flash effect while the variable display is being executed, the variable display compatible sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. part that outputs sound at volume V1 (V1>V2)),
When the specific light emitting effect is executed while the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect is being output, the sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect can be output with priority over the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect being output (for example, As shown in Figure 10-29(B), when executing the winning flash effect while the preview effect is being executed, the sound corresponding to the preview effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at volume V2, while the winning flash effect is supported. The part that outputs the sound at volume V1 (V1>V2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the sound corresponding to the variable display or the sound corresponding to the suggestive effect is output, the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be easily heard, and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect allows the player to execute the specific light emission effect. It becomes easier to recognize.

The gaming machine of Form 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 7,
Equipped with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) capable of outputting sound,
In the specific light emission performance, the effect execution means outputs a sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect from the sound output means before either the display of the specific display is completed or the light emission means emits light (for example, FIG. 10-28 , As shown in Figures 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), and Figures 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), execution of the winning flash effect is determined in response to the starting winning. (If this is the case, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect will start from the speakers 8L and 8R, and then the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will start, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display will be completed.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to make the player quickly recognize that the predetermined condition is met by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 9 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 7,
Equipped with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R) capable of outputting sound,
In the specific light emission effect, the effect execution means includes:
A sound corresponding to a specific light emission effect can be output from the sound output means (for example, a part capable of outputting a sound corresponding to a flash effect when winning a prize from speakers 8L and 8R),
The light emitting means is caused to emit light before the completion of the display of the specific display and the output of the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-12, execution of a winning flash effect in response to a winning start) If it is determined, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display is completed)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the player can quickly recognize that the predetermined condition has been met by the light emitted from the light emitting means, thereby improving the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 9,
The specific light emitting effect is such that during the first period, the first light emitting means emits light in a predetermined manner that corresponds to the specific light emitting effect, and during the second period, the first light emitting means emits light in a predetermined manner that is more emphasized than the predetermined manner. This is a performance that emits light in a specific manner with a low degree of intensity (for example, as shown in Figure 10-28, during the execution period of the first-term winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at brightness C1, and the second-term winning flash is flashed at brightness C1, During the execution period of the time flash effect, the part where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 (C1>C2))
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by causing at least the first light emitting means to emit light in a predetermined manner, the player can be made aware of the start of a specific light emitting effect, and the first light emitting means continues to emit light in a predetermined manner during the second period as well. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting due to the light emitting and interfering with other performances.
Note that the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" in the present invention includes a low-speed blinking mode in which the degree of emphasis is low due to a slow blinking speed.

The gaming machine of Form 11 is the gaming machine according to Form 10,
The second period includes a period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is executed, and a period during which the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is being executed (for example, in FIG. 10-28 As shown in , the execution period of the late winning flash effect includes the period during which the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is executed, and the execution period of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect. period),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first light emitting means emits light in a specific manner before and after the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 12 is the gaming machine according to Form 10 or Form 11,
The first light emitting means emits light in the predetermined manner when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started, When a certain variable display starts, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at brightness C1 and cycle T1)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 12,
The display means displays a specific light emission effect compatible image corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first display mode during the first period, and displays the specific light emission effect compatible image from the first display mode during the second period. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and when the winning period in the second period is During the execution period of the flash effect, the part that displays the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the first period, the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be displayed on the display means in the first display mode to make the player recognize the start of the specific light emission effect, and in the second period, the image corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be displayed in the first display mode. By displaying the image compatible with the specific light emitting effect in the second display mode by the means, the display means continues to display the image compatible with the specific light emitting effect in the first display mode, which obstructs other displays and reduces the interest in the game. It is possible to suppress the decline.

The gaming machine of Form 14 is the gaming machine according to Form 13,
The display means displays the specific light emission compatible image in a first display mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13, (a portion for displaying the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 15 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 14,
comprising a sound output means (for example, speakers 8L, 8R) capable of outputting a sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect corresponding to the specific light emission effect;
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in a first output mode during the first period, and does not output the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the second period, or outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect at a higher intensity than the first output mode. Output in the second output mode with a lower level (For example, as shown in Figure 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1. and during the execution period of the flash performance at the time of winning in the latter half, the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is output from speakers 8l and 8R at a volume of V2 (V1>V2)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode, it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the specific light emission effect has started, and it is possible to easily make the player recognize that the specific light emission effect has started. During execution, the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect is not output or is output in the second output mode, so that it is possible to suppress a decline in game interest due to other effects being obstructed by the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect. .

The gaming machine of Form 16 is the gaming machine described in Form 15,
The sound output means outputs the sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect in the first output mode when the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-13). (a part that outputs a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume of V1 when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the variable display is the object of the specific light emission effect, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 17 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 16,
The first light emitting means stops emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during a display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect. (For example, in the modified example 135SG-1, as shown in FIG. 10-69, the production control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation command from the speakers 8L and 8R during the execution of the flash production at the time of late winning. The pattern is confirmed by stopping the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect when winning a prize, turning off the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning a prize, hiding the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5, clearing the process timer for the flash effect when winning a prize in the later period, etc. During the period, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect as the flash effect during the later period, the emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S will not be executed, and the first variable display start command will be received. Based on this, by reselecting the process table for the flash effect at the time of winning the second term and resetting and starting the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning the second term, the flash effect at the time of winning the second term (flash at the time of winning the term (The part that starts the output of the sound corresponding to the performance, the emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by temporarily stopping the light emission of the light emitting means, it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the variable display is continuing.

The gaming machine of Form 18 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 17,
A gaming machine capable of performing a re-variable display performance (for example, a pseudo continuous performance) in which the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started until the display result is derived, and then the variable display is displayed again,
The first light emitting means responds to the specific light emitting effect during a temporary stop when a re-variable display effect is executed during the second period before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect is started. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-69 and FIG. 10-70(A) to FIG. 10-89(n) as modification example 135SG-1, the flash effect is the subject of the winning flash effect.) During the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern in the variable display that is executed before the variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink at the brightness C2 and the period T2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously believing that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of Form 19 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 18,
A gaming machine capable of performing a re-variable display performance (for example, a pseudo continuous performance) in which the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started until the display result is derived, and then the variable display is displayed again,
The first light emitting means is
Even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect during the second period (for example, as modified example 135SG-1, FIGS. 10-69 and 10-70 (A ) ~ As shown in FIG. 10-89(n), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at the brightness C1 and the cycle T2 even during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect),
Even during a temporary stop when the re-variable display effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the light emission continues in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as modification 135SG-1) As shown in Figures 10-69 and 10-70 (A) to Figure 10-89 (n), during the temporary suspension period of the decorative symbols in the variable display that are subject to the winning flash effect, the winning flash part of the lamp 135SG009F that continues to blink at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T2),
The gaming machine according to any one of modes 1 to 18, characterized in that:
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously believing that the variable display has ended despite the temporary stop.

The gaming machine of Form 20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 16,
The first light emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during a display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period before the start of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect. (For example, as shown in Figures 10-29(A) to 10-48(n), during the execution of the late winning flash effect, the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started. During the symbol confirmation period of the previous variable display, the part where the flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink when winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by continuing to emit light during the display period of the display result of the variable display in the second period, the player's expectation of being controlled to an advantageous state is targeted by the specific light emitting effect. It is possible to accurately maintain the variable display until the start of the variable display, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 21 is the gaming machine according to Form 20,
The display means is capable of variably displaying first performance identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) and variable display of second performance identification information (for example, a small pattern) whose visibility is lower than that of the first performance identification information. A gaming machine,
During the result display period, the second production identification information in a stopped state is displayed on the display means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-33 (J), during the symbol confirmation period, small symbols are displayed variably. (the part displayed when the is stopped),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the light emission continues during the result display period, the second effect identification information in the stopped state is displayed, so the player can be made aware that it is the result display period.

The gaming machine of Form 22 is the gaming machine described in Form 21,
The display means can display a specific light emission performance corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emission performance in the second period so as not to overlap with the display of the second performance identification information (for example, FIG. 10-33 (J) As shown in FIG. 3, while the winning flash effect is being executed, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5. 1 display area 135SG005F (part displayed at the left end),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming difficult to recognize the end of the variable display due to the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect being displayed overlappingly with the display of the second effect identification information.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 22,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance (for example, a reach performance of super reach) that suggests control to be in an advantageous state;
When the specific effect is executed in the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the first light emitting means emits light in a manner according to the specific light emission effect until the specific effect is started, and When the performance starts, it starts emitting light in a manner corresponding to the specific performance (for example, as shown in Figure 10-90 as modification 135SG-2, the super reach that is the target of the flash performance when winning a prize is variable). In the display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at a brightness of C2 and cycle T2 before the start of the super reach reach effect, and from the start timing of the super reach reach effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at a brightness of C2. part to light),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the specific performance is started, the light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific performance instead of in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission performance, so that the game interest of the specific performance can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 24 is the gaming machine according to Form 23,
The display means is capable of displaying a specific effect start image corresponding to the start of the specific effect when the specific effect is started (for example, FIG. 10-96(K) to FIG. 10-98(O)). , as shown in FIGS. 10-104(K) to 10-106(O), a portion where the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (whiteout),
The first light emitting means enters a low brightness state when the display of the display means switches to the specific effect start image, and after entering the low brightness state, emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific effect (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in 10-90, during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and then the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at brightness C2 from the start timing of Super Reach's reach effect.) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes with a low brightness state accompanying switching to the specific performance start image, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to these changes in the light emitting mode. Since this can be prevented, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 25 is the gaming machine described in Form 23 or Form 24,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The performance execution means includes, as the specific performance, a motion performance that causes the movable body to move at the start of the specific performance (for example, a movable body motion performance shown in FIG. 10-90), and suggests execution of the motion performance. It is possible to perform a motion suggestion performance (for example, a movable body motion suggestion performance shown in FIG. 10-90),
The first light emitting means enters a low brightness state when executing the action suggesting effect, and after entering the low brightness state, emits light in a manner corresponding to the action effect which is a mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, , as shown in Figure 10-90, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion effect during the whiteout period, and the winning flash is turned off from the start timing of the super reach reach effect thereafter. The part that lights up the lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes with a low brightness state accompanying the execution of the suggestive effect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to these changes in the light emitting mode. As a result, you can increase your interest in playing games.

The gaming machine of Form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 25,
The first light emitting means is
When a special performance different from the specific light emission performance is executed by the performance execution means, it is possible to emit light in a manner corresponding to the special performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-108(A) as modification 135SG-3). (As shown in the figure, when a step-up effect is executed during a variable display in which a winning flash effect is not being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be lit in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect).
When the specific light emitting effect is started during the execution of the special effect, the light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect with priority over a manner corresponding to the special effect (for example, modification 135SG-3 As shown in Figure 10-108(B), when performing a step-up effect during a variable display in which a winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash lamp is set in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect. 135SG009F continues to light up (flashing)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect from being started at an inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the special effect.

The gaming machine of Form 27 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 26,
The first light emitting means emits light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, when it ends at a first timing during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect, and at a second timing after the first timing. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-119(A) and 10-119(B) as modification example 135SG-4, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F responds to the winning flash effect. The timing to end the light emission mode is the timing to start the movable body movement performance during the variable display that is the target of the flash performance when winning a prize, and the timing to start the reach performance of super reach),
When the light emission of the first light emitting means in a manner according to the specific light emission effect ends at the first timing, and when the light emission of the first light emitting means in a manner according to the specific light emission effect ends at the second timing. The rate at which the winning state is controlled to be advantageous differs depending on the end of the game. Jackpot expectation level in cases where the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the movable body movement performance according to the light emission mode according to the movable body movement performance, and when the light emission mode is changed according to the said reach performance from the start timing of the reach performance. (different parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the timing at which the light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect ends, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 28 is the gaming machine according to Form 27,
The effect executed by the effect execution means at the time of the end of the light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect is different depending on whether it ends at the first timing or when it ends at the second timing. (For example, as shown in FIG. 10-119 as modification example 135SG-4, during the execution period of the movable body movement effect, depending on the timing of ending the light emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, In some cases, it may be during the execution period of Super Reach's reach effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize whether the end timing is the first timing or the second timing.

The gaming machine of Form 29 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 28,
The performance execution means executes a first performance (for example, a movable body movement performance shown in FIG. 10-119 as a modification example 135SG-4) and a second performance different from the first performance (for example, a modification example 135SG-4) during variable display. -4, it is possible to execute the super reach reach performance shown in Figure 10-119),
The first light emitting means is
With the execution of the first effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it is possible to change the light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to the light emission mode in a mode corresponding to the first effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-119(A) as modification example 135SG-4, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the start timing of the movable body movement performance. (The part that changes the lighting mode according to the motion effect),
With the execution of the second effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect can be changed to the light emission mode in a mode corresponding to the second effect (for example, As shown in FIG. 10-119(B) as modification example 135SG-4, the part that changes the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the start timing of the reach effect to the light emission mode according to the reach effect),
When changing from a mode of light emission corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode of light emission corresponding to the first effect, and when changing from a mode of light emission corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode of light emission corresponding to the second effect. The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled differs depending on the time (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-119(C) as a modified example 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed depending on the winning flash performance). The expectation level of jackpot is different depending on the case where the light emission mode is set from the start timing of the movable body movement performance to the light emission mode according to the movable body movement performance, and the case where the light emission mode is set from the start timing of the reach performance to the light emission mode according to the reach performance. part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 30 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 28,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32) is provided,
The performance execution means controls an action performance that causes the movable body to move (for example, a movable body motion performance), a motion suggestion performance that suggests execution of the motion performance (for example, a movable body motion suggestion performance), and an advantageous state. It is possible to carry out a specific performance (for example, a reach performance of super reach) that suggests that the
The first light emitting means is
With the execution of the action suggestion effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, the light emission can change from a mode of light emission corresponding to the specific light emission effect to a mode corresponding to the action suggestion effect (for example, a modified example). As shown in 135SG-4, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emitting mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body motion suggesting performance from the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting performance. parts to be changed),
With the execution of the specific effect during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it is possible to change the light emission in a mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to the light emission mode in a mode corresponding to the specific effect (for example, a modified example As shown in 135SG-4, a part that changes the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect from the start timing of the super reach effect. ),
The rate at which the light is controlled to an advantageous state is different when changing from the light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect to the mode corresponding to the action suggestion effect and when changing to the light emission mode corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, , as shown in Modified Example 135SG-4, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the lighting mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the start timing of the movable body motion suggesting performance according to the movable body motion suggesting performance. (The part where the jackpot expectation level differs depending on the lighting mode and the lighting mode depending on the reach effect from the start timing of the reach effect),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the effect being executed when the light emitting mode of the first light emitting means changes, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 31 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 30,
The display modes of the specific display include a normal mode (for example, display pattern α), a special mode (for example, display pattern δ and display pattern ε shown in FIG. 10-120 as modification 135SG-5), and a special mode (for example, display pattern β and display pattern γ).
The special aspect includes a first special aspect (for example, display pattern γ) and a second special aspect (for example, display pattern β) different from the first special aspect,
When the specific display is displayed in the first special mode, the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the second special mode (for example, in FIG. 10-17 As shown in the figure, when the pending display or the active display is displayed in the display pattern γ, the part that is controlled to be in the jackpot gaming state at a higher rate than when it is displayed in the display pattern β),
The specific display of the special mode can be changed to either the first special mode or the second special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-120 as modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ or The part where the pending display or active display displayed in display pattern ε can be changed to the pending display or active display in display pattern β or display pattern γ),
When the specific display is displayed in the special mode, the percentage of execution of the specific light emitting effect is higher than when it is displayed in the special mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 10 as Modification 135SG-5). As shown in 120, when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, it is easier to win a prize than when the pending display and the active display are displayed in the display pattern β and the display pattern γ. (parts where flash effects are executed at a high rate),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when a specific display is displayed in a special mode, by executing a specific light emitting effect at a high rate, it is determined whether the special mode changes to the first special mode or the second special mode. It is possible to draw the attention of the players to the game, and improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 32 is the gaming machine according to Form 31,
The special mode is a mode of a specific color (for example, flashing white as shown in FIG. 10-120 as modification example 135SG-5),
The special aspect is an aspect of a special color different from the specific color (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, blue or red),
The normal mode is a mode of a color other than the specific color and the special color (for example, white),
The specific display of the specific color changes to the special color at a higher rate when the specific light emitting effect is being executed than when the specific light emitting effect is not being executed (for example, Modification Example 135SG-5 As shown in , when a pending display or active display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is displayed depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is executed. parts with different rates of change to pattern β and display pattern γ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the difference in the mode of specific display can be easily understood by the difference in color, and when a specific display of a specific color is displayed, the player pays attention to whether or not a specific light emitting effect is being executed. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 33 is the gaming machine according to Form 31 or Form 32,
The effect execution means is capable of executing a change suggestion effect that suggests that the specific display displayed in the special mode changes to the special mode in a first mode and a second mode different from the first mode. (For example, a part where the first effect and second effect shown in Modification Example 135SG-5 can be executed),
The special mode changes to the special mode at a higher rate when the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode than when it is executed in the first mode (for example, in Modified Example 135SG-5). As shown in , the second effect can change the specific display to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect by acting on the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ. The part that is a performance),
When the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode, the specific light emission effect is executed at a higher rate than when it is executed in the first mode (for example, in Modification 135SG-5). As shown, when the second effect is executed, the winning flash effect is executed at a higher rate than when the first effect is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the change suggestion effect is executed in the first mode or the second mode, and the change suggestion effect is executed in the first mode by executing the specific light emission effect. It is possible to increase expectations for the implementation in two ways.

The gaming machine of Form 34 is the gaming machine according to Form 33,
The special mode is a first special mode in which the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode and the rate of change to the special mode is low (for example, the display pattern δ shown in FIG. 10-120 as modification 135SG-5). ), and a second special mode in which the rate at which the change suggestion effect is executed in the second mode and changes to the special mode is higher than that in the first special mode (for example, as modified example 135SG-5 in FIG. 10-120 The display pattern ε) shown in
When the specific display is displayed in the second special mode, the percentage of execution of the specific light emitting effect is higher than when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode (for example, when the specific display is displayed in the first special mode) When the display pattern ε is displayed, the percentage of flash effects executed at the time of winning is higher than when the specific display is displayed using the display pattern δ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the specific display is displayed in the first special mode or the second special mode, and when the second special mode has a high rate of change to the special mode. Since the specific light emitting effect is executed at a high rate in the second special mode, the execution of the specific light emitting effect can increase expectations for the specific display to be displayed in the second special mode.

The gaming machine of Form 35 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 34,
The display means is capable of displaying a specific light emitting effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the specific light emitting effect so as to overlap a specific display corresponding to a variable display of a target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, As shown in modification example 135SG-7, a silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect when winning a prize can be displayed so as to overlap the active display in the active display area 135SG005A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the specific display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect can be easily recognized by the player, and the specific display can be hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, giving the player a sense of surprise and increasing the enjoyment of the game. can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 36 is the gaming machine according to Form 35,
The display means is capable of displaying a plurality of displays corresponding to the specific light emitting effect of different types (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-7, the display means is capable of displaying a plurality of displays corresponding to the specific light emitting effect of different sizes on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning). (portion where silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed),
The manner of overlapping with the specific display differs depending on the type of display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-129 (L) and FIG. 10-130 (N) as modification example 135SG-7). , a portion where the overlapping aspect of the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the displayed silhouette image 135SG005S)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, a plurality of displays corresponding to specific light emitting effects are displayed, and the manner of overlapping with the specific display changes depending on the displayed display corresponding to specific light emitting effects, so that the game enjoyment can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 37 is the gaming machine according to Form 35 or Form 36,
The specific display includes a first specific display (for example, a pending display) corresponding to a variable display that has not been executed yet, and a second variable display (for example, an active display) that corresponds to a variable display that is being executed,
The display means can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect so as to overlap with the first specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect before the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect is started. In addition, during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, it can be displayed so as to overlap with the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emission effect (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-7, Before the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect is started, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the pending display that is the object of the winning flash effect that is displayed in the first holding memory display area 135SG005D. , while the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is being executed, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap the active display that is the target of the winning flash effect that is displayed in the active display area 135SG005A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible for the player to easily recognize the first specific display and the second specific display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, and not only the first specific display but also the second specific display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. Therefore, it is possible to provide even more surprises to the players and improve their enjoyment of the game.

The gaming machine of Form 38 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 37,
A gaming machine capable of performing a re-variable display performance (for example, a pseudo continuous performance) in which the variable display is temporarily stopped after the variable display is started until the display result is derived, and then the variable display is displayed again,
The display means is capable of displaying a re-variable related display regarding the re-variable display effect, and displays a specific light emitting effect corresponding display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect during the specific light emitting effect, overlapping with the re-variable related display. (For example, when a pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the winning flash effect, when the decorative pattern temporarily stops, it will stop in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C. Special design (see Figure 10-40, etc.) where the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed overlappingly as a flash effect when winning a prize),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the re-variable related display is hidden by the display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, so it is possible to give surprise to the player and improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 39 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 35 to 38,
The display means can display the display corresponding to the specific light emission effect even during the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect (for example, FIG. 10-28, FIG. 10-42(a) to FIG. 10-47( As shown in l), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display that is the subject of the flash effect when winning a prize),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the interest of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emission effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 40 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 39,
The performance execution means is
Even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, the first light emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, and the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect ends at a predetermined time. It is possible to control the effect to end the light emission at the timing (for example, as shown in Figure 10-28, during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be activated before the start of the ready-to-win effect). flashes at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T2, and turns off the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the start timing of the reach effect),
If the light emission of the first light emitting means in the manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect is not terminated at the predetermined end timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the first light emitting means is not terminated at a specific end timing subsequent to the predetermined end timing. Perform special end control to end the light emission of the light emitting means (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22, the performance control CPU 120 determines that it is the start timing of the ready-to-reach performance of the variable display of the performance target due to the generation of static electricity, etc.) If this is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (timing at which the symbol confirmation command is received), which is a timing later than the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect, a second-term winning flash effect including blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is performed again. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce the feeling of discomfort when light emission in a mode corresponding to a specific light emission effect is not normally completed.

The gaming machine of Form 41 is the gaming machine according to Form 40,
Equipped with a game control means (for example, CPU 103) capable of controlling the progress of the game,
The game control means is capable of transmitting variable display end information that notifies the end of the variable display to the effect execution means when the variable display ends (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(A) , a part where the CPU 103 can send a symbol confirmation command that specifies the stop of the variable display of decorative symbols),
The performance execution means performs the specific end control based on receiving the variable display end information as the specific end timing (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-22, the performance control CPU 120 The part that ends the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half based on receiving the command),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to further reduce the sense of discomfort when ending light emission in a manner that corresponds to a specific light emission performance.

The gaming machine of Form 42 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 39 to 41,
The predetermined end timing includes a first predetermined end timing and a second predetermined end timing. The part that can stop flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F),
The specific end timing is a timing later than the predetermined end timing and the second predetermined end timing (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-4, the effect control CPU 120 may cause the production control CPU 120 to trigger the winning flash when static electricity is generated, etc. If it is not possible to stop the blinking of the lamp 135SG009F, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be started again at the end timing of the variable display, which is a timing later than the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect or the start timing of the reach effect. (The part that ends the flash performance when winning a prize in the second half)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, even if the light emission cannot be ended at the second predetermined end timing, it is possible to end the light emission in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission effect at the specific end timing.

The gaming machine of Form 43 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 42,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, a super reach performance) that suggests that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state.
If the predetermined condition is satisfied when the specific effect is being executed, the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. (The part that does not decide to execute the flash effect at the time of winning if a starting winning occurs)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to a specific performance.

The gaming machine of Form 44 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 43,
If the predetermined condition is satisfied when the remaining period of the variable display is equal to or shorter than the predetermined period, the effect execution means does not execute the specific light emitting effect, If the predetermined condition is satisfied for a period longer than the predetermined period, the specific light emission effect can be executed (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-8, when the first starting port is When a starting winning occurs, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and if the specified period is less than the execution period of the winning flash effect in the previous period, the execution of the winning flash effect is not determined),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific display of the target of the specific light emitting effect from becoming difficult to understand due to the specific light emitting effect being executed when the remaining period of the variable display is short.

The gaming machine of Form 45 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 44,
The performance execution means is
It is possible to execute a specific effect that suggests control to an advantageous state even in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figure 10-9, even in a variable display where the variable display result is a failure). (The part where you can perform the reach effect of Super Reach),
When the predetermined condition is satisfied during execution of the specific effect in a variable display that is not controlled to an advantageous state, the specific light emitting effect can be executed in response to the start of the next variable display of the variable display (for example, a modified As shown in Example 135SG-8, if a starting winning occurs at the first starting opening while the variable display is being executed, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period. If it is less than the execution period, the winning flash effect can be executed from the start timing of the next variable display, provided that the variable display result of the variable display is a loss),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific effect and the specific light emission effect from becoming less interesting due to the specific effect and the specific light emission effect being executed overlappingly.

The gaming machine of Form 46 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 45,
A specific area where the predetermined condition is satisfied when the game medium passes through (for example, the winning ball device 6A forming the first starting winning opening);
a specific light emitting means (for example, a starting port lamp 135SG009S) provided around the specific area and capable of emitting light in different light emission modes;
Equipped with
The display means can display the specific display in any one of a plurality of display modes that differ in the rate at which the specific display is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-17, a pending display or an active (a part where the display can be displayed in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ with different jackpot expectations),
The specific light emitting means is capable of emitting light in a light emission mode corresponding to the display mode of the specific display regardless of whether or not the specific light emission effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, When the display pattern β or the display pattern γ is determined, the starting port lamp 135SG009S starts regardless of the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a winning flash effect or the lighting mode of the game effect lamp 9, etc. (a portion that emits light in a color according to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ from the occurrence of a winning to the end of the variable display based on the starting winning);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific display can also be recognized by the light emission mode of the specific light emitting means provided around the specific area, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 47 is the gaming machine described in Form 46,
The number of light emitting modes in which the specific light emitting means can emit light is greater than the number of light emitting modes in which the first light emitting means can emit light in the specific light emitting effect (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-9, (a part where the number of light emitting modes of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission production is greater than the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash display);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the light emission variations of the specific light emitting means are increased, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 48 is the gaming machine described in Form 46 or Form 47,
The light emitting area of the first light emitting means is larger than the light emitting area of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-10, the light emitting area where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as a winning flash effect is , a portion provided larger than the light emitting area where the starting port lamp 135SG009S emits light as a lighting effect of the starting port lamp),
The period during which the specific light emitting means emits light according to the display mode of the specific display based on the establishment of the predetermined condition of No. 1 is such that the first light emitting means emits light according to the specific light emission effect based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. (If it is decided to execute both the winning flash effect and the pending display notice effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will emit light after the starting winning occurs.) While the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the ready-to-win display on the variable display that is the target of the start-up winning flash display, the starting exit lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the ready-to-win display that is the target of the start winning flash display, while the start exit lamp 135SG009S displays the variable display that is the target of the pending display notice display (flash display when winning) after the start winning occurs. (the part that emits light until the end of the variable display),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decline in game interest due to excessively long execution of light emission by the first light emitting means in accordance with the specific light emitting effect, and to prevent the light emitting mode of the specific light emitting means from becoming more advantageous. Players' expectations can be maintained for a long time.

The gaming machine of Form 49 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 46 to 48,
Both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means are capable of blinking light emission (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in the section where the starting port lamp 135SG009S can flash),
The flashing cycle of the first light emitting means is different from the flashing cycle of the specific light emitting means (for example, as shown in Modified Example 135SG-10, the flashing cycle of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S is set as a winning flash effect as a winning flash effect). Parts that differ from the flashing cycle of lamp 135SG009F),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the blinking cycles are different, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the first light emitting means and the specific light emitting means, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

Note that "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, displaying a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". Note that there may be only one type of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the variable display of the special figure game and the decorative pattern which are executed synchronously is collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable prize winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable wing pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tips of the movable wing pieces are comes close to the winning ball device 6A, and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable wing pieces of the variable winning ball device 6B are in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning hole (second starting winning ball). It is also said that the prize opening will be open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1) that operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
When the player rotates the ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, game balls are launched toward the game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern game using the normal pattern display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passage gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the regular symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol losing". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting prize opening (wins) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when it is controlled in the jackpot game state or small winning game state (described later) (the starting prize has occurred) If the special pattern game based on the starting prize cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special pattern game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a predetermined special symbol (a small winning symbol, for example "2") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "small winning". Further, if a special symbol (a losing symbol, for example "-") different from the jackpot symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "loser".

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "small win", the game is controlled to a small win game state.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

In addition, the jackpot type is set in "Jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

In the small winning game state, the big winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined opening manner. For example, in the small winning gaming state, the opening mode is the same as the jackpot gaming state for some jackpot types (the number of openings of the big winning opening is the same as the number of rounds above, and the closing timing of the big winning opening is also the same). etc.), the big prize opening will be open. In addition, similar to the jackpot type, a small hit type may also be provided for "small hit".

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low-probability high-base state, the variable-probability state is a high-probability high-base state, and the normal state is called a low-probability low-base state. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the display result of the special figure game continues to be controlled to the previous game state when it became a "small win" (However, if a "small win" occurs) If the special figure game of the hour is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times in the above-mentioned number cut, the game state is naturally changed). It should be noted that the display result of the special figure game does not need to be a "small win".

Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.
(Progress of production, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "small win", on the screen of the image display device 5, as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns, a fixed decorative pattern (for example, " 1 3 5" etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a "small hit"). As an example, decorative symbols constituting a chance are displayed in a stopped state on predetermined active lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot" for some jackpot types (jackpot type in a jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state) and when it becomes a "small win". , a common determined decorative pattern may be derived and displayed.

If the display result of the special pattern game is a "lose", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is the fixed decorative pattern of the non-reach combination (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols may be "non-reach loss"). In addition, if the display result is a "lose", after the variable display mode of the decorative design becomes the reach mode, a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach loss") is displayed as the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The fixed decorative pattern (also referred to as "decorative pattern") may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "reach loss").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed. Further, even during the small winning game state, a small winning performance for notifying the small winning gaming state is executed. In addition, the jackpot game during the small win game state and some jackpot types (jackpot type of the jackpot game state in the same manner as the small win game state, for example, the jackpot type that makes the subsequent gaming state a high probability state). By performing a common performance depending on the state, the player may not be able to tell whether the player is currently in a small win game state or a jackpot game state. In such a case, by executing a common performance after the end of the small win gaming state and after the end of the jackpot gaming state, it is possible to make it impossible to distinguish between a high probability state and a low probability state. You can.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

In the pachinko game machine 1, power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power source such as a commercial power source can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12 through the power board 17. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, small winning gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, a pressing operation on a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such game control main processing receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of jackpot gaming state, small winning gaming state, control of gaming state, etc.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random value for determining the display result, it is determined whether the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "big hit" or "small win" and the type of jackpot when it is determined to be a "jackpot". is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any of a jackpot symbol, a small prize symbol, or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority consumption). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". In this fluctuation pattern setting process, based on the pre-determined result of whether the display result will be a "big hit" or "small hit", a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern is used to select one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns. It includes the process of determining the In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is off and the display result is a "small hit", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "8". Moreover, when the display result is "lost", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0". When the display result is "small hit" or "loss", the game state is also updated when the time-saving state or the variable probability state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The small hit opening preprocessing in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8". This small win opening pre-processing includes processing for setting the large winning opening to be open in the small winning gaming state based on the display result being "small winning". At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "9", and the small hit release preprocessing ends.

The small winning opening process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". This small win opening process includes a process that measures the elapsed time since the big winning opening was opened, and a timing that returns the big winning opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time. This includes processing to determine whether or not the When the big winning opening is returned to the closed state and the timing for ending the small winning game state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "10" and the small winning opening process ends.

The small hit end process of step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". This small win ending process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which a performance operation to notify the end of the small win game state has elapsed. Here, when the small winning gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before entering the small winning gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small winning game state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the small winning ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball payout rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning the jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

In the display result judgment table, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are displayed as special symbols for "jackpot" than when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state (low probability state). assigned to the result. As a result, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a high probability state such as a variable probability state in which probability variable control is performed, the probability that the jackpot gaming state will be determined is higher than when it is in a low probability state such as a normal state or a time saving state. It gets expensive.

In the first special figure display result determination table, the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and controlled to a small win gaming state is determined to be the same value, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. A value is assigned. In the second special figure display result determination table, the first special figure display result is the probability that the special figure display result will be determined as a "small hit" and will be controlled in a small win game state, regardless of the gaming state or setting value. Judgment values are assigned so that they are the same value but different from those in the judgment table. In addition, the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be a "small win" and controlled to a small win gaming state may be varied depending on the set value. Regardless of the variable special figure, the probability of determining that the special figure display result will be a "small win" and control to a small win game state may be set to be the same probability.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit judgment values is determined regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots. When the setting value is 1, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while setting value 2 to setting value 6 is assigned to "jackpot". In this case, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure and the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values indicates that the jackpot will be won regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for judgment. When the setting value is 1, by assigning 1020 to 1346 to "jackpot", only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set, while on the other hand, setting value 2 to setting value In the case of 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1346 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the first special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33094 of the hit judgment values is set to It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit determination values is the small value for determining a small hit regardless of the set value. It is set to a common numerical range of hit judgment values. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure, when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the range from 32767 to 33421 of the hit judgment values is the set value, just as when the gaming state is in the normal state or time saving state. It is set to a common numerical range of the small hit determination value for determining a small hit regardless of the number of small hits. The small hit determination value is set to a numerical range different from the common numerical range and non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value, regardless of the set value from 1 to 6. This prevents the numerical range of the small hit determination value from overlapping the range of the jackpot determination value, which changes according to each set value.

The number of setting values that can be set in the pachinko game machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. The smaller the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player. The gameplay may be changed depending on the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, if the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the gameplay is such that the probability of winning in the variable state is looped at a rate of 65% (so-called variable loop type), When the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is 2, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/200, and during the jackpot game, the game ball is While the game state after the end of the jackpot game is controlled to be a variable state based on passing through the switch, the gaming state (so-called V If the setting value set in pachinko machine 1 is 3, the jackpot probability is 1/320, the small win probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). The game may be controlled to a jackpot game state based on the ball passing through a predetermined switch provided inside the special variable winning ball device 7 (so-called 1 type, 2 type mixed type). If the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is any one of 1 to 3, the gameplay is the same, but the jackpot probability and small hit are higher than when these setting values are 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the probability is high but the number of prize balls that can be obtained during a jackpot game is small (for example, when the setting value set in the pachinko game machine 1 is one of 4 to 6). When changing the gameplay depending on the set value, a common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, when the set value is 1 to 3, a predetermined switch provided in the special variable winning ball device 7 is used as a production switch (to execute a predetermined production every time a game ball passes a predetermined area). switch), and when the setting value is 4 to 6, the specified switch is used as a gaming switch (for controlling the gaming state to a variable probability state or a jackpot gaming state based on the game ball passing through the specified switch). It may also be used as a switch.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the initial position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to emit a prohibition command (DI command). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 8 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 9, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the production control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177, depending on the value of the production process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state or a small win game state. Then, when receiving a production control command that specifies the start of a jackpot game state or a small win game state, if the command specifies the start of a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "6". ”. On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of a small win game state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "4", which is a value corresponding to the small win performance process. In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state or the small win game state, it is determined that the display result in the special drawing game is a "lose". Then, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The small hit performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "4". In this small win performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the small win game state, and executes various performance controls in the small win game state based on the set content. . In addition, in the small hit production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the small win game state, the value of the production process flag is set to a value corresponding to the small win ending production. It is updated to a certain "5" and the small hit performance process is ended.

The small hit end production process in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "5". In this small hit end performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the small win game state, for example, and performs various performance controls at the end of the small win game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the performance process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the small hit end performance process is ended.

The jackpot performance process in step S176 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "7", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S177 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation example of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "higher", "lower", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 135SG)
Next, the feature section 135SG (hereinafter abbreviated as main feature section 135SG) in the embodiment of the present invention will be described. FIG. 10-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 135SG. As shown in FIG. 10-1, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this feature section 135SG, a winning flash lamp 135SG009F imitating the character A is provided on the right side of the image display device 5, and a winning ball device 6A A starting port lamp 135SG009S for causing the winning ball device 6A (first starting port) to emit light is provided near the starting port.

Further, a stick lamp 135SG009X for causing the stick controller 31A to emit light is provided in the stick controller 31A, and a button lamp 135SG009Y for causing the push button 31B to emit light is provided in the push button 31B. These stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135Sg009Y, together with the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d, constitute the game effect lamp 9 in the main feature section 135SG.

As shown in FIG. 10-2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the starting lamp 135SG009S, the stick lamp 135SG09X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y are connected to the lamp control board 14, and are used for performance control via the lamp control board 14. It can be turned on (flashing) under control from the CPU 120.

FIG. 10-3 is an explanatory diagram showing the image display device 5 in the feature section 135SG. Most of the display area of the image display device 5 in the feature section 135SG constitutes a first display area 135SG005F for displaying effects such as variable display of decorative symbols and reach effects. In addition, the lower end of the image display device 5 includes a first reservation memory display area 135SG005D in which the number of reserved first special symbols can be displayed by the number of circular reservation displays, and a second reservation memory number of special symbols can be displayed by a circular reservation display. The second display area 135SG005Sa includes a second reserved storage display area 135SG005U that can be displayed according to the number of characters, and a telop display area 135SG005T that can display telops indicating the game status, the performance being executed, etc.

The upper right end of the image display device 5 has a fourth symbol 135SG005J indicating that the special symbol is being variably displayed, a display of the first special symbol pending memory number, and a display of the second special symbol pending memory number. 3 display area 135SG005Sb.

Among these, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the center of the first display area 135SG005F, and it is possible to perform variable display of decorative patterns. It has become. Moreover, a small pattern 135SG005M smaller in size than each decorative pattern is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F. The small patterns include the decorative patterns displayed in the "left" decorative pattern display area 5L, the decorative patterns displayed in the "middle" decorative pattern display area 5C, and the "right" decorative pattern display areas. The symbols corresponding to the decorative symbols displayed on 5R are vertically arranged. Moreover, the small pattern 135SG005M is a pattern that is not hidden during variable display and is always displayed within the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5.

In addition, in the main characteristic part 135SG, as shown in FIG. It is arranged at the left end of the 1 display area 135SG005F in a smaller size than the decorative pattern. Therefore, the visibility of the small pattern 135SG005M is lower than the visibility of the decorative pattern.

Furthermore, an active display area 135SG005A is provided at the lower center of the first display area 135SG005F in the main feature section 135SG for displaying a pending display corresponding to the variable display being executed as an active display.

Hereinafter, in this characteristic section 135SG, the pending display and the active display may be collectively referred to as a specific display.

FIG. 10-4(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command used in the feature section 135SG. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 10-4(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 10-4(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time (variable display time)) of a symbol (also referred to as a performance symbol). Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. The variable display result specification command determines whether the variable display result (also referred to as variable display result) is a "miss", "big hit", or "small hit", as shown in Figure 10-4 (B), for example. Different EXT data is set depending on the result (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result).

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-4(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command that indicates a predetermined result that the variable display result is "miss". . Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "uncertain variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command that notifies a predetermined result that the variable display result is a "small win."

Command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command that specifies stopping (determination) of variation of decorative symbols in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which neither time saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a command in which time saving control is performed. This is a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, time saving state) in which probability change control is not performed. In addition, command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which probability variable control is performed but time saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, probability variable state without time saving), and command 9503H is a command 9503H for time saving control and probability variable. This command is a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the gaming states (high probability high base state, time saving variable probability state) which are both controlled.

The command A0XXH is a win start designation command (also referred to as a "fanfare command") that designates the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game or a small win game. Command A1XXH is a big winning hole opening notification command that notifies that the big winning hole is in an open state in the jackpot gaming state. Command A2XXH is a post-opening notification command for the jackpot that notifies that the jackpot has changed from the open state to the closed state during the jackpot gaming state. Command A3XXH is a winning end designation command that designates the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or a small winning.

In the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, for example, the same EXT data as the variable display result designation command may be set, so that different EXT data may be set depending on the predetermined result or the jackpot type determination result. . Alternatively, in the winning start designation command and the winning end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command while the big winning hole is open and the notification command after the big winning hole is opened, different EXT data is set, for example, corresponding to the number of rounds to be executed in the jackpot state (for example, "1" to "10"), which will be described later. .

The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that passed through (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A was detected by the first starting opening switch 22A and a starting prize (first starting winning) occurred. This is a first starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the first starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred. , is a second starting opening winning designation command that notifies that the second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

The command C1XXH is a first pending memory number notification command that notifies the first special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. Command C2XXH is a second pending memory number notification command that notifies the second special figure pending memory number in order to make it possible to specify the special figure pending memory number. The first pending storage number notification command is, for example, when the first starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the first starting winning opening and the first starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The second pending memory number notification command is, for example, when the second starting opening winning designation command is sent based on the game ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening and the second starting condition being satisfied. , is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command are used when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the number of pending memories decreases), the special figure game It may also be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total number of pending memories may be transmitted. That is, a total number of pending memories notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total number of pending memories.

Command C4XXH and command C6XXH are production control commands (winning determination result designation commands) that indicate the content of the winning determination result. Among these, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command that indicates whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or not, the jackpot type (probable variable or non-probable variable), and a small hit as the winning determination result. . In addition, the command C6XXH is a fluctuation category command that indicates whether the random value for fluctuation pattern determination is a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern as a winning determination result. It is.

Note that the commands shown in Figure 10-4(A) are just examples; some of these commands may be omitted, different commands may be used in place of these commands, or these commands may be omitted. You may add a command different from the one in . For example, a prize ball number notification command that allows you to specify the number of prize balls that will be paid out based on the game balls entering each winning slot, and a gate notification command that allows you to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41. A passage notification command, a notification command for notifying the remaining number of times the probability change control or time saving control will be executed, etc. may be provided.

FIG. 10-5 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 10-5, in this feature section 135SG, on the side of the main board 11, a random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. , and the random number MR4 for determining the display result of the ordinary figure are controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting section 135SG154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating part of MR1 to MR4 may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether the jackpot type is "probable variable jackpot A", "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", or "non-probable variable jackpot" when the variable display result is "jackpot". This is a random number value used to determine the value, and takes, for example, a value in the range of "1" to "100".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "1" to " 997'' range.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

FIG. 10-6(A) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 135SG, a common special figure display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table 1 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result into a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" based on the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the table being referenced.

In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the feature section 135SG, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether or not the special figure display result is treated as a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot gaming state. This is judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result determination table 1 in this feature section 135SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), there are more determination values than when the gaming state is in the normal state or the time saving state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 135SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (approximately 1/300 in this feature section 135SG). /30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table 1, when the gaming state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that the control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability of winning, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state.

Further, FIG. 10-6(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 2 is a variable display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result whether or not to control the variable display result to a "small win" game state as a "small win". This is the table referenced for this purpose.

In the special figure display result determination table 2 in this feature section 135SG, regardless of whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "small hit".

In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines whether to control the special figure display result to a "small hit" game state as a "small hit". This is the judgment data assigned to the decision result. In the special figure display result judgment table 2 in this feature section 135SG, the number of judgment values assigned to the "small hit" is different depending on the first special figure game and the second special figure game. There is. Specifically, if it is a special game of the first special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the "small hit", but if it is a special figure game of the second special figure, the judgment value is assigned to the "small hit". No judgment value has been assigned. Therefore, as will be described later, the variable display of the second special figure is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special figure, and the time saving control is executed to generate the second starting winning prize formed by the variable winning ball device 6B. In the high base state where winnings occur and the variable display of the second special figure is often executed, "small hits" almost never occur, and the second start formed by the variable winning ball device 6B In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter a prize opening, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a small hit in which many game balls cannot be obtained, thereby preventing the game interest from decreasing.

FIG. 10-7(A) shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 135SG selects one of multiple jackpot types based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special figure display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled. This is a table that is referenced to determine the In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol for which variable display (fluctuating display) was performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) 2 special pattern display device 4B), the numerical value (judgment value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type may be "non-probable variable jackpot", "probable variable jackpot A", or " They are assigned to a plurality of jackpot types such as "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C."

Here, to explain the jackpot types in this feature section 135SG using FIG. 10-7(B), in this feature section 135SG, high accuracy control and time saving control are set as jackpot types after the end of the jackpot gaming state. "Probability variable jackpot A" and "Probability variable jackpot B" which are executed and move to a high-precision high base state, and a high-probability low base state in which high-precision control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot gaming state ends. A "probable variable jackpot C" that shifts, and a "non-probable variable jackpot" that shifts to a low-probability-high base state after the end of the jackpot gaming state where only the time saving control is executed are set.

The jackpot game state by the "probable variable jackpot A" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot B" is a normal open jackpot in which rounds of changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed five times (so-called 5 rounds). . The jackpot game state of "Probable Variable Jackpot C" is a normal open jackpot in which the land that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds). . In addition, in the jackpot game state of "probable variable jackpot C" and "non-probable variable jackpot", rounds in which the special variable winning ball device 7 is changed to the first state advantageous to the player are repeatedly executed twice (so-called 2 rounds). It is usually an open jackpot. Therefore, the "probable variable jackpot A" is referred to as the 10 round (10R) fixed variable jackpot, the "probable variable jackpot B" is referred to as the 5 round (5R) variable variable jackpot, and the "probable variable jackpot C" is referred to as the 2 round (2R) variable variable jackpot. Sometimes called.

Although not particularly shown, the small winning game state in the feature section 135SG changes the special variable winning ball device 7 twice to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the opening time is 0.1 seconds. It has become. Furthermore, after the small winning game ends, the gaming state immediately before the small winning game is carried over.

The high-precision control and time-saving control that are executed after the jackpot gaming state of variable probability jackpots are continuously executed until the jackpot occurs again after the jackpot gaming state ends. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is a variable probability jackpot, the high probability control and time saving control are executed again after the jackpot gaming state ends, so the jackpot gaming state occurs continuously without going through the normal state. , resulting in a so-called consecutive housing situation.

On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to the "non-probable variable jackpot" requires that the special figure game be executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in this feature section 135SG), or that the special figure game be executed the predetermined number of times. The game ends by entering a jackpot game state before the game is executed.

In the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 10-7(A), depending on whether the variably displayed special drawing is the first special drawing or the second special drawing, "probable variable jackpot A", " The assignment of determination values to the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B", "probable variable jackpot C", and "non-probable variable jackpot" is different. In other words, when the variably displayed special figure is the first special figure, the judgment value in the predetermined range (value in the range of "81" to "100") is "Probable Variable Jackpot B" or "Probable Variable Jacket B" with a small number of rounds. If the variablely displayed special figure is the second special figure, a judgment value is assigned to the jackpot type of "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". It has not been done. With such settings, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the first starting condition for starting the special pattern game using the first special pattern displayed by the first special pattern display device 4A. and when the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the fulfillment of the second start condition for starting the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. Therefore, the ratio at which the jackpot type is determined to be "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C" with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special pattern game using the second special pattern, the jackpot type is not determined to be controlled to a normal open jackpot state or a high speed open jackpot state with a small number of rounds, such as "probable variable jackpot B" or "probable variable jackpot C". Therefore, for example, by high opening control accompanying time saving control, in a gaming state where game balls are likely to enter the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state where few prize balls are obtained can be avoided. This prevents the player from losing interest in the game.

In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in Figure 10-7 (A), the assignment of the determination value to the jackpot type of "non-probable variation" is determined by whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game. Since it is the same regardless of whether it is the same, the probability of a non-probable jackpot and the probability of a fixed jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special game or the second special game. It is said that

Therefore, as mentioned above, the allocation of judgment values for "probable strange jackpot B" and "probable strange jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is a special game of the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the judgment value for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special figure game or the second special figure game, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a large number of rounds, It is set so that it is easier to decide if it is a special figure game of a special figure than if it is a special figure game of the first special figure.

In addition, even in the case of the special game of the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range that is different from the case of the special figure game of the first special figure is the jackpot of "probable strange jackpot B" or "probable strange jackpot C". It may be possible to assign it to a type. For example, in the case of a special pattern game with the second special pattern, the judgment value is smaller than in the case of a special pattern game with the first special pattern, for the jackpot types of "probable variable jackpot B" and "probable variable jackpot C". May be assigned. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data regardless of whether it is a first special figure game or a second special figure game.

FIG. 10-8 shows a variation pattern in the main feature section 135SG. In this feature section 135SG, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach effect is executed, and a super reach variation pattern in which a super reach effect is executed. In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, the normal reach variation pattern includes a normal reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect described below is not executed, and a normal reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect described below is executed once, and a common normal reach variation pattern. is now executed. Furthermore, the super reach variation pattern includes a super reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed twice, which will be described later, and a super reach variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect, which will be described later, is executed three times. The performance is now executed. In other words, although this feature section 135SG exemplifies a form in which only one type of reach performance is provided as a normal reach reach performance and a super reach reach performance, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a plurality of reach effects may be provided as normal reach effects and super reach effects.

Incidentally, the variation pattern in this feature section 135SG includes a special winning variation pattern ( PC1-1) is also included.

As shown in FIG. 10-8, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach variation pattern is executed in the feature section 135SG is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern.

In addition, the normal reach variation pattern in this feature section 135SG includes a variation pattern in which a pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, in which the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and variable-displayed again during a variable display, and a pseudo-continuous effect is executed once during a variable display. There is a variation pattern. In addition, in the normal reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is not performed during the variable display is set to have a shorter special figure variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed once during the variable display.

Furthermore, regarding the super reach variation patterns in this feature section 135SG, there are a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during a variable display, and a variation pattern in which a pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during a variable display. In addition, in the super reach variation pattern, the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed twice during the variable display is set to have a shorter special symbol variation time than the variation pattern in which the pseudo continuous effect is executed 3 times during the variable display. .

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, since the variable display result is set to be a "jackpot" and the jackpot expectation level increases in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach, in the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, The longer the special figure fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a jackpot.

In other words, regarding the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern in this feature section 135SG, the greater the number of times the pseudo continuous performance is executed during the variable display, the higher the jackpot expectation level becomes.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, as will be described later, the type of these fluctuation patterns is determined first, such as a non-reach type, a normal reach type, a super reach type, etc. After that, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from among the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and from these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 10-9 is an explanatory diagram of a method for determining a variation pattern in this characteristic section 135SG. In this feature section 135SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected differs depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of pending memories.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-9, if the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table A to determine the variation pattern. PB1-1 (variation pattern of normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (variation pattern of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1-time jackpot), PB1-3 (variation pattern of super reach pseudo-continuous performance 2-time jackpot), PB1-4 (super reach pseudo-continuous performance 2-time jackpot variation pattern) It is determined from the variable pattern of reach pseudo consecutive performance 3 times jackpot). In addition, if the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and use the jackpot variation pattern determination table B to change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot variation pattern), PB1 Determined from -2 (Normal reach pseudo consecutive performance 1 time jackpot variation pattern), PB1-3 (Normal reach pseudo continuous performance 2 time jackpot variation pattern), PB1-4 (Normal reach pseudo continuous performance 3 time jackpot variation pattern) .

As shown in FIG. 10-9, the jackpot variation pattern determination table A and the jackpot variation pattern determination table B have different determination ratios for PB1-1 to PB1-4. Specifically, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 30%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 45%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 20%, Determine PB1-4 at a rate of 5%. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 5%, PB1-2 is determined at a rate of 20%, PB1-3 is determined at a rate of 30%, and PB1-1 is determined at a rate of 20%. 4 at a rate of 45%. In other words, in this feature section 135SG, when the variable display result is a probability variable jackpot, the super reach variation pattern is determined at a higher rate than when the variable display result is a non-probability variable jackpot. Furthermore, when paying attention to the number of times pseudo-continuous effects are executed, when the variable display result is a variable probability jackpot, it is easier to execute many pseudo-continuous effects during the variable display than when the variable display result is a non-probable variable jackpot. There is. Therefore, this feature section 135SG allows the player to pay attention to the variation pattern in the variable display and the number of executions of the pseudo continuous performance.

In addition, if the variable display result is a small hit, select the special win fluctuation pattern determination table, and use the special win fluctuation pattern determination table to determine the fluctuation pattern as PC1-1 (special win fluctuation pattern). do.

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the fluctuation pattern determination table A for loss and select the corresponding Using fluctuation pattern determination table A for misses, change the variation patterns to PA1-1 (non-reach variation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach variation pattern), and PA2-2 (normal reach pseudo-continuous performance 1-time variation variation pattern). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (variation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern determination table B for the loss, and Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns into PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern with one miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance). ), PA2-3 (variation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (variation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for the loss, and Using fluctuation pattern determination table B, change the fluctuation patterns into PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern with one miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance). ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "Low" in the normal gaming state (low base state) and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 4, select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss, and select the fluctuation pattern judgment table C for the loss. Using fluctuation pattern determination table C, change the fluctuation patterns into PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), and PA2-2 (variation pattern with one miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance). ), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern with two missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances), and PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern with three missed super reach pseudo consecutive performances).

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state (high base state), select the variation pattern determination table D for failure, and change the fluctuation pattern to PA1-4 using the fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure. (time-saving shortening variation pattern with non-reach miss), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach miss), PA2-2 (variation pattern with 1 miss of normal reach pseudo-continuous performance), PA2-3 (super reach pseudo-continuous performance 2 times) It is determined from PA2-4 (variation pattern of failure of 3 times of super reach pseudo consecutive performance).

In other words, when the variable display result in this feature section 135SG is "off", the special figure is displayed based on the fact that the number of pending memory of the variable special figure is 3 or 4, or that the time is shortened. The rate at which variable display is executed is higher due to shortening variation patterns (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) whose variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach variation pattern (PA1-1). This makes it possible to prevent the game from being delayed and shorten the period until the next variable display result becomes a jackpot.

The RAM 102 in the feature section 135SG includes a game control data holding area 135SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The data holding area 135SG150 for game control shown in FIG. , a game control timer setting section 135SG153, a game control counter setting section 135SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 135SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started even though a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , and are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 135SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B indicates that although the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 135SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage section 135SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

The normal pattern holding storage section 135SG151C stores the holding information of the normal pattern game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the standard figure reservation storage unit 135SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the standard figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passing of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 135SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 135SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The game control timer setting section 135SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 135SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 135SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 135SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section 135SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 135SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 is provided with a performance control data holding area 135SG190 as shown in FIG. 10-11(A), for example, as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. It is being The production control data holding area 135SG190 shown in FIG. 10-11(A) includes a production control flag setting section 135SG191, a production control timer setting section 135SG192, a production control counter setting section 135SG193, and a production control buffer setting section 135SG194. We are prepared.

The production control flag setting section 135SG191 includes multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to production operation states such as the display state of production images on the screen of the image display device 5, production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, etc. A flag is set. For example, the production control flag setting unit 135SG191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 135SG192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as display operations of performance images on the screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting section 135SG192 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The performance control counter setting section 135SG193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control counter setting section 135SG193 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting section 135SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the production control buffer setting unit 135SG194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

In this feature section 135SG, data constituting the starting winning reception command buffer 135SG194A as shown in FIG. 10-11(B) is stored in a predetermined area of the production control buffer setting section 135SG194. The start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the first special symbol reserved memory. A corresponding area) is provided. In addition, the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A has a storage area (buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value (for example, "4") of the total number of reserved memories of the second special symbol reserved memory. ”) is provided. When there is a starting prize in the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening, the starting opening winning designation command (first starting opening winning designation command or second starting opening winning designation command), symbol designation command, variable category designation A set of four commands, a command and a pending storage number notification command (a first pending storage number notification command or a second pending storage number notification command), is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special figure pending memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special figure pending memory in the starting winning reception command buffer 135SG194A are an area for storing these starting opening winning designation commands and a storage area for storing the symbol designating commands. Indicates the storage area, the area to store the variable category designation command, the area to store the pending storage number notification command, the area to store the pending display flag, and whether or not it is subject to the winning flash effect described later. A storage area (entry) is secured for storing the winning flash performance target flag and the first special figure pending memory and the second special figure pending memory in association with the number of pending memories. ing.

The storage contents of these storage areas (entries) are changed when the start condition is met and the variable display of the highest pending storage (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") starts. The content (data) of the pending memory for which the start condition has been met is copied to the active display buffer 135SG194B in FIG. will be deleted. Then, the storage contents of storage areas lower than the deleted reserved storage are shifted one by one to the storage areas higher up.

As described above, when the variable display of the pending memory (buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") is started, the active display buffer 135SG194B stores the content of the pending memory (for which the start condition is satisfied). Since the data) is copied, as shown in FIG. 10-11(C), a storage area similar to the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A is provided. In other words, there is an area for storing the starting opening winning designation command, an area for storing the symbol designation command, an area for storing the variable category command, an area for storing the pending storage number notification command, and an area for storing the pending display flag. , and an area for storing a winning flash effect flag indicating whether or not the winning flash effect is to be performed, which will be described later.

In this feature section 135SG, if a starting winning occurs when variable display is not being executed and there is no pending memory, a starting opening winning designation command, a symbol designation command, a variable category command, a pending winning based on the starting winning, etc. The storage number notification command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B without passing through the reception command buffer 135SG194A at the time of starting winning. Incidentally, the suspension display flag is set by the performance control CPU 120 executing a prefetch notice setting process (S161) to be described later.

The storage contents of the active display buffer 135SG194B are cleared (deleted) in the special figure waiting process executed when the variable display ends.

Note that the pending display flag is a flag indicating a display mode of an active display corresponding to a pending display or a variable display in progress. Although the details will be described later, in this feature section 135SG, it is possible to suggest the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot gaming state by the display mode of these pending display and active display (value of the pending display flag).

Next, the start-up winning determination process of the main feature section 135SG executed in step S101 of FIG. 6 will be described based on FIGS. 10-12. In the starting winning determination process, the CPU 103 first turns on the first starting opening switch 22A based on the detection signal from the first starting opening switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether the state is the same (step 135 SGS101a). At this time, if the first starting port switch 22A is in the ON state (step 135SGS101a; Y), the number of reserved memories of the first special figure, which is the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 135SGS102). The CPU 103 only needs to be able to specify the first special symbol pending storage number by reading the first pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the first pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 135SG154, for example. When the first special symbol pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 135SG155 is set to "1" ( Step 135SGS103).

When the first starting port switch 22A is off in step 135SGS101a (step 135SGS101; N), or when the number of first special symbols pending memory has reached the upper limit value in step 135SGS102 (step 135SGS102; Y), the variable Based on the detection signal from the second starting opening switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether the second starting opening switch 22B is in the on state ( Step 135SGS101b). At this time, if the second starting port switch 22B is in the on state (step 135SGS101b; Y), the number of second special figure pending memories, which is the number of pending memories of the special figure game using the second special figure, is set to the predetermined upper limit. It is determined whether the value (for example, "4" as the upper limit storage number) is reached (step 135SGS105). The CPU 103 should just be able to specify the second special symbol pending storage number by reading the second pending storage number count value which is the stored value of the second pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 135SG154, for example. When the second special figure pending storage number is not the upper limit value at step 135SGS105 (step 135SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the starting opening buffer provided in the game control buffer setting section 135SG155 is set to "2" ( Step 135SGS106).

After executing either of the processes of step 135SGS103 and step 135SGS106, the number of special symbols pending stored according to the starting opening buffer value, which is the storage value of the starting opening buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 135SGS107). For example, when the starting port buffer value is "1", the first pending storage number count value is incremented by 1, while when the starting port buffer value is "2", the second pending storage number count value is added by 1. In this way, the first pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first starting prize opening and the first starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the first special pattern is established. Updated to increase. In addition, the second pending memory number count value is 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second starting prize opening and the second starting condition corresponding to the special pattern game using the second special pattern is established. Updated to increase. At this time, the total number of pending memories is also updated by adding 1 (step 135SGS108). For example, the total pending storage number count value, which is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter provided in the game control counter setting section 135SG154, may be updated by adding one.

After executing the process of step 135SGS108, the CPU 103 selects the random number MR1 for special figure display result determination and the jackpot type determination from among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 135SG154. Numerical data indicating a random number MR2 for use and a random number MR3 for determining a variation pattern are extracted (step 135SGS109). Numerical data indicating each random number value extracted in this way is stored by being set as reservation information at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure reservation storage section according to the starting opening buffer value (step 135SGS110). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the first special figure reservation storage section 135SG151A, while when the starting opening buffer value is "2", Numerical data indicating random numbers MR1 to MR3 is stored in the second special figure reservation storage section 135SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is considered a "jackpot", and whether or not the variable display result is determined by the variable display result. It is used to determine the type of jackpot in the case of "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern is used to determine a variation pattern including variable display times of special symbols and decorative symbols. By executing the process of step 135SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random values used for determining the variable display mode including the variable display results and variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols.

Following the process of step 135SGS110, transmission settings of a starting slot winning designation command according to the starting slot buffer value are performed (step 135SGS111). For example, when the starting opening buffer value is "1", the production control board Settings are made to send the first starting opening winning designation command to No. 12. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2", by storing the storage address of the second starting opening winning designation command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area of the sending command buffer, Make settings for transmitting the second starting opening winning designation command. The starting opening winning designation command set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

Following the process of step 135SGS111, winning random value determination process is executed (step 135SGS112). After that, for example, by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in the ROM 101 in the buffer area specified by the sending command pointer in the sending command buffer, a pending storage number notification command is sent to the production control board 12. Settings are made for (step 135 SGS 113). The pending storage number notification command set in this way is sent from the main board 11 to the production control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted.

After executing the process of step 135SGS113, it is determined whether the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is "1" (step 135SGS114; Y), the starting port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS115), and then the process of step 135SGS104 is started. move on. On the other hand, when the starting opening buffer value is "2" (step 135SGS114; N), the starting opening buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 135SGS116), and then the starting winning prize is Finish the process. Thereby, even if both the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid starting winning of a game ball, processing based on the detection of both valid starting winnings can be surely completed.

FIG. 10-13(A) is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS112 of FIG. 10-12 as the winning random value determination process. In this feature section 135SG, when variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, special symbol normal processing (step S110 in FIG. 6) is performed to treat the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbol) as a "jackpot". A determination is made as to whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state. In addition, in the variation pattern setting process (step S111 in FIG. 6), a variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is determined.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning hole (the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning time random numerical value judgment process of step 135SGS112. By doing so, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol is determined to be stopped and displayed as a special symbol display result, and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined display mode with super reach is determined. As a result, before the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols based on the detection of the game ball that entered the starting prize opening starts, that is, before it is decided whether or not to win the jackpot at the start of the variable display. Beforehand, it is determined whether the special figure display result will be a "jackpot" or which category the variable display mode of the decorative pattern will be, and based on this determination result, the production control CPU 120 etc. , as will be described later, a preview effect such as a pre-read preview effect is executed.

In the winning random value determination process shown in FIG. 10-13(A), the CPU 103 first checks the status of the time saving flag and probability change flag provided in the game control flag setting section 135SG152, etc. The current gaming state in machine 1 is specified (step 135SGS121). The CPU 103 specifies that the variable probability state is in the variable probability state when the variable probability flag is in the on state, and specifies that the state is in the reduced time state when the variable variable probability flag is in the off state and the time saving flag is in the on state, and when both the variable variable flag and the time saving flag are in the state When it is off, it may be specified that it is in the normal state.

Following the process of step 135SGS121, special figure display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 10-6 is selected and set (step 135SGS122). After that, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 135SGS109 of FIG. 10-12 is within a predetermined jackpot determination range (step 135SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special figure display result of "jackpot" in the special figure display result judgment table 1 selected by the process of step 135SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 uses the random number MR1 and each judgment value. It is only necessary to determine the presence or absence of a judgment value that matches the random value MR1 by comparing the values one by one. Alternatively, by setting numerical values indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and maximum value (upper limit value) of the judgment value included in the jackpot judgment range, the CPU 103 calculates the random value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot judgment range. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot determination range by comparison. At this time, by determining that the random number MR1 is within the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the pending data including the random number MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 135SGS123 that it is not within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there is no jackpot in the variable display (step 135SGS123; N), the special figure display result determination table shown in FIG. 10-6 2 is selected and set (step 135 SGS124). Thereafter, it is determined whether the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step 135SGS109 of FIG. 10-12 is within a predetermined small hit determination range (step 135SGS125).

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is within a predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a small hit in the variable display (step 135SGS125; Y), the variable display result is determined to be a "small hit". Execute the transmission setting of the 6th symbol designation command, which is a symbol designation command according to the result (step 135SGS126), select and set the special winning variation pattern determination table (step 135SGS127), and proceed to step 135SGS138. .

If the numerical data indicating the random number MR1 is not within the predetermined small hit determination range, that is, if the variable display result is a "miss" in the variable display, a symbol will be displayed according to the variable display result being a "miss". The transmission setting of the first symbol designation command, which is the designation command, is executed (step 135SGS128), and it is determined whether the time saving flag is on, that is, whether the current gaming state is the time saving state (step 135SGS128). 135SGS129). If the time saving flag is off (step 135SGS129; N), select and set the variation pattern determination table A for failure, and if the time saving flag is on (step 135SGS129; Y), determine the variation pattern for failure. Table D is selected and set (step 135SGS131). The error variation pattern determination table A is used when the number of pending memories is two or less. Further, the losing variation pattern determination table D is a losing variation pattern determining table used when the gaming state is a high base state in which time saving control is being executed.

In addition to these fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure and fluctuation pattern determination table D for failure, this feature section 135SG also stores fluctuation pattern determination table B for failure, which is used when the number of pending memories is three. , an error variation pattern determination table C is prepared in advance to be used when the number of pending memories is 4, but as shown in FIG. 10-9, among these error variation pattern determination tables A to C. , In the variation pattern determination table A for misses, 600 judgment values from 0 to 599 are assigned to the non-reach variation patterns within the range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take, and In the fluctuation pattern determination table B, 700 determination values from 0 to 699 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern out of the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take, and the fluctuation pattern determination table for outliers is assigned. In C, 800 determination values from 0 to 799 are assigned to the non-reach fluctuation pattern out of the possible range of the random value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. On the other hand, in the fluctuation pattern determination tables A to C for losing, 97 determination values from 901 to 997 are assigned to the super reach fluctuation pattern out of the range that the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take. .

For this reason, by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure in step 135SGS126, the determination of non-reach and super reach is always determined as non-reach or super reach even if the number of retained memories changes after the determination. Since this is a fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation pattern determination table A for losing is used to determine the starting winning time.

In addition, if it is determined in step 135SGS123 that it is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that there will be a jackpot during variable display (step 135SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 10-13 (A), , the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step 135 SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 operates according to the variable special figure (the "first special figure" corresponding to "1" or the "second special figure" corresponding to "2") specified corresponding to the starting opening buffer value. , selects table data for jackpot type determination from table data configuring the jackpot type determination table. Then, by referring to the selected table data for determining the jackpot type, it is determined which of the plurality of jackpot types is to be determined.

In addition, the symbol designation command according to the determined jackpot type, that is, the second symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot A, the third symbol designation command if it is a probability variable jackpot B, and the third symbol specification command if it is a probability variable jackpot C. executes the transmission setting of the 4th symbol designation command, and if it is a non-variable jackpot, the 5th symbol designation command (step 135 SGS133), and then determines whether the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot. (Step 135 SGS134). If the determined jackpot type is a non-probable variable jackpot (step 135SGS134; Y), select and set the jackpot variation pattern determination table A as the table for determining the jackpot variation pattern (step 135SGS135), and step Proceed to 135SGS138.

Further, when the determined jackpot type is a variable probability jackpot (step 135SGS134; N), the jackpot variation pattern determination table B is selected and set (step 135SGS136), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS138.

After executing any of the processes in step 135SGS127, step 135SGS130, step 135SGS131, step 135SGS135, and step 135SGS136, each fluctuation pattern determination table set in each of these steps and a numerical value indicating the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are Using the data, a fluctuation category is determined according to the range of determination values including the random value MR3 (step 135 SGS138). In this feature section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-13(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode is "non-reach" regardless of the total number of pending memories. A variable category that is a variable display mode of "Super Reach", a variable category of "Other" that is a variable display mode other than "Non-reach" and "Super Reach" (for example, normal reach), It is sufficient if it can be determined based on the random value MR3 whether or not such a fluctuation category is determined.

Thereafter, a setting is made to transmit a variable category designation command according to the determination result of the process of step 135SGS138 to the production control board 12 (step 135SGS139), and then the winning random number value determination process is ended.

FIG. 10-14 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S75 of FIG. 8 as the command analysis process. In the command analysis process shown in FIG. 10-14, the production control CPU 120 first confirms the storage contents of the production control command reception buffer and receives the reception from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. It is determined whether there is a command (step 135 SGS 221). At this time, if there is no received command (step 135SGS221; N), the command analysis process ends.

If there is a received command in step 135SGS221 (step 135SGS221; Y), it is determined whether or not the received command is the first starting opening winning designation command, for example by checking the MODE data of the received command. (Step 135 SGS222).

If the received command is not the first starting slot winning designation command at step 135SGS222 (step 135SGS222; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second starting slot winning designation command (step 135SGS224).

If the received command is not the second starting opening winning designation command at step 135SGS224 (step 135SGS224; N), it is determined whether the received command is a symbol designation command (step 135SGS226). If the received command is not a symbol designation command at step 135SGS226 (step 135SGS226; N), it is determined whether the received command is a variable category command (step 135SGS227). If the received command is not a variable category command in step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; N), it is determined whether the received command is a first pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS228).

If the received command is not the first pending storage number notification command at step 135SGS228 (step 135SGS228; N), it is determined whether the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230).

If the received command in step 135SGS222 is the first starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS222; Y), or if the receiving command in step 135SGS224 is the second starting opening winning designation command (step 135SGS224; Y), in step 135SGS226 If the received command is a symbol designation command (step 135SGS226; Y), if the received command is a variable category command in step 135SGS227 (step 135SGS227; Y), then in step 135SGS228, the received command is the first pending storage number notification command. (135SGS228; Y), and in step 135SGS230, if the received command is the second pending storage number notification command (step 135SGS230; Y), the received command is transferred to the starting prize receiving command buffer 135SG194A shown in FIG. 10-11. It is stored at the beginning of the free area in the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS233), and the process returns to step 135SGS221.

Specifically, in step 135SGS233, if there is no pending memory and variable display is not being executed, the received command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B, and if there is pending memory or variable display is not being executed, the received command is stored in the active display buffer 135SG194B. , the received command may be stored at the beginning of the free area in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A.

In addition, if a pending storage number notification command (first pending storage number notification command or second pending storage number notification command) is received together with a variable display start command (first variable display start command or second variable display start command), , the pending storage number notification command may not be stored in the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A. That is, it is only necessary to sequentially store the effect control commands received in response to the occurrence of a starting prize winning from the beginning of the empty area in the starting winning receiving command buffer 135SG194A.

If the received command is not the second pending storage number notification command in step 135SGS230 (step 135SGS230; N), settings are made in accordance with other received commands (step 135SGS234), and the process returns to step 135SGS221.

In addition, in the command analysis process of this feature section 135SG, if the received command is any one of the starting opening winning designation command, symbol designation command, variable category command, and pending storage number notification command, the received command is used at the starting winning time. Although the embodiment has been illustrated in which the received command is stored sequentially from the beginning of the free area of the received command buffer 135SG194A, the present invention is not limited to this, and if the received command is the 1st starting opening winning prize designation command, it is stored as the pending memory number notification command. If a timer is set to wait for the reception of the number of pending memories, and if no pending memory number notification command is received before the timer times out, the pending memory of the entry that has not received the number of pending memory notification commands will be processed as described below. It may be set to be excluded from the reading preview performance.

Next, the production control process processing in the feature section 135SG will be explained. As shown in FIG. 10-15, in the production control process processing, the production control CPU 120 executes the prefetch notice setting process (step S161), and then displays the active display area 135SG005A, the first pending storage display area 135SG005D, and the second pending display area 135SG005A. A specific display start effect execution process (step 135SGS162) is executed to execute a specific display start effect as a display start animation of the pending display in the storage display area 135SG005U and a display start animation of the active display in the active display area 135SG005A. Further, after the specific display start performance execution process, the performance control CPU 120 performs a winning flash performance execution process (step 135SGS163) to execute a winning flash performance, and a pending display after the above-mentioned specific display start performance has ended. A specific display for executing a specific display rotation display effect (see Figures 10-19 (B-1) to 10-19 (B-4)) as a rotation animation according to the value of the display mode flag of the active display. In the rotating display performance execution process (step 135SGS164), when it is decided to execute the suspended display preview performance as a pre-read preview in the feature section 135SG, the variable display based on the suspended memory that is the target of the suspended display preview performance ends. Until then, a starting exit lamp lighting performance execution process (step 135SG165) is executed to execute a starting exit lamp lighting performance that causes the starting exit lamp 135SG009S to emit light in a color corresponding to the display mode of the hold display/active display based on the hold memory. Then, any one of steps S170 to S177 is executed.

Note that the specific display rotating display effect execution processing in this feature section 135SG includes processing for shifting each pending display to the next display position based on the start of the variable display and displaying it as a rotating animation, and processing for displaying the pending display as an active display. It also includes processing for shifting to the display area 135SG005A and displaying it as a rotating animation.

FIG. 10-16 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 161 of FIG. 10-15 as the prefetch notice setting process. In the prefetch notice setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the start winning reception command buffer 135SG194A or the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS240) to determine whether there is an entry for which the display mode flag is not set. Determination is made (step 135SGS241). If there is no entry for which the display mode flag is not set (Step 135SGS241; N), the prefetch notice setting process ends; if there is an entry for which the display mode flag is not set (Step 135SGS241; Y), the prefetch notice setting process is already displayed. It is determined whether there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display preview effect as a pre-read preview effect is already being executed (step 135 SGS242). .

If there is no entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS242; N), it is further determined whether or not the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small hit (step 135SGS243). If the symbol designation command of the entry does not indicate a small hit (Step 135SGS243; N), the variable display result is specified from the symbol designation command of the entry (Step 135SGS244a), and the variable category is specified from the fluctuation category command of the entry. (Step 135SGS244b). Then, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pending display preview effect and the display pattern based on the specified variable display result and variable category (step 135SGS245).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 10-17, if the variable display result is off and the variable category is non-reach, there is a 95% chance that the pending display preview performance will not be executed (pending display or active display). The display mode is decided to be the display pattern α) which is white, and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect at a rate of 5% using the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or active display is blue), and 0% It is decided to execute the hold display preview performance in the display pattern γ (the display mode of hold display or active display is red) at a ratio of .

In addition, if the variable display result is a failure and the variable category is other (normal reach), 80% of the time the pending display notice effect will not be executed (the display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or active display is white) ), it is decided to execute the pending display preview effect at a rate of 20% in the display pattern β (the display mode of pending display or active display is blue), and the display pattern to display the pending display notice effect at a rate of 0%. It is decided to execute the process in γ (the display mode of pending display or active display is red).

In addition, if the variable display result is a failure and the variable category is super reach, 65% of the time the pending display notice effect will not be executed (display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or active display is white). It was decided to execute the pending display preview effect at a rate of 25% in the display pattern β (the display mode of the pending display or active display is blue), and at a rate of 10%, the pending display preview effect was executed in the display pattern γ ( It is decided to execute the display mode of the pending display or active display in red).

In addition, if the variable display result is a jackpot, it is decided that the pending display notice effect will not be executed at a rate of 15% (display pattern α in which the display mode of the pending display or active display is white), and at a rate of 30%. It has been decided to execute the pending display preview effect in display pattern β (display mode of pending display or active display is blue), and the pending display preview effect is executed in display pattern γ (display mode of pending display or active display) at a rate of 55%. (in red).

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, when the pending display and active display are displayed in red, the probability that the target variable display result will be a jackpot (jackpot expectation) is highest, and when the pending display and active display are displayed in white. It is set so that the probability of the target variable display result being a loss is highest when the result is the highest (Jackpot expectation level according to the display color of the pending display or active display: red > blue > white).

Returning to FIG. 10-16, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the pending display preview performance in step 135SGS245 (step 135SGS246). If it is determined in step 135SGS245 to execute the pending display preview effect (step 135SGS246; Y), a value ("1" or "2") corresponding to the determined display pattern is set in the display mode flag of the entry ( Step 135SGS247), the prefetch notice setting process ends.

In addition, if there is an entry whose display mode flag is already set to "1" or "2" (Step 135SGS242; Y), if the symbol designation command of the entry indicates a small hit (Step 135SGS243; Y) If it is decided not to execute the pending display preview effect (step 135SGS246; N), set the display mode flag of the entry to "0" corresponding to the non-execution of the ``drill'' display preview effect (step 135SGS248); The prefetch notice setting process ends.

Note that this feature section 135SG exemplifies a form that can be executed as a pending display preview performance by combining a pre-read preview performance that determines the display format of the pending display and a performance that determines the display format of the active display. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to separately execute the prefetch preview effect that determines the display mode of the pending display and the effect that determines the display mode of the active display as different effects. good.

FIG. 10-18 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS162 of FIG. 10-15 as the specific display start effect execution process. In the specific display start effect execution process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether either the specific display start effect A or the specific display start effect B is being executed (step 135SGS251). In addition, whether specific display start effect A or specific display start effect B is being executed depends on whether the process timer for specific display start effect A or the process timer for specific display start effect B, which will be described later, is in operation. The judgment can be made depending on whether

If specific display start effect A or specific display start effect B is not being executed (step 135SGS251; N), check whether a start win designation command is received (whether the start win designation command reception flag is set or not) is determined (step 135SGS252). If the start winning designation command is not received (step 135SGS252; N), the specific display start performance execution process is ended. In addition, if a starting winning designation command has been received (step 135SGS252; Y), a newly generated pending memory entry is identified by referring to the starting winning receiving command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B ( 263SGS273), it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is reserved (step 135SGS253a). It should be noted that whether or not it is the first special figure pending storage may be determined based on the starting opening winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry (identified entry) is not the first special figure pending memory (step 135SGS253a; N), the process advances to step 135SGS255, and if the entry is the first special figure pending memory (step 135SGS253a; Y), the specified entry is It is determined whether or not the display mode flag of the entered entry is 0, that is, whether or not this entry is the target of the pending display preview effect (step 135SGS254). If the display mode flag of the specified entry is 0, that is, if the entry is not the target of the pending display preview performance (step 135SGS254; Y), the process advances to step 135SGS255.

In the process of step 135SGS255, the effect control CPU 120 selects the process table for specific display start effect A according to the display position of the specific display (suspended display or active display). Then, a process timer for specific display start effect A is started (step 135SGS256).

In addition, if the display mode flag of the specified entry is not 0, that is, if the entry is the target of the pending display preview effect (step 135SGS254; N), the display position of the specific display (pending display or active display) The corresponding process table for specific display start effect B is selected (step 135SGS257). Then, a process timer for specific display start performance B is started (step 135SGS258).

After executing step 135SGS256 or step 135SGS258, the effect control CPU 120 controls the effect device according to the contents of process data 1 of the set specific display start effect process table (step 135SGS259), and ends the specific display start effect execution process. .

Further, when specific display start effect A or specific display start effect B is being executed (step 135SGS251; Y), the effect control CPU 120 controls the process timer for specific display start effect (process for specific display start effect A) for specific display start effect being executed. The value of the timer or the process timer for specific display start effect B) is reduced by 1 (step 135 SGS260), and the process timer for the specific display start effect (the process timer for the specific display start effect that is being executed) that has been reduced by 1 times out. It is determined whether or not it has been done (step 135SGS261). If the process timer for specific display start effect that is being executed does not time out (step 135SGS261; N), the effect device is controlled in accordance with the process data of the process timer for specific display start effect that is being executed (step 135SGS262), the specific display start effect execution process ends.

In addition, if the process timer for specific display start effect that is being executed times out (step 135SGS261; Y), it is determined whether the process timer for specific display start effect is the last process timer for specific display start effect. (Step 135SGS263). If the last specific display start effect process timer times out (step 135SGS263; Y), the specific display start effect is ended (step 135SGS267), and the specific display start effect execution process is ended. If the process timer for the last specific display start effect has not timed out (step 135SGS263; N), the process data is switched, the process timer for the next specific display start effect is started, and the next specific display start effect is started. The production device is controlled according to the content corresponding to the process data of the process timer (step 135SGS264, step 135SGS265, step 135SGS266), and the specific display start production execution process is ended.

As described above, in this feature section 135SG, if a starting prize occurs and it is decided not to perform a pre-read preview performance (pending display preview performance) based on the starting winning, or if the starting winning occurs in the second In the case of a starting prize in the starting opening, as shown in Figure 10-19 (A), Figure 10-19 (B), Figure 10-19 (B-1) to Figure 10-19 (B-4). , at a position corresponding to the number of pending memories in the active display area 135SG005A or the pending memory display areas 135SG005D, 135SG005U, an appearance animation in which a pending display (active display) gradually appears from the bottom to the top is displayed as specific display start effect A. .

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, the period from the occurrence of a starting prize to the end of the appearance animation of the pending display (active display) as the specific display start effect A is about 0.2 seconds. Then, the pending display (active display) after the end of the specific display start effect A is as the above-mentioned specific display rotation display effect in the active display area 135SG005A or the pending memory display area 135SG005D, 135SG005U, like other pending displays and active displays. Shift to display with rotation animation.

In addition, if a starting prize has occurred, and it has been decided to execute a pre-read notice performance (pending display notice performance) based on the starting prize, and if the starting prize is a starting prize in the first starting gate, As shown in Figures 10-20(A) to 10-20(C) and Figures 10-20(C-1) to 10-20(C-4), as specific display start effect B, first, the image An animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the display device 5. After the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the variable display is executed at the timing of the start winning, or if the first special figure pending memory already exists, the character A An animation of moving to the 1 pending storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. At this time, the character A is displayed overlapping a part of the active display area 135SG005A in the process of moving to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D.

Then, when the character A moves to the first reserved memory display area 135SG005D, as shown in FIGS. 10-20 (C-1) to 10-20 (C-4), the character A An animation that attacks (acts on) the position where the hold display is displayed is displayed. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which a hold display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In this feature section 135SG, the period from the occurrence of a starting prize to the end of the animation in which the character A attacks the position where the pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed as the specific display start effect B is approximately 1 second, and the period from the end of the animation to the end of the appearance animation of the suspended display is approximately 0.2 seconds. In other words, when performing specific display start effect B targeting the pending display of the first special symbol, it takes 1.2 seconds from the time a starting prize occurs until the display of the pending display based on the starting prize is completed. . Then, the hold display after the end of the specific display start performance B transitions to a rotating animation display in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D as the above-mentioned specific display rotation display performance, similar to other hold displays and active displays.

In addition, when the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the specific display start effect B, if the variable display is not executed at the timing of the start winning and the first special figure pending memory does not exist. , an animation in which character A moves to active display area 135SG005A is displayed. Then, when the character A moves to the active display area 135SG005A, the active display is displayed based on the starting prize, as in Figures 10-20 (C-1) to 10-20 (C-4). An animation of attacking (acting) on the active display area 135SG005A is displayed. When the display of the animation ends, an appearance animation is displayed in which the active display gradually appears from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A attacked.

In this feature section 135SG, the period from the occurrence of a starting prize to the end of the animation in which character A attacks the active display area 135SG005A as the specific display start effect B is about 0.5 seconds, The period from when the appearance animation of the active display ends is approximately 0.2 seconds. That is, when performing the specific display start performance B targeting the active display, it takes 0.7 seconds from the occurrence of a starting prize to the completion of the display of the active display based on the starting winning. Then, the active display after the end of the specific display start effect B shifts to a rotating animation display in the active display area 135SG005A as the above-described specific display rotating display effect.

10-21 and 10-22 are flowcharts showing an example of the process executed in step 135SGS163 of FIG. 10-21 as the winning flash effect execution process. In the winning flash performance execution process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the starting winning receiving command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS272), and displays the starting winning receiving command buffer 135SG194A and the active display buffer 135SG194B. It is determined whether there is an entry whose mode flag is set to "1" or "2", that is, whether or not the pending display preview effect is being executed (step 135SGS273).

If there is an entry in which the display mode flag is set to "1" or "2" (step 135SGS273; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the entry is based on a winning start at the first start opening. It is determined whether or not (step 135SGS274). It should be noted that whether or not the entry is based on a starting prize in the first starting hole may be determined from the starting hole winning designation command stored in the entry.

If the entry is an entry based on a starting prize into the first starting opening (step 135SGS274; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the gaming state is the normal state or not (step 135SGS275). If the gaming state is the normal state (step 135SGS275; Y), it is further determined whether the value of the production control process flag is between 0 and 3, that is, whether the gaming state is the jackpot gaming state or the small winning gaming state. It is determined whether or not (step 135SGS276). If the value of the production control process flag is one of 0 to 3 (step 135SGS276; Y), the fluctuation category of the entry (the entry whose display mode flag is set to "1" or "2") is super. It is determined whether it is reach (step 135SGS277).

If the variable category of the entry is super reach (step 135SGS277; Y), it is determined whether the value of the production control process flag is 2, that is, whether variable display is being executed (step 135SGS278). When the value of the performance control process flag is 2 (step 135SGS278; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the ready-to-win performance is being executed (step 135SGS279). It should be noted that whether or not the ready-to-win effect is being executed may be determined based on the contents of the variable display process data.

If the value of the performance control process flag is not 2 (step 135SGS278; N) or if the reach performance is not being executed (step 135SGS279; N), the performance control CPU 120 executes the winning flash performance based on the variable display result.・Determine non-execution. Incidentally, the variable display result may be specified from the symbol designation command of the entry for which the winning flash effect flag is not set.

As shown in FIG. 10-24, if the variable display result is a loss, execution of the winning flash effect is determined at a rate of 10%, and non-execution of the winning flash effect is determined at a rate of 90%. In addition, when the variable display result is a jackpot, execution of the flash effect upon winning is determined at a rate of 20%, and non-execution of the flash effect upon winning is determined at a rate of 80%.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, when the winning flash effect is executed from the start winning time, the ratio of being controlled to the jackpot game state is set higher than when the winning flash effect is not executed.

Returning to FIG. 10-21, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it has been decided to execute the winning flash effect (step 135SG279b). If it has been decided to execute the winning flash effect (Step 135SG279b; Y), the winning flash effect flag of the entry (the entry for which the winning flash effect flag is not set) is set as the target of the winning flash effect. is set to "1" indicating that it is a pending memory (step 135SG280), and the winning flash effect execution flag is turned on (step 135SG280a). The process table for the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period is selected, the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period is started, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 (steps 135SGS281 to 135SGS283), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

As shown in Figure 10-23, the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period is the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period for 1.5 seconds from the occurrence of the starting winning by the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning the prize and the game effect lamp 9. (As shown in FIGS. 10-26(A) and 10-26(B), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are lit at high brightness C1. This is a performance that causes the speakers 8L and 8R to output a sound corresponding to the winning flash performance at a volume V1, and displays the effect image 135SG005E of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. In addition, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect in this feature section 135SG is the sound corresponding to the first winning flash effect that is output during the execution of the first winning flash effect, and the second winning flash effect that is output during the execution of the second winning flash effect. When the flash is produced, it is divided into corresponding sound and sound. Among these, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, a sound having a relatively short output period (for example, 1 second), such as an electronic sound or the voice sound of a specific character, may be output once. Further, as the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the later period, it is sufficient to repeatedly output a sound having a longer output period than the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the earlier period, such as dedicated BGM or SE (sound effect). In addition, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 135SG, in addition to the above-mentioned sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, a plurality of effect sounds such as the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display, which will be described later, are generated in different ways using different channels. Simultaneous output from speakers 8L and 8R is possible depending on the volume.

In addition, if the entry is an entry based on winning the second starting opening (step 135SG274; N), and if the gaming state is not the normal state (step 135SG275; N), the performance control process flag is either 0 to 3. If not (Step 135SG276; N), if the variable category of the entry is not Super Reach (Step 135SG277; N), if the reach effect is being executed (Step 135SG279; Y), do not execute the flash effect when winning a prize. If it is determined (Step 135SG279b), the winning flash performance target flag of the entry is set to "0" indicating that it is not eligible for the winning flash performance (Step 135SG279c), and the winning flash performance execution process is executed. finish.

In addition, when the winning flash effect execution flag is on in step 135SGS271 (step 135SGS271; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the process timer for the previous winning flash effect is in operation (step 135SGS271; Y). 135SGS284). If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period is operating (Step 135SGS284; Y), the value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period is -1 (Step 135SGS285), and the value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period is decreased by 1, and then the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period is activated. It is determined whether the process timer for flash effect at the time of winning has timed out (step 135SGS286). If the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period has not timed out (step 135SGS286; N), the performance control CPU 120 operates the performance device according to the process data of the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period which is being executed. control (step 135SGS287), and proceeds to step 135SGS292.

Further, when the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period has timed out (step 135SGS286; Y), it is determined whether the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the last period winning has timed out (step 135SGS288). If the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the last previous period has not timed out (step 135SGS288; N), the performance control CPU 120 switches the process data and starts the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the next previous period. Then, the production device is controlled in accordance with the process data of the process timer for the flash production at the time of winning the next first period (step 135SGS289, step 135SGS290, step 135SGS291), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS292.

Then, in step 135SGS292, the performance control CPU 120 controls the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and the stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period. In addition, a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1 (step 135SGS293), and the winning flash effect execution process is ended. In addition, as a mode corresponding to the first-term winning flash performance, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable body lamp 9d, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be repeatedly emitted in white or red. In addition, the modes corresponding to the flash effect when winning are the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the button lamp 135SG009X and stick lamp 135SG009Y, and the flash when winning. It is sufficient to cause the lamp 135SG009F to emit light in the same color.

Further, in step 135SGS288, when the process timer for the last first-term winning flash effect times out (step 135SGS288; Y), the performance control CPU 120 ends the first-term winning flash effect (step 135SGS294). Then, the process table for the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half is selected, the process timer for the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half is started, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data 1 (steps 135SGS294 to 135SGS297), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

As shown in Figure 10-23, the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half is the period from the end of the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period to the start timing of the reach performance of the super reach in the target variable display, when the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning the prize is turned on in the second period. A silhouette image of the character A imitated by the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is displayed on the image display device 5 by blinking in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect and outputting a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V1. This is an effect that displays 135SG005S. As a mode corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half, the lamp 135SG009F for flash at the time of winning may repeatedly emit light in white or red in the same way as the flash performance at the time of winning in the first half. In addition, since the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the second period is performed at a lower brightness than the flash effect at the time winning a prize in the first period (see Figure 10-28), the light emitting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning a prize in the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter period is as follows. The light will be emitted in a darker color than the flash effect during the previous period.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-27(A), the game effect lamp 9 (particularly the frame lamp 9b) has a brightness of C2, which is lower than the brightness of C1 described above, during a period other than during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period. The light turns on and off (flashing) repeatedly. In particular, the blinking cycle at brightness C2 is longer than the blinking cycle when the flash effect is executed at the time of winning in the previous period, and during the blinking, as shown in FIGS. 10-27(B) to 10-27(D). Thus, the frame lamp 9b is configured to blink while changing the emitted light color in stages at a plurality of locations in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. Therefore, the game effect lamp 9 during a period other than the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the previous period gives a lower impression to the player than the game effect lamp 9 during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the previous period.

In addition, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period is not operating in step 135SGS284, that is, if the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period is in operation (step 135SGS284; N), the CPU 120 for controlling the effect The value of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning is -1 (step 135SGS298), and it is determined whether the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the latter half of the win, which has been decremented by 1, has timed out (step 135SGS299). If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning has not timed out (step 135SGS299; N), the effect device is controlled according to the process data of the process timer for the flash effect at the time of late prize winning which is being executed (step 135SGS300). ), proceed to step 135 SGS307.

Then, when the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the later period has timed out (step 135SGS299; Y), it is determined whether the process timer for the flash effect at the time of the last winning event in the latter period has timed out (step 135SGS301). If the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the last latter period has not timed out (step 135SGS301; N), the process data is switched, the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the next latter period is started, and the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the next latter period is started. The production device is controlled according to the content (steps 135SGS302 to 135SGS304), and the process proceeds to step 135SGS307.

In addition, if the process timer for the flash performance at the time of the last late winning time has timed out (step 135SGS301; Y), the process timer for the flash performance at the time of the first late winning time is started, and the performance device is controlled according to the contents of process data 1 ( Step 135SGS305, step 135SGS306) and step 135SGS307 are proceeded to.

In step 135SGS307, the performance control CPU 120 controls the winning flash lamp 135SG009F to blink in a manner corresponding to the late winning flash performance. In addition, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1 (step 135SGS308).

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 checks the active display buffer 135SG194B (step 135SGS309), and determines whether the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "1", that is, the variable display being executed. It is determined whether or not is a variable display subject to a flash effect when winning a prize (step 135SGS310). When the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "0" (step 135SGS310; N), the winning flash performance execution process is ended. If the winning flash performance target flag of the active display buffer 135SG194B is set to "1" (step 135SGS310; Y), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ready-to-win performance (step 135SGS311).

If it is the start timing of the reach effect (step 135SGS311; Y), the effect control CPU 120 ends the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, turns off the flash effect in progress at the time of winning (step 135SGS312, step 135SGS313), The flash effect execution process ends.

Moreover, when it is not the start timing of the ready-to-win effect (step 135SGS311; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a symbol confirmation command is received (step 135SGS311a). If the symbol confirmation command is received (Step 135SGS311a; Y), the flash performance at the time of winning is ended in the second half, the flash performance execution flag at the time of winning is turned off (Step 135SGS312, Step 135SGS313), and the flash performance execution process is executed at the time of winning. finish. If no symbol confirmation command is received (step 135SGS311a; N), the winning flash effect execution process is ended without executing the processes of step 135SGS312 and step 135SGS313.

As described above, the first period winning flash performance in this feature section 135SG is a performance that ends when a predetermined period of time (for example, 1.5 seconds) has elapsed, while the second period winning flash performance is a performance This is a performance that is repeatedly executed without ending every time a certain period of time elapses until the start timing of the reach performance of the variable display of the target.

In addition, if the performance control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win performance of the variable display of the performance target during the execution of the flash performance at the time of late winning, due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the start timing of the ready-to-win performance will be determined. At the end timing of the variable display (timing of receiving the symbol confirmation command), which is a later timing, it is possible to finish the flash effect at the time of winning a second time including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning anew.

In addition, as shown in step 135SGS281 in FIG. 10-21 and step 135SGS295 in FIG. , and select the production process table 1 as the process table for flash production at the time of winning in the second half. In other words, the performance pattern (performance period) for the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period and the flash performance at the time of winning in the second period of this feature section 135SG is always the same in the same performance mode and the same performance period when winning in the first period, regardless of the number of retained memories etc. A flash effect and a flash effect when winning a prize in the latter half are executed.

FIG. 10-25 is a flowchart showing the variable display performance process (step S172) in the performance control process process. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 decreases each value of the process timer, variable time timer, and variable control timer by 1 (step 135SGS351, step 135SGS352, step 135SGS353). Note that the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer are timers that are set in the variable display start setting process.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356). If the process timer has timed out (step 135SGS356; Y), the process data is switched (step 135SGS357). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table set in the variable display start setting process to the process timer (step 135SGS358). Further, the control state for the production device (production component) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. set next (step 135SGS359). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out (step 135SGS356; N), the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc.) The performance device (performance component) is controlled according to the following (step 135SGS360).

In particular, as the control contents of steps 135SGS359 and 135SGS360, the production control CPU 120 outputs variable display compatible sound corresponding to the variable display being executed from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume V2 smaller than the volume V1 (step 135SGS361). Note that the variable display compatible sound in the feature section 135SG refers to BGM that corresponds to the background image displayed on the image display device 5, BGM that corresponds to the number of pseudo-sequential performances performed during variable display, and the like. In addition, when the flash performance at the time of winning in the previous period is not executed (step 135SGS362; N), the flashing control is performed in a manner according to the variable display being executed on the game effect lamp 9 (step 135SGS363), while the flash at the time of winning in the previous period While the performance is being executed (step 135SGS362; Y), the game effect lamp 9 is not controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the variable display being executed (as shown in FIGS. 10-21 and 10-22, the game effect lamp 9 is The lamp 9 is controlled to blink in a manner corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a preview performance execution process (step 135SG364). In the preview performance execution process, for example, at the time when the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display start setting process, it is determined whether or not to execute the preview performance during execution of the variable display, and in which performance pattern the preview performance is executed. It is only necessary to decide in advance whether or not the event will be announced, and to be able to execute the preview performance according to the result of the determination. In addition, when determining the performance pattern of the preview performance in the variable display start setting process described above, one performance pattern is determined from a plurality of performance patterns at different ratios depending on the variable display result, so that the preview performance is The rate at which the jackpot game state is controlled may vary depending on whether the performance pattern is executed.

The performance executed as a preview performance in the feature section 135SG is a dialogue preview performance in which characters' lines are displayed on the image display device 5, and the jackpot expectation level varies depending on the displayed lines.

Further, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 135SGS365; Y), the production control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of the left-center right decorative symbol (displayed after 30 ms have elapsed from the previous display switching point of the decorative symbol). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written into a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 135SGS366). In this way, variable display control of decorative patterns is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 sends to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this way, the background image, character image, and decorative pattern in the variable display of decorative patterns are displayed on the image display device 5. Also, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 135SGS367).

Further, if the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 135SGS365; N) or after executing step 135SGS366, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 135SGS368). . If the variable display time timer has timed out, the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation command has been received is set (step 135SGS369; Y), the value of the production control process flag is changed to special symbol hit waiting processing. (Step S173) is updated to a value corresponding to (Step 135SGS370). Even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, if a pattern confirmation command is received, the control will shift to stopping the variable display, so for example, a variation pattern designation command that indicates a long variation time due to noise between boards, etc. Even in such a case, when the regular variable display time has elapsed (at the end of the variable display of the special symbol), the variable display of the decorative symbol can be ended.

Incidentally, process data during variable display of the decorative pattern is set in the process table used for variable display control of the decorative pattern. In other words, the sum of the process timer setting values of process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n times out in the process of step 135SGS356, there is no process data to be switched (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the effect control of the decorative pattern based on the process table is finish.

Next, the operation mode of each production device when executing the winning flash production in the feature section 135SG will be explained based on FIGS. 10-28 to 10-68. First, FIG. 10-28 is a timing chart in the case where a starting winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning. Furthermore, Figure 10-28 shows both the case where the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning is decided based on the starting winning, and the execution of the pending display notice effect is also decided, and the case where it is decided not to execute the hold display notice effect. It is a corresponding timing chart. FIGS. 10-29 to 10-48 show the image display device 5 in the case where a starting winning occurs during the execution of the variable display, and based on the starting winning, it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect. It is a diagram showing an effect mode in the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. Figures 10-49 to 10-68 show that a starting winning occurs while the variable display is being executed, and based on the starting winning, it is decided to execute the winning flash effect, while it is decided not to execute the pending display preview effect. It is a figure which shows the performance mode in the image display device 5 and the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of a prize win.

In addition, in the case shown in Figures 10-29 to 10-48, "When it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect," the display mode of the pending display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is display pattern β or This is a case where the display pattern γ is displayed (displayed as a blue or red circle), and as shown in Figures 10-49 to 10-68, while the execution of the winning flash effect has been decided, the pending display notice "When it is decided not to perform the performance" refers to the case where the display mode of the pending display, which is the subject of the flash performance at the time of winning, is displayed in the display pattern α (displayed in a white circle).

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-29 (A), while the variable display is being executed, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of decorative patterns, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the variable display. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. In addition, while the variable display is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (Figures 10-27 (A) to 10-27 (Blinking in the manner shown in (D)) is controlled.

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the preview performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R are displaying the image of the preview performance. A sound corresponding to the performance pattern (for example, a sound corresponding to a preview performance such as a sound of a character speaking the characters displayed on the image display device 5) is output at a volume V2. Further, as the pending memory, there are three first special figure pending memories (three pending displays are displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D).

If a prize is won in the first starting slot (starting prize) during such a variable display, and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the figure As shown in FIG. 10-28 and FIG. 10-29 (B), a flash effect is started at the time of first-term winning.

First, as shown in Figures 10-28 and 10-29 (B), the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume of V1 (V1>V2) for the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-28, 10-30(C), and 10-30(D), the display of the effect image 135SG005E starts from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG009X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the cycle T1. In the blinking control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the first period winning flash effect is started, as shown in Figure 10-30 (D), Figure 10-31 (E), and Figure 10-31 (F), as the above-mentioned specific display start effect B, An animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is blink-controlled, is displayed, and an animation in which the character A moves to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. After the character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed (if it is the main characteristic part 135SG, the fourth pending display is displayed). An animation that attacks (acts on) the position where the display is displayed is displayed.

After the character A acts on the first pending storage display area 135SG005D, the pending display that is the target of the winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) that is currently being executed appears gradually from the bottom to the top at the position where the character A acted. An appearance animation is displayed (see Figures 10-20 (D-1) to 10-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display whose appearance animation has been completed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display as a specific display rotating display effect like other pending displays.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, if a starting winning occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the display is performed before the display of the pending display based on the starting winning is completed. At this time, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. In addition, the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in this feature section 135SG is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half (Figures 10-32 (G) and 10-32). 32(H)).

When the first-term winning flash performance ends, the second-term winning flash performance starts from the ending timing. As for the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, as shown in Figures 10-28, 10-32 (G), and 10-32 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T2 (period T2>period T1). Further, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

In addition, at the end timing of the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period and the start timing of the flash performance at the time of winning in the second period, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emitting mode (blinking at brightness C1 and cycle T1) of the attacker lamp 9c and movable lamp 9d) corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period ends. The light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y corresponds to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. The display switches to the corresponding mode (blinking at brightness C2 and period T0 shown in FIGS. 10-27(A) to 10-27(D)). In other words, the lighting mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period. Returns to the lighting mode before the start of the flash effect when winning a prize in the previous period. Incidentally, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y remain off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter half.

In addition, as described above, the blinking of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) with the brightness C2 and the period T0, excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y, is as follows. The same mode as the mode before the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (the light emission mode shown in FIG. 10-29(A)) is a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image). A gradation using blue-based colors, a gradation using red-based colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.) is executed.

The cycle T2, which is the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-mentioned cycle T1, but shorter than the above-mentioned cycle T0 (lamp blinking cycle length: T0>T2 >T1). Incidentally, during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the latter half, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-32 (H), 10-33 (I), and 10-33 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with a transparent black image 135SG005B overlappingly displayed over the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A. The silhouette image 135SG005S in the main feature section 135SG is displayed in blue so that it can be easily recognized by the player when displayed overlappingly with the black image 135SG005B.

Note that in this feature section 135SG, an example is given in which the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed in blue so that it is easily visible to the player when displayed overlappingly with the black image 135SG005B, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed in a color other than blue, such as green or red. In particular, when the silhouette image 135SG005S can be displayed in multiple colors such as the aforementioned blue, green, and red, the jackpot expectation level may be changed depending on which color the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed. good. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the color of the silhouette image 135SG005S, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

As shown in FIGS. 10-32 (H) and 10-33 (J), in this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device A small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of 5. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed overlappingly, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. Regardless of whether or not the variable display is being executed, it is possible to confirm whether or not the variable display is being executed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M.

As shown in FIGS. 10-33 (J), 10-34 (K), and 10-34 (L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the image display device 5 displays the decorative symbols and The small symbols 135SG005M are derived and displayed in a combination that indicates an error (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in this feature section 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is the symbol confirmation period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-33 (J), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R are When winning a prize, a sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at volume V2.

When the symbol confirmation period ends, a new variable display starts. At this time, in the image display device 5, the pending display displayed at the beginning in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D is moved to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display, and is also displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted to the right one by one. Furthermore, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is also started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 10-34 (K) to 10-41 (Z), in the variable display that precedes the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, the speaker 8L, which is the flash performance during the later winning time, The output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from 8R at the volume V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in Figures 10-38 (S) to 10-40 (X), in the variable display where pseudo-continuous effects are executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (Figure 10-40 (W) ) Refer to this feature section 135SG. In the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, a decorative pattern indicating a normal number is temporarily stopped, and a special pattern indicating a temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the decorative pattern display area 5C inside. ), as a flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter half, output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, the brightness of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning a prize, blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5. The silhouette image 135SG005S of is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-41 (Y) and 10-41 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is off due to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is completed, the decorative patterns and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in the present feature section 135SG is also executed during the symbol determination period of the variable display when the normal reach is off. That is, as shown in FIGS. 10-41 (Y) and 10-41 (Z), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at a volume of V2.

As shown in Figures 10-40 (W) and 10-40 (X), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are not activated. Light is emitted in a light emitting manner corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if it is the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern in the variable display, light is emitted in blue at brightness C2), and the background image is displayed based on the execution of the variable display again. Returns to the light emission mode according to the . Furthermore, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop, so the player can It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-42(a) and 10-42(b), when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started, the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started, and the The pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIG. 10-43(c) to FIG. 10-47(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is continued. Further, during variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIGS. 10-43(d) and 10-44(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figure 10-45 (g) to Figure 10-46 (j) reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 10-46 (j)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as a late winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is outputted at the volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 10-45(g) and FIG. 10-46(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are not connected to the decorative pattern. The light is emitted in a lighting mode corresponding to the temporary stop (for example, if it is the first temporary stop, the light is emitted in blue at brightness C2, and if it is the second temporary stop, it is green at brightness C2), and the display is re-variable. Based on this, the light emission mode returns to the one corresponding to the background image. Although not shown in the feature section 135SG, if the pseudo continuous effect is executed three times during variable display, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacker The lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emitting manner (for example, red at brightness C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and emit light in accordance with the background image based on execution of variable display again. Return to aspect.

As shown in FIGS. 10-48(m) and 10-48(n), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F once whites out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white), then the ready-to-reach effect is started. In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F becomes white-out, thereby suggesting that a super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the whiteout timing, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect at the time of winning in the later period, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

Also, at the whiteout timing, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y end blinking at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0. . The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d remain off during the whiteout period.

That is, during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d remain off. Then, from the timing when the whiteout ends, in accordance with the above-mentioned reach effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d respond to the reach effect. The light emission mode (lighting at brightness C1) starts.

Further, during the whiteout period, output of variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and there is no sound, and from the timing when the whiteout ends, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, At the same time that the attacker lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d begin to emit light (lighting at brightness C1) in accordance with the reach effect, the speakers 8L and 8R begin to output a sound corresponding to the reach effect, which is a sound that corresponds to the reach effect. . In addition, as the sound corresponding to the reach effect in this feature section 135SG, BGM, etc., which is different from the sound corresponding to the variable display, must be output so that the player can recognize that the reach effect (super reach effect) is in progress. Bye.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-28, if a starting prize occurs during execution of the variable display, and it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect based on the starting winning, the corresponding starting door lamp lighting effect will be displayed. From the timing of the starting winning, the starting port lamp 135SG009S changes color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, blue if the display pattern of the pending display is display pattern β, and the display pattern of the pending display is display pattern γ). start emitting light (in red).

The light emission of the starting port lamp 135SG009S is a performance that is executed completely independently of the above-mentioned winning flash performance, and regardless of the blinking mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F or the game effect lamp 9, the above-mentioned starting Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice performance is continued from the time of winning to the end of the target variable display of the starting opening lamp light emission performance (target variable display of the flash performance at the time of winning).

Next, a case will be described in which the execution of the pending display preview performance is not determined together with the flash performance at the time of winning in the starting winning while the variable display is being executed.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-49 (A), while the variable display is being executed, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of decorative patterns, and the speakers 8L and 8R display the variable display. The corresponding sound is output at volume V2. In addition, while the variable display is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (Figures 10-27 (A) to 10-27 (Blinking in the manner shown in (D)) is controlled.

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the preview performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R are displaying the image of the preview performance. A sound corresponding to the performance pattern (sound corresponding to the preview performance) is output at volume V2. Further, as the pending memory, there are three first special figure pending memories (three pending displays are displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D).

If a prize is won in the first starting slot (starting prize) during such a variable display, and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the figure As shown in FIG. 10-28 and FIG. 10-49 (B), a flash effect is started at the time of first-term winning.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-49 (B), the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume of V1 (V1>V2) for the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-28, 10-50(C), and 10-50(D), the display of the effect image 135SG005E starts from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the cycle T1. In the blinking control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the first period winning flash effect is started, as shown in Figure 10-49 (B), Figure 10-50 (C), and Figure 10-50 (D), as the above-mentioned specific display start effect A, An appearance animation is displayed in which the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect (first period winning flash effect) that is being executed gradually appears from the bottom to the top (Figure 10-19 (B-1) to Figure 10-19 ( (See B-4). Note that the pending display whose appearance animation has been completed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display as a specific display rotating display effect like other pending displays.

In particular, when the specific display start effect A is executed together with the winning flash effect, the appearance animation of the pending display ends when the effect image 135SG005E is still being displayed on the image display device 5. On the other hand, when the above-described specific display start effect B is executed together with the winning flash effect, the appearance animation of the pending display ends after the display of the effect image 135SG005E ends on the image display device 5 (see FIGS. 10-29 to 10-29). 10-32)). That is, when specific display start effect A is executed, the display of the pending display (appearance animation) is completed at an earlier timing than when specific display start effect B is executed, and the transition to rotation animation is made.

In other words, in this feature section 135SG, if a starting winning occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the display is performed before the display of the pending display based on the starting winning is completed. At this time, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. Incidentally, the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect A in the feature section 135SG is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period.

When the first-term winning flash performance ends, the second-term winning flash performance starts from the ending timing. As for the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter half, as shown in Figures 10-28, 10-52 (G), and 10-52 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T2 (period T2>period T1). Further, the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals.

In addition, at the end timing of the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period and the start timing of the flash performance at the time of winning in the second period, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, The light emitting mode (blinking at brightness C1 and cycle T1) of the attacker lamp 9c and movable lamp 9d) corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period ends. The light emission mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y corresponds to the background image displayed on the image display device 5. The display switches to the corresponding mode (blinking at brightness C2 and period T0 shown in FIGS. 10-27(A) to 10-27(D)). In other words, the lighting mode of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y is based on the end of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period. Returns to the lighting mode before the start of the flash performance when winning a prize in the previous period. Incidentally, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y remain off after the start timing of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter half.

In addition, as described above, the blinking of the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) with the brightness C2 and the period T0, excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y, is as follows. The same mode as the mode before the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning (the light emission mode shown in FIG. 10-29(A)) is a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image). A gradation using blue-based colors, a gradation using red-based colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.) is executed.

The cycle T2, which is the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-mentioned cycle T1, but shorter than the above-mentioned cycle T0 (lamp blinking cycle length: T0>T2 >T1). Incidentally, during the execution of the flash performance at the time of winning a prize in the latter half, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-52 (H), 10-53 (I), and 10-53 (J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with a transparent black image 135SG005B overlappingly displayed over the entire first display area 135SG005F except for the active display area 135SG005A.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-52 (H) and FIG. 10-53 (J), in this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the image display device 5, while the image display device A small pattern 135SG005M is displayed on the left end of 5. Therefore, in the winning flash effect of this feature section 135SG, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the small pattern 135SG005M are not displayed overlappingly, and the player can display the silhouette image 135SG005S during the winning flash effect. Regardless of whether or not the variable display is being executed, it is possible to confirm whether or not the variable display is being executed by visually recognizing the small pattern 135SG005M.

As shown in FIG. 10-53 (J), FIG. 10-54 (K), and FIG. 10-54 (L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the image display device 5 displays decorative symbols and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. It should be noted that the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in this feature section 135SG is executed regardless of whether it is the symbol confirmation period or not. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-53 (J), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R are When winning a prize, a sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at volume V2.

When the symbol confirmation period ends, a new variable display starts. At this time, in the image display device 5, the pending display displayed at the beginning in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D is moved to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display, and is also displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted to the right one by one. Furthermore, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is also started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 10-54 (K) to 10-61 (Z), in the variable display that precedes the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash performance, the speaker 8L as the flash performance during the later winning time, The output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from 8R at the volume V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed.

In particular, as shown in Figures 10-58 (S) to 10-60 (X), in the variable display where pseudo-continuous effects are executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (Figure 10-60 (W) ) Refer to this characteristic section 135SG. In the left and right decorative pattern display areas 5L and 5R, a decorative pattern indicating a normal number is temporarily stopped, and a special pattern indicating a temporary stop is temporarily stopped in the decorative pattern display area 5C inside. Also, as a flash effect at the time of winning in the latter half, output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, the brightness of the lamp 135SG009F for the winning flash at the time of winning at the brightness C2 and blinking at the cycle T2, and the image display device 5 Display of silhouette image 135SG005S is executed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-61 (Y) and 10-51 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is off due to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the decorative patterns and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in the present feature section 135SG is also executed during the symbol determination period of the variable display when the normal reach is off. That is, as shown in FIGS. 10-61 (Y) and 10-61 (Z), even during the symbol determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at a volume of V2.

As shown in FIGS. 10-60 (W) and 10-60 (X), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are Light is emitted in a light emitting manner corresponding to the temporary stop of the decorative pattern (for example, if it is the first temporary stop of the decorative pattern in the variable display, light is emitted in blue at brightness C2), and the background image is displayed based on the execution of the variable display again. Returns to the light emission mode according to . Furthermore, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop, so the player can It is possible to recognize that the variable display has not ended yet.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-62(a) and 10-62(b), when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started, the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started, and the The pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIG. 10-63(c) to FIG. 10-67(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is continued. Further, during variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIG. 10-63(d) and FIG. 10-64(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figure 10-65 (g) to Figure 10-66 (j) reference).

As shown in FIG. 10-65(g) and FIG. 10-66(j), during the temporary stop period of the decorative pattern, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are not connected to the decorative pattern. The light is emitted in a lighting mode corresponding to the temporary stop (for example, if it is the first temporary stop, it is blue at brightness C2, and if it is the second temporary stop, it is green at brightness C2), and the display is re-variable. Based on this, the light emission mode returns to the one corresponding to the background image. Although not shown in the feature section 135SG, when performing three pseudo-continuous effects during variable display, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacker The lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d emit light in a light emitting manner (for example, red at brightness C2) corresponding to the third temporary stop of the decorative pattern, and emit light in accordance with the background image based on execution of variable display again. Return to aspect.

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 10-66 (j)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as a late winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is outputted at the volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-68(m) and 10-68(n), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F once whites out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white), then the ready-to-reach effect is started. In addition, in this characteristic part 135SG, the first display area 135SG005F becomes white-out, thereby suggesting that a super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the whiteout timing, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect during the latter period, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends.

Also, at the whiteout timing, the game effect lamps 9 (main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d) excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y end blinking at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0. . These main lamps 9a, frame lamps 9b, attacker lamps 9c, and movable lamps 9d remain off during the whiteout period, but from the timing when the whiteout ends, they emit light in a manner according to the reach effect. .

Further, during the whiteout period, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. In other words, during the whiteout period, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and there is no sound, and from the timing when the whiteout ends, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, At the same time that the attacker lamp 9c and the movable lamp 9d begin to emit light (lighting at brightness C1) in accordance with the reach effect, the speakers 8L and 8R begin to output a sound corresponding to the reach effect, which is a sound that corresponds to the reach effect. . In addition, as the sound corresponding to the reach effect in this feature section 135SG, BGM, etc., which is different from the sound corresponding to the variable display, must be output so that the player can recognize that the reach effect (super reach effect) is in progress. Bye.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 135SG, FIGS. As shown in D), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light before the display of the pending display is completed, making it easier for the player to recognize the pending display that is the subject of the winning flash effect. . Furthermore, it has a winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a first light emitting means in the present invention, and a main lamp 9a, a frame lamp 9b, an attacker lamp 9c, and a movable body lamp 9d as second light emitting means in the present invention. As shown in 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F flashes at a brightness of C1 and a cycle of T1 during the execution period of the first-term winning flash effect, and at a brightness of C2 and a cycle of T1 during the second-term winning flash effect. While blinking at T2, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d blink at brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first half, and at the time of winning in the second half. During the execution period of the flash effect, it flashes at the brightness C2 and the cycle T0, so during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, not only the winning flash lamp 135SG009F but also the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacker lamp 9c By blinking the movable lamp 9d at a brightness of C1 and a period of T1, it is possible to make the winning flash effect more prominent, so that the game can more easily recognize the pending display that is the subject of the winning flash effect. It has become.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, when a new starting winning occurs during the variable display, the holding memory based on the starting winning is subject to the execution or non-execution of the winning flash effect and the execution of the holding display preview effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, if a new starting winning occurs when the variable display is not being executed and there is no pending memory, the starting winning winning will be determined. It may be possible to determine whether or not to execute a flash effect at the time of winning and whether to execute a pending display notice effect based on the pending memory based on the above. Specifically, when a new starting prize occurs during variable display, display pattern α to display pattern γ (pending display preview effect) are displayed in active display area 135SG005A as specific display start effect A or specific display start effect B. After executing the appearance animation of the active display of either display pattern (display pattern in case of non-execution or display pattern in case of execution of suspended display preview effect), rotate display of the active display as a specific display rotation display effect. At the same time, based on the start of the variable display based on the starting winning, a winning flash effect (early winning flash effect and later winning flash effect) may be executed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-15, 10-30 (D) to 10-32 (H), and 10-49 (B) to 10-50 (D), the specific display start effect is suspended. The part where the appearance animation that gradually appears from the bottom to the top is displayed, and the parts shown in Figures 10-15, 10-30 (D) to 10-32 (H), and 10-49 (B) to 10- As shown in FIG. 50(D), it is displayed as a hold display and a rotating animation, and as shown in FIGS. 10-19 and 10-20, from the timing when the appearance animation of the hold display is completed, Since the rotating animation of the hold display is started, the player's attention to the hold display can be increased.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-29 (A) to 10-32 (H), when performing specific display start effect B, the winning flash effect is started from a timing before the start of display of the pending display. Since the flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d emit light at the time of winning, the flash effect at the time of winning can be made more conspicuous. In addition, in this feature section 135SG, even when executing the specific display start effect A shown in FIGS. 10-49(A) to 10-50(D), the winning flash effect is started from a timing before the display start of the pending display. Since the flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d emit light when winning a prize, it is possible to make the flash performance more prominent when winning a prize.

In addition, the execution period of specific display start effect A is 0.2 seconds, and the execution period of specific display start effect B is 1.2 seconds. As shown in -50 (D), since the winning flash effect starts before the end timing of the specific display start effect A, the display pattern of the pending display is any of display patterns α to display patterns γ. Also, since the winning flash performance can be started before the specific display start performance ends, the player can surely recognize the pending display that is the object of the winning flash performance.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-28, Figure 10-29 (A), Figure 10-29 (B), Figure 10-49 (A), and Figure 10-49 (B), when winning a prize based on the starting prize. When it is decided to execute the flash effect, the player can start the flash effect by turning off the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d. Recognizable.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are turned off once. Although the present invention is not limited to this, when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame The lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d are set to emit light at a lower brightness than the previous brightness (for example, if the light was emitted at the brightness C2 up to then, the brightness C3 is lower than the brightness C2). It may be changed. In other words, the "low brightness state" in the present invention refers to a state in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d are emitting light at low brightness, as well as a state in which they are turned off. It also includes a state in which the light is on (a state in which no light is emitted).

Also, as shown in Figures 10-29 (A) to 10-48 (n) and Figures 10-49 (A) to 10-68 (n), during variable display, a preview effect is being executed. It is possible to execute the flash effect at the time of winning and when it is not in progress, and the speakers 8L and 8R execute the flash effect at the time of winning while the variable display is being executed, as shown in Figure 10-29 (B). When doing so, the sound corresponding to the variable display is output at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output at the volume V1 (V1>V2), and when the winning flash effect is executed while the preview effect is being executed, The sound corresponding to the preview performance is outputted at the volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning is outputted at the volume V1 (V1>V2). Therefore, even if the speakers 8L and 8R are outputting the sound corresponding to the variable display and the sound corresponding to the preview effect, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning can be outputted so that the player can easily hear the flash effect at the time of winning. By outputting a corresponding sound, a player can easily recognize the execution of a flash performance when winning a prize.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is set to the volume V1 from the speakers 8L and 8R, so that the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display body. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at volume V2, and the sound corresponding to the flash effect when winning a prize is output as the sound corresponding to the preview effect. As a form of outputting with priority over the sound corresponding to the variable display and the winning flash effect, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at volume V2, while the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display are output at a lower volume than the volume V2. (For example, it may be output at volume V3).

Further, in this feature section 135SG, a mode has been exemplified in which the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output with priority over the sound corresponding to the preview effect or the sound corresponding to the variable display body, but the present invention is not limited to this. When winning a prize, it is not necessary to output the sound corresponding to the flash effect with priority over the sound corresponding to the preview effect or the sound corresponding to the variable display. Specifically, if the preview effect is started while the winning flash effect is being executed (while outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect or the sound corresponding to the strange display from speakers 8L and 8R), the winning effect from speakers 8L and 8R will start. It is also possible to temporarily stop the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect and output only the sound corresponding to the variable display and the sound corresponding to the preview effect, or only one of the sound corresponding to the preview effect and the sound corresponding to the variable display. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in game interest due to the player having difficulty in hearing the sound corresponding to the preview effect or the sound corresponding to the variable display due to the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-28, 10-29 (A) to 10-32 (H), and 10-49 (A) to 10-50 (D), when winning a prize according to the starting prize. When it is decided to execute the flash effect, the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, and then the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking and the pending display appearance animation is completed. Therefore, by outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, it is possible to quickly make the player aware that a starting winning has occurred and that the execution of the winning flash effect has been decided, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. can.

In addition, this feature section 135SG exemplifies a form in which after the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started, and the appearance animation of the pending display is completed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is started from the speakers 8L and 8R, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the appearance animation of the pending display are started. You can do it like this.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-28, during the execution period of the first period winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at the brightness C1, and during the second period winning period flash effect, the winning moment flash By flashing the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at a brightness of C2 (C1>C2), at least the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be made to flash at a brightness of C1 to make the player aware of the start of the winning flash effect. It is possible to prevent the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from blinking at the brightness C1 even during the execution period of the later winning flash performance, which obstructs other performances and reduces game interest.

In this feature section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at a brightness C1 and cycle T2 as the first-term winning flash performance, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the second-term winning flash performance. As an example of a "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis", a mode is shown in which the light is blinked at a luminance C2 lower than the luminance C1 and at a cycle T2 that is longer than the cycle T1. In other words, the "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the late winning flash performance of the feature section 135SG is a low-speed blinking mode where the degree of emphasis is low due to the slow blinking speed (long blinking cycle). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and includes both a low brightness mode in which the degree of emphasis is low due to low brightness, and the present invention is not limited to this. The "specific mode with a low degree of emphasis" of the lamp 135SG009F may be only one of the low-speed blinking mode and the low-intensity mode.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-28, the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize is the period in which the variable display that precedes the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning, and the period during which the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize is executed. Since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2 before and after the start of the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect, It becomes easier for the player to recognize that the display is variable, and the player's enjoyment of the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the first-term winning flash effect, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and during the execution period of the second-term winning flash effect, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S, the effect image 135SG005E can be displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the winning flash effect in the previous period, so that the player can recognize the start of the winning flash effect. During the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the second half, by displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5, the image display device 5 continues to display the effect image 135SG005E, which obstructs other displays and reduces the enjoyment of the game. can be suppressed from decreasing.

In particular, in the main characteristic portion 135SG, the effect image 135SG005E is brighter than the silhouette image 135SG005S, as shown in FIGS. Since it is displayed in color and the display area on the image display device 5 is wide, the display of the effect image 135SG005E allows the player to effectively recognize the start of the winning flash effect.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-28, during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. Now, a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output from the speakers 8l and 8R at a volume of V2 (V1>V2). In this way, by outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect at the volume V1 as the winning flash effect, it becomes possible for the player to easily recognize that the winning flash effect has started. At the same time, during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the later period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output at the volume V2, thereby preventing a decrease in gaming interest due to other effects being obstructed by the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning. It can be suppressed.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, while the flash effect at the time of winning a prize is being executed in the latter half, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is outputted at the volume V2, so that other effects are obstructed by the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning. Although the present invention is exemplified as a form of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest, the present invention is not limited to this, and by not outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect while the later winning flash effect is being executed, other effects may be suppressed when winning a prize. It may also be possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to interference by the sound corresponding to the flash effect.

In addition, as shown in Figures 10-29(A) to 10-48(n), during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize in the latter half, the display before the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize starts. During the symbol confirmation period of the variable display, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to blink, that is, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the symbol confirmation command has been received (the confirmation command reception flag has been set) or not. Regardless of whether the display time timer has timed out or not, by continuing to flash the winning flash lamp 135SG009F during the symbol confirmation period, the player will be controlled into a jackpot gaming state. The feeling of anticipation can be maintained accurately until the start of the variable display which is the object of the flash effect when winning a prize, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, as a flash performance at the time of winning in the first period, the lamp for the winning flash 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable body lamp 9d are set in a mode (brightness) according to the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period. C1 and period T1), and after the end of the first period winning flash performance, as the second period winning flash performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is set in a mode (brightness C2 and cycle T2) according to the second period winning flash performance. ), while the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are emitted in a manner corresponding to the background image (brightness C2 and period T0), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the performance control CPU 120 clears the process timer for the first period winning flash performance at the timing when the first period winning flash performance ends, so that the process timer for the first period winning flash performance is cleared during the execution period of the second period winning flash performance. It may be possible to prevent the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d from emitting light in a manner corresponding to the previous winning flash performance.

Further, as shown in FIG. 10-3, a small pattern 135SG005M is arranged at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, and as shown in FIG. 10-33 (J), the pattern is confirmed. During the period, the small symbol 135SG005M is displayed with variable display stopped, so even if the winning flash lamp 135SG009F continues to emit light during the symbol confirmation period, the small symbol 135SG005M is derived in combination to indicate a win. Since it is displayed, the player can be made aware that the symbol confirmation period is in progress.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-33 (J), while the winning flash effect is being executed, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the right side of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, while the small Since the symbol 135SG005M is displayed at the left end of the first display area 135SG005F of the image display device 5, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed overlappingly with the small symbol 135SG005M, making it difficult for the player to recognize the end of the variable display. You can prevent it from getting stuck.

In addition, in this feature section 135SG, it is possible to execute a pseudo-continuous effect that includes temporary stopping and variable display of decorative symbols again on the image display device 5 during variable display, and variable display during execution of the winning flash effect. In the case where a pseudo continuous effect is executed, a special symbol stops in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C when the decorative symbol temporarily stops (see Figure 10-40, etc.) Silhouette as a flash effect upon winning Since the images 135SG005S can be displayed overlappingly, the special symbol is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S, giving the player a sense of surprise and increasing his enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-28 and 10-42(a) to 10-47(l), the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 even in the variable display that is subject to the flash effect when winning a prize. Therefore, it becomes easier for the player to recognize that the variable display is the object of the flash effect when winning a prize, and it is possible to improve the interest of the variable display that is the object of the flash effect when winning.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is blinked at a brightness of C2 and a period of T2 before the start of the reach effect. While the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off at the start timing, as shown in FIG. 10-22, due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the performance control CPU 120 determines that it is the start timing of the ready-to-win performance of the variable display of the performance target. If this is not possible, at the end timing of the variable display (timing at which the symbol confirmation command is received), which is a timing later than the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect, a second-term winning flash effect including blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is performed again. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort when the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect does not end at the timing of the start of the ready-to-win effect.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-22, if the performance control CPU 120 cannot determine that it is the start timing of the ready-to-reach performance of the variable display of the performance target due to the generation of static electricity, etc., the performance control CPU 120 Since the late winning flash performance is ended based on receiving the command, it is possible to further reduce the sense of discomfort when ending the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash performance.

In addition, as shown in Figure 10-21, if a winning start occurs at the first start opening while the Super Reach reach effect is being executed, the execution of the winning flash effect is not determined, so the Super Reach reach effect is not decided. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to a decrease in attention to the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-17, in this feature section 135SG, the pending display and active display can be displayed in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ with different jackpot expectations, and as shown in FIG. As shown, when it is decided to display the hold display or active display in the display pattern β or display pattern γ, the starting port lamp 135SG009S flashes the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a winning flash effect or the game effect. Regardless of the lighting mode of the lamp 9, etc., the light is emitted in a color according to display pattern β and display pattern γ from the occurrence of a starting winning to the end of the variable display based on the starting winning, so the player can see the pending display and active display. Since the display mode can also be recognized by the light emission mode (emission color) of the starting port lamp 135SG009S, the game enjoyment can be improved.

Although the characteristic parts of the present invention have been explained above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these characteristic parts, and any changes or additions that do not depart from the gist of the present invention are included in the present invention. It will be done.

For example, although the flash effect at the time of late winning in the feature section 135SG is executed regardless of whether or not it is during the symbol confirmation period (while the variable display is stopped), the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in Figures 10-69 to 10-89 as a modified example 135SG-1, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect as the winning flash effect in the later period, the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the silhouette. The display of the image 135SG005S, etc. may not be executed during the symbol confirmation period.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 10-69 and FIG. 10-70(A), while variable display is being executed, the image display device 5 executes the variable display of decorative patterns, and the speakers 8L and 8R , the variable display compatible sound is output at volume V2. In addition, while the variable display is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is lit, and the game effect lamp 9 blinks at a cycle T0 according to the variable display (Figures 10-27 (A) to 10-27 (Blinking in the manner shown in (D)) is controlled.

Furthermore, while the variable display is being executed, an image corresponding to the performance pattern of the preview performance is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the preview performance, and the speakers 8L and 8R are displaying the image of the preview performance. A sound corresponding to the performance pattern (sound corresponding to the preview performance) is output at volume V2. Further, as the pending memory, there are three first special figure pending memories (three pending displays are displayed in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D).

If a prize is won in the first starting slot (starting prize) during such a variable display, and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, the figure As shown in FIG. 10-69 and FIG. 10-70 (B), a flash effect is started at the time of first-term winning.

First, as shown in FIGS. 10-69 and 10-70 (B), the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume of V1 (V1>V2) for the first-term winning flash effect. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-69, 10-71 (C), and 10-71 (D), the display of the effect image 135SG005E starts from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. At the same time, blinking control of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y is started at the cycle T1. In the blinking control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the first period winning flash effect is started, as shown in Figure 10-71 (D), Figure 10-72 (E), and Figure 10-72 (F), as the above-mentioned specific display start effect B, An animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is blink-controlled, is displayed, and an animation in which the character A moves to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. After the character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed (the fourth position in the case of this modification 135SG-1). An animation of attacking (acting on) the position where the pending display is displayed is displayed.

After character A acts on the first pending storage display area 135SG005D, the pending display that is the target of the winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) that is currently being executed appears gradually from the bottom to the top at the position where the action occurred. An appearance animation is displayed (see Figures 10-20 (D-1) to 10-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display whose appearance animation has been completed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display as a specific display rotating display effect like other pending displays.

In other words, in this modification example 135SG-1, if a starting winning occurs during the variable display and it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, then the display of the pending display based on the starting winning is completed. Also, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5 are started. In addition, the appearance animation of the pending display (specific display) accompanied by the execution of the specific display start effect B in this modified example 135SG-1 is completed during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half (Fig. 10-73 (G) and Fig. 10-73(H)).

When the first-term winning flash performance ends, the second-term winning flash performance starts from the ending timing. As for the flash performance at the time of winning in the latter half, as shown in Figure 10-69, Figure 10-73 (G) and Figure 10-73 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning from speakers 8L and 8R is set to volume V2. At the same time, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and period T2 (period T2>period T1), and the brightness C2 and the period T2 of the gaming effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y. Blinking (blinking in the manner shown in FIGS. 10-27(A) to 10-27(D)), at regular intervals of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5. starts to be displayed.

Incidentally, the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 is performed in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image) A gradation using blue-based colors, a gradation using red-based colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.) are performed.

The cycle T2, which is the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-mentioned cycle T1, but shorter than the above-mentioned cycle T0 (lamp blinking cycle length: T0>T2). >T1). Incidentally, during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-74(I) and 10-74(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the transparent black image 135SG005B overlappingly displayed over the entire area of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIG. 10-74 (J), FIG. 10-75 (K), and FIG. 10-75 (L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the image display device 5 displays decorative symbols and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. As shown in Figures 10-69, 10-76 (M), and 10-76 (N), during the symbol confirmation period from the end timing of the variable display to the start timing of the next variable display, the late The output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the winning flash effect and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are stopped, and the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable The body lamp 9d continues to blink only in a manner corresponding to the background image displayed on the image display device 5.

When the symbol confirmation period ends, a new variable display starts. At this time, in the image display device 5, the pending display displayed at the beginning in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D is moved to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display, and is also displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted to the right one by one. Furthermore, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is also started.

Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 10-75 (K) to 10-82 (Z), in the variable display that precedes the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, the speaker 8L as the flash performance during the later winning time, While the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from 8R at the volume V2, the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed, During the symbol confirmation period, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect during the latter period, the brightness of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at C2 and the blinking period T2, and the image display. The silhouette image 135SG005S is never displayed on the device 5.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-79 (S) to 10-81 (X), in the variable display where the pseudo continuous effect is executed, during the period when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped (FIG. 10-81 ( See W). In this modified example 135SG-1, decorative symbols indicating normal numbers are temporarily stopped in the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and a special symbol indicating the temporary stop is placed in the inner decorative symbol display area 5C. (temporarily stops), as the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter half, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning from speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, the brightness of the lamp 135SG009F for the winning flash at the time of winning, blinking at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the image display. Display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the device 5 is executed.

In addition, in Figure 10-81 (W), during the execution of the winning flash effect, when the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the variable display before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect, the winning flash effect is The brightness C2 and cycle T2 of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F are not executed, but depending on the timing of the temporary stop, the brightness C2 and cycle T2 of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may change depending on the timing of the temporary stop. Flashing is now performed. That is, in this modification 135SG-1, for the variable display that precedes the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance, the winning flash performance is continuously executed during the temporary stop period of the decorative symbol.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-82 (Y) and 10-82 (Z), when the variable display in which the normal reach is off due to the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect ends, the decorative patterns and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late prize winning in the present feature section 135SG is also executed during the symbol determination period of the variable display when the normal reach is off. That is, as shown in FIGS. 10-82 (Y) and 10-82 (Z), even during the symbol determination period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly. At the same time, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at a volume of V2.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10-81 (W) and 10-81 (X), during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped, the variable display of the small pattern 135SG005M is executed regardless of the temporary stop. Therefore, the player can recognize that the variable display has not ended yet by visually recognizing the variable display of the small symbol 135SG005M.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-83(a) and 10-83(b), when the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started, the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect is started, and the The pending display corresponding to the variable display moves to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display.

As shown in FIG. 10-84(c) to FIG. 10-88(l), in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is continued. Further, during variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIG. 10-84(d) and FIG. 10-85(e)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figure 10-86 (g) to Figure 10-87 (j) reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 10-87 (j)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as a late winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is outputted at the volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-89(m) and 10-89(n), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F once whites out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white), then the ready-to-reach effect is started. In addition, in this modification 135SG-1, the first display area 135SG005F becomes white-out, which suggests that the super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

In addition, at the whiteout timing, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash effect during the latter period, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2, and the image display device 5 The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S ends. On the other hand, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2, and the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 except the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the period T0 are continued.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 10-69, if a starting prize occurs during the execution of the variable display, and it is decided to execute a pending display notice effect based on the starting winning, the corresponding starting entrance lamp lighting effect will be displayed. From the timing of the starting winning, the starting port lamp 135SG009S changes color according to the display pattern of the pending display notice effect (for example, blue if the display pattern of the pending display is display pattern β, and the display pattern of the pending display is display pattern γ). (in red), the light starts emitting light.

The light emission of the starting port lamp 135SG009S is a performance that is executed completely independently of the above-mentioned winning flash performance, and regardless of the blinking mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F or the game effect lamp 9, the above-mentioned starting Light emission in a color corresponding to the display pattern of the pending display notice performance is continued from the time of winning to the end of the target variable display of the starting opening lamp light emission performance (target variable display of the flash performance at the time of winning).

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-1, when the winning flash effect is started based on the starting winning, the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is stopped as a late winning flash effect during the symbol confirmation period. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from misperceiving that the variable display is in progress due to the winning flash lamp 135SG009F being turned on continuously during the pattern confirmation period as a flash effect at the time of winning in the later period. ing. Furthermore, during the period of temporary suspension of the decorative symbols in the variable display that are the target of the flash performance at the time of winning, and during the temporary suspension period of the decorative symbols in the variable display that are the target of the flash performance at the time of winning, the flash lamp 135SG009F for the winning flash is activated. By continuing to blink at the brightness C2 and the period T2, it is possible to prevent the game from mistakenly assuming that the variable display has ended even though the decorative symbols are in the temporary stop period.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-1, during the pattern confirmation period during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning a prize, the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the lighting of the flash effect at the time of winning the winning flash 135SG009F, and the silhouette. Although a mode in which the display of image 135SG005S is stopped is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. If it is possible to prevent the erroneous recognition that this is the case, output the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect, turn on the winning flash lamp 135SG009F for the later winning flash effect, or display the silhouette image 135SG005S. Alternatively, only two may be executed.

Furthermore, in this modification 135SG-1, during the pattern confirmation period during the execution period of the late winning flash performance, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash performance as the late winning flash performance, the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, and the silhouette. Although the embodiment in which the display of the image 135SG005S is not executed is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, but the winning flash as a late winning flash effect during the symbol confirmation period during the execution period of the late winning flash effect. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may receive a symbol confirmation command during execution of the flash performance when winning a prize in the second half. Based on this, by clearing the process timer for the flash effect at the time of winning in the later period, during the pattern confirmation period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning is output as the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter period, the light emission of the lamp 135SG009F for flash at the time of winning, The silhouette image 135SG005S may not be displayed.

In this case, the performance control CP 120, based on receiving the first variable display start command, selects the flash performance process table for the second period of winning and resets and starts the process timer for the flash performance for the second period of winning. By doing so, it is only necessary to start the flash effect at the time of winning a prize (output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning, the light emission of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S) in response to the start of a new variable display.

In addition, as a mode in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F does not emit light as the late winning flash performance during the symbol confirmation period during the execution period of the latter winning flash performance, for example, the performance control CPU 120 may Based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command during the execution of the performance, the lamp control board 14 is sent to the lamp control board 14 for the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, instead of the lighting control data according to the process data of the process timer for the flash performance at the time of late winning. Lighting control data that maintains the lights off (for example, "0:0:0" indicating lights off as the RGB value of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F) may be output continuously until the variable display start command is received. .

In addition, if you do not execute the flash effect at the time of winning during the symbol confirmation period, the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning will be output from the start timing of the new variable display, the lighting of the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning time will be turned on, and the silhouette image will be displayed. The display of 135SG005S may be re-executed from the beginning of each cycle (see Figure 10-69), or from the start timing of the new variable display, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect may be output, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be turned on, The display of the silhouette image 135SG005S may be restarted from the middle of each cycle.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-1, if the variable display ends during the execution of the flash performance at the time of late winning, during the symbol determination period of the variable display, the flash performance from the speakers 8L and 8R as the flash performance at the time of late winning While stopping the output of the sound corresponding to the flash effect when winning a prize and the display of the silhouette image 235SG005S, it also stops the output of the flash effect compatible sound and the display of the silhouette image 235SG005S. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d will continue to flash in this manner, but the present invention is not limited to this. Blinking may also be stopped. In particular, as a form of stopping the blinking of the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d during the symbol confirmation period, the in-lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d are stopped during the pattern confirmation period. The body lamp 9d may be turned off, or the in-lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d may be set to a certain color (for example, the background displayed on the image display device 5) during the pattern determination period. It may also be maintained in a state where it is continuously lit (color corresponding to the image).

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, in the explanation of FIG. 10-8, it is stated that a plurality of reach effects may be provided as the super reach effect. If you set up a reach performance of multiple Super Reach, make the jackpot expectation different between the reach performances of multiple Super Reach (for example, as a reach performance of Super Reach, the reach performance of Super Reach α and the reach performance of Super Reach α have a higher jackpot expectation than the reach performance of Super Reach α (a reach effect with a high super reach β may be provided).

In particular, when it is possible to perform reach effects of multiple super reaches with different jackpot expectations, as shown in FIGS. 10-90(A) and 10-90(B) as modification example 135SG-2. , the movable body 32 can be moved between a retracted position (for example, a position above the image display device 5) and a presentation position (for example, a central front position when viewed from the front of the image display device 5), and a flash presentation when winning a prize. If the target variable display is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach α (a variable display that executes a reach effect of super reach α), the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 during the variable display is By repeatedly moving the movable body 32 between the retracted position and the retracted position (for example, the intermediate position between the retracted position and the production position described above) during the period in which the first display area 135SG005F except for the first display area 135SG005F is once white-out, the movable body 32 Execute a moving body motion suggestion performance that suggests moving to the performance position, and when winning a prize, the variable display that is the target of the flash performance will be a variable display with a variation pattern of Super Reach β (Execute the reach performance of Super Reach β) (variable display), the movable body 32 is further evacuated after the above-described movable body motion suggestion effect is executed during a period in which the first display area 135SG005F excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 is once whited out. A movable body motion performance may be performed in which the moving body is moved from a position to a performance position.

By doing this, during the whiteout period, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the movement of the movable body 32, and when the movable body 32 moves to the performance position (when the movable body movement performance is executed) Since the player can be informed that the movable body motion performance will execute the reach performance of super reach β, which has a higher jackpot expectation than the reach performance of super reach α, the game enjoyment can be improved.

For example, if the target of the flash effect when winning a prize is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach α, the target of the flash effect when winning a prize is When the variable display starts, output of sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R starts. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is continued. Further, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIG. 10-91(B), FIG. 10-92(C), and FIG. 10-92(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figures 10-93 (E) to 10-94 (H) reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 10-94 (H)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as a later winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is outputted at the volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

As shown in FIGS. 10-95 (I) to 10-96 (L), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F temporarily becomes white-out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white). In addition, in this modification 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F becomes white-out, which suggests that the super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIG. 10-90(A) and FIG. 10-96(K) to FIG. 10-97(N), during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F The lighting at the brightness C2 and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are completed. Then, as a movable body motion suggestion performance, a movable body motion suggestion performance is performed based on the movable body 32 repeatedly reciprocating between the retreat position and the suggested position a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modified example 135SG-2) by a drive mechanism (not shown). When the pandemic ends, the whiteout period also ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion performance, the output of the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. Note that the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect may be a sound effect that allows the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retreat position and the suggested position (for example, a sound effect such as "rattle"). ) etc. can be output.

As shown in FIG. 10-90(A), FIG. 10-98(O), and FIG. 10-98(P), from the timing when the movable body motion suggestion presentation and whiteout are completed, the image display device 5 At the same time as the reach effect of reach α starts, the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, and winning flash lamp 135SG009F start lighting with brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the reach effect. Then, the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting a reach effect compatible sound (such as BGM different from the variable display compatible sound) corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach α.

In addition, if the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach β, as shown in Figure 10-99 (A) and Figure 10-99 (B), the target of the flash effect at the time of winning is When the variable display starts, output of sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R starts. In addition, in the variable display, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is continued. Further, during the variable display, a preview effect may be executed (see FIG. 10-99(B), FIG. 10-100(C), and FIG. 10-100(D)). Furthermore, since the variable display is a variable display with a super reach variation pattern, at least two pseudo continuous effects are executed during the variable display (Figures 10-101 (E) to 10-102 (H) reference).

In particular, even in the variable display that is subject to the winning flash performance, during the period when the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped (see Figure 10-102 (H)), the flash performance from speakers 8L and 8R is performed as a later winning flash performance. At the time of winning, the sound corresponding to the flash effect is outputted at the volume V2, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and the period T2, and the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5.

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-103 (I) to 10-104 (L), when the start timing of the ready-to-reach effect is reached as the variable display progresses, the first display area excluding the active display area 135SG005A of the image display device 5 135SG005F temporarily whites out (the effect image displayed in the first display area 135SG005F is temporarily hidden and the first display area 135SG005F becomes displayed in white). In addition, in this modification 135SG-2, the first display area 135SG005F becomes white-out, which suggests that the super reach effect will be executed thereafter.

As shown in FIG. 10-90(B) and FIG. 10-104(K) to FIG. 10-105(N), during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F The lighting at the brightness C2 and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are completed. Then, as a movable body motion suggestion production, the movable body motion is suggested based on the movable body 32 repeatedly reciprocating between the retreat position and the suggested position a predetermined number of times (four reciprocations in this modification 135SG-2) by a drive mechanism (not shown). The performance ends. In addition, during the execution period of the movable body motion suggestion performance, the output of the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion performance is performed from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 instead of the sound corresponding to the variable display. Note that the sound corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion effect may be a sound effect that allows the player to recognize that the movable body 32 is repeatedly moving between the retreat position and the suggested position (for example, a sound effect such as "rattle"). ) etc. can be output.

After the movable body motion suggestion production ends, the whiteout period ends and the movable body motion production begins, as shown in Figure 10-90(B) and Figures 10-106(O) to 10-106(P). As a result, the movable body 32 is moved from the retracted position to the presentation position by a drive mechanism (not shown). In addition, during the period of the movable body movement performance, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are set to brightness C1 in a manner corresponding to the movable body movement performance. Light. Furthermore, although not shown in FIG. 10-90(B), the speakers 8L and 8R output sound corresponding to the moving body motion effect at the volume V1 (see FIG. 10-106(P)). Note that, as the sound corresponding to the movable body movement effect in the feature section 135SG, a sound effect (for example, a sound effect such as "Zudoon") that allows the player to recognize that the movable body has moved may be output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 10-107(Q), the movable body motion performance ends based on the movable body 32 returning from the performance position to the retracted position. As shown in FIG. 10-90(B), FIG. 10-107(Q), and FIG. 10-107(R), from the timing when the movable body motion effect and whiteout are completed, the image display device 5 displays super reach. At the same time as the reach effect of β starts, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F start to light up at a brightness C1 corresponding to the reach effect. , the speakers 8L and 8R start outputting sound corresponding to the reach effect corresponding to the reach effect of the super reach β. In addition, as for the reach effect sound corresponding to the reach effect of Super Reach β, the sound corresponding to the variable display and the reach effect of Super Reach α are available so that the player can recognize that the reach effect of Super Reach β is in progress. It is sufficient to output BGM or the like that is different from the reach performance compatible sound corresponding to the performance.

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-2, in the variable display of super reach, which is the target of the winning flash effect, before the start of the super reach reach effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is set to brightness C2 and cycle T2. From the start timing of the super reach effect, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F lights up at a brightness of C2. In other words, when the reach effect starts, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F lights up at a brightness of C2 and Instead of blinking at the period T2, the light is emitted in a manner corresponding to the ready-to-reach effect (lighting up at a brightness of C2), so the game enjoyment of the ready-to-reach effect can be improved.

In particular, as shown in Figures 10-96(K) to 10-98(O) and Figures 10-104(K) to 10-106(O), the first display area 135SG005F is displayed in white (whiteout). At the same time, during the whiteout period, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off, and the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned on at brightness C2 from the start timing of the Super Reach reach effect. Since it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to a change in the light emission mode of the lamp 135SG009F, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Furthermore, if the variable display that is the target of the flash effect when winning a prize is a variable display with a variation pattern of super reach β, the movable body movement suggestion effect will be executed during the whiteout period, and the movable body movement suggestion effect will be executed. The winning flash lamp 135SG009F is turned off in response to the execution of , and then, in response to the execution of the movable body movement effect (movement of the movable body 32 to the effect position), the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is set to the movable body movement effect. It lights up at brightness C1 in a corresponding manner. In other words, since the lighting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning a prize is turned on at a brightness of C1 after turning off due to the execution of the movable object motion suggestion effect, it is important to note that these changes in the lighting mode may give a sense of discomfort to the player. Since it can be prevented, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Further, in the feature section 135SG, a form in which a dialogue preview performance can be executed as a preview performance suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot during variable display has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. , as modification example 135SG-3, the preview performance includes, in addition to the speech preview performance, the image displayed on the image display device 5 changes step by step, and a jackpot is expected according to the final number of change stages. It may be possible to perform a step-up effect with different degrees, a group preview effect in which a plurality of characters cross the image display device 5, or the like.

In particular, when it is possible to perform a step-up effect as the modified example 135SG-3, when winning a prize, as shown in FIGS. When executing a step-up effect during a variable display in which a flash effect is not being executed, the timing for displaying an image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 or the timing for changing the image in stages is determined for the winning flash. The effect of the step-up performance may be enhanced by temporarily lighting the lamp 135SG009F at a brightness of C2. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 10-108(B) and FIG. 10-114(A) to FIG. 10-118(F), the step-up effect is executed during the variable display where the winning flash effect is being executed. At this time, since the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has already been flashed at the brightness C2 and the period T2, the timing for displaying the image (step-up image) on the image display device 5 and the image are changed step by step. The winning flash lamp 135SG009F is not turned on at the right timing. In other words, while the winning flash effect is being executed, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is already emitting light in a manner corresponding to the winning flash effect, is turned on in response to the step-up effect. In some embodiments, the light may not be emitted.

As described above, in the present modification example 135SG-3, when the step-up effect is started in the variable display during execution of the winning flash effect, that is, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F has already been set to the brightness C2 as the winning flash effect. In addition, if a step-up effect that lights up the winning flash lamp 135SG009F while it is blinking at cycle T2 is started, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect is executed with priority. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the lighting of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from starting at an inappropriate timing such as the end timing of the winning flash performance in a manner corresponding to the step-up performance.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, the movable body 32 is not operated before the start of the super reach reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, and before the start of the super reach reach effect. In this case, it is possible to perform a movable body movement performance in which the movable body 32 is moved from a retracted position (for example, a position above the image display device 5) to a performance position (for example, a center front position when viewed from the front of the image display device 5). By doing so, it may be possible to notify the player that the super reach effect will be executed.

In this way, if it is possible to execute the movable body motion performance before the reach performance of super reach, as shown in FIGS. 10-119(A) and 10-119(B) as modification 135SG-4, When the winning flash effect is executed for the variable display of the super reach, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect. The expected level of jackpot may be made to differ depending on which light emission mode is changed depending on the reach performance of the super reach.

For example, as shown in Figure 10-119(C), if the variable display result of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is a jackpot, at the start of the variable display, the movable body From the start timing of the movement performance, it was decided to change the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect, and the reach effect started at a rate of 30%. From the timing, it is decided to change the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach effect. If the variable display result of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is a loss, at the start of the variable display, from the movable body movement effect start timing, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F It has been decided to change the lighting mode of the flash lamp 135SG009F for winning a prize from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect, and at a rate of 70%, from the start timing of the reach effect, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. It is decided to change the lighting mode from a mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to a light emission mode corresponding to the reach effect.

In addition, if it is decided to change the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F from the mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect or the light emitting mode corresponding to the reach effect, the said decision. The winning flash lamp 135SG009F may be controlled in accordance with the contents of the process data corresponding to the process timer in accordance with the progress of the variable display.

As described above, in this modified example 135SG-4, depending on the timing of ending the light emitting mode according to the winning flash effect of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, it is possible to determine whether it is during the execution period of the movable body movement effect or when the super In some cases, it may be during the execution period of the reach effect of Reach, so it is important to check whether the winning flash effect ends during the execution period of the moving body movement effect or during the execution period of the super reach effect. It can be easily recognized by people. In particular, as shown in FIG. 10-119(C), the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the start timing of the movable body motion performance to the corresponding movable body motion performance. Since the expectation level of a jackpot is different depending on whether the flash mode is set according to the start timing of the reach effect or when the light emission mode is set according to the reach effect from the start timing of the reach effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the end timing of the flash effect when winning a prize. This allows players to increase their interest in gaming.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-4, the timing at which the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect ends (changes to the light emission mode according to the movable body movement effect or the light emission mode according to the reach effect). Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko game can be played according to the timing when the winning flash lamp 135SG009F ends blinking as the winning flash effect. It may also be possible to suggest the setting values set in the machine 1. By doing so, it is possible to draw the attention of the player to the end timing of the winning flash performance, and to improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-4, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light either at the start of the movable body movement performance during the variable display that is the target of the winning flash performance or at the start of the super reach reach performance. The mode can be changed, and the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash performance to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body motion performance from the start timing of the movable body motion performance. Since the expectation level of a jackpot differs depending on the start timing of the reach effect and when the light emission mode is changed according to the reach effect, the player pays attention to the effect that is executed at the timing when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the present modification example 135SG-4, in the variable display of super reach, a form in which a movable body movement performance can be executed before the start of the reach performance of super reach is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, before the execution of the movable body motion performance, a movable body motion suggestion performance that suggests the execution of the movable body motion performance may be made possible. In this way, when it is possible to execute the movable body motion suggestion effect before executing the movable body motion effect, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F can be changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to suggest the movable body motion. A case is provided in which the light emission mode is changed from the start timing of the performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body motion suggestion display, and the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode according to the winning flash display to the movable body motion suggestion display. The jackpot expectation level may be different depending on the case where the light emission mode is set according to the movable body motion suggestion performance from the start timing and the case where the light emission mode is set according to the ready-to-reach performance from the start timing of the ready-to-win performance. By doing so, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the performance that is being executed when the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F changes, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this modified example 135SG-4, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the light emission mode corresponding to the winning flash effect to the light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement suggestion effect from the start timing of the movable body movement suggestion effect. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. The light emission (blinking) of the time flash lamp 135SG009F is set to end at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion effect and at the start timing of the reach effect. The expectation level of the jackpot may be set to differ depending on whether the game ends at . In this way, even when providing multiple timings for stopping the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect during the variable display of 1, the effect control CPU 120 may cause the winning flash to occur due to the generation of static electricity, etc. If it is not possible to stop the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, at the end timing of the variable display (timing of receiving the symbol confirmation command), which is a timing later than these timings, the late prize winning including the flashing of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will be resumed. All you have to do is end the flash effect.

By doing this, even if the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as a winning flash performance cannot be stopped at the start timing of the movable body motion suggestion performance or the start timing of the reach performance, the winning flash performance will continue. At the end timing of the target variable display, it is possible to end the flash effect at the time of winning in the latter half, including the flashing of the flash lamp 135SG009F at the time of winning.

In addition, in the characteristic section 135SG, as display patterns for specific displays (pending display and active display), a display pattern α having the lowest jackpot expectation level is a white round shape, and a blue color display pattern having a higher jackpot expectation level than the display pattern α. The present invention is not limited to this, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. As the display pattern, display patterns other than these display patterns α to γ may be provided.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-120 as modification example 135SG-5, as the display pattern of the specific display, in addition to the above-mentioned display patterns α to display patterns γ, any one of the pending display or the active display Display pattern δ, which is a round shape with blinking white, that may change to display pattern β or display pattern γ at the timing of (low expectation of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ), as a pending display or active display The possibility of changing to display pattern β or display pattern γ at any timing during display is higher than display pattern δ (expectation level of change to display pattern β or display pattern γ: high) A certain character-shaped circle A display pattern ε may be provided.

In other words, among display patterns α to γ of the pending display and active display in Modified Example 135SG-5, display pattern γ (red display) has the highest jackpot expectation, display pattern α (white display) ) is set to have the lowest jackpot expectation. On the other hand, regarding the jackpot expectation of display pattern δ and display pattern ε when display pattern β and display pattern γ do not change, the jackpot expectation may be set lower than display pattern α, or lower than display pattern α. The jackpot expectation level may also be set to be higher than that of the display pattern β, and the jackpot expectation level may be set lower than that of the display pattern β.

Furthermore, in this modification example 135SG-5, the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε, which can change to the display pattern β and the display pattern γ, are provided as the pending display and the active display pattern, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which the display pattern α changes to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ at a lower rate than the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε. Furthermore, there may be a case where the pending display or active display of the display pattern β changes to the display pattern γ.

Furthermore, the feature section 135SG determines whether or not to execute a pending display preview effect (a display in which a pending display or an active display is displayed in display pattern β or display pattern β) and the display pattern when determining whether to execute a flash effect when winning a prize. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. You may decide.

For example, as shown in FIG. 10-120 as the above-mentioned modification 135SG-5, if it is decided to execute the winning flash effect based on the starting winning time, the display mode of the pending display or active display based on the starting winning is , the display pattern ε is determined at the highest rate, the display pattern δ is determined at a lower rate than the display pattern ε, the display pattern γ is determined at a lower rate than the display pattern δ, and the display pattern β is determined at a lower rate than the display pattern γ. It is sufficient to determine the display pattern α at a low ratio and determine the display pattern α at the lowest ratio (determination ratio of the display pattern when deciding to execute the flash effect at the time of winning: display pattern ε > display pattern δ > display pattern γ > display pattern β > Display pattern α).

As mentioned above, display patterns α to display patterns ε are provided as display modes for specific displays (hold display and active display), and when a specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the specific display is displayed. Since there is a higher probability that the winning flash effect is executed at the same time than when pattern β or display pattern γ is displayed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to a specific display by executing the winning flash effect, and also to draw the player's attention to the specific display. Since it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the display changes from the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, the display pattern α is a display pattern in which a specific display is displayed in a white circle, the display pattern β is a display pattern in which a specific display is displayed in a blue circle, and the display pattern γ is a display pattern in which a specific display is displayed in a red circle. Since the display pattern δ is a display pattern in which the specific display is displayed in a blinking white circle, the player can easily identify the difference in the specific display by the display color or blinking mode.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, when a specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, the display pattern of the specific display is changed to display pattern β or display depending on whether or not the winning flash effect is executed. Although the rate at which the pattern changes to pattern γ is not described, the present invention is not limited to this, and when a specific display is displayed in display pattern δ or display pattern ε, a flash effect is displayed at the time of winning. The rate at which the display pattern of the specific display changes to display pattern β or display pattern γ may vary depending on whether or not the specific display is being executed. By doing this, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ or the display pattern ε, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the winning flash effect is being executed, thereby improving the enjoyment of the game. can.

In Modification 135SG-5, the display pattern δ that flashes in white is exemplified as a special aspect of the specific display in the present invention, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific display in the present invention is not limited to this. The special mode (display pattern δ) may be a color other than white, blue, or red (for example, purple or black), which are the normal mode or special mode of the specific display in the present invention.

In addition, in the present modification example 135SG-5, an example is given in which the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ to suggest that the specific display changes to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ. The invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to perform an action effect that can change the specific display to display pattern β or display pattern γ by acting on the specific display displayed in display pattern δ. .

In particular, when an action presentation is to be performed, multiple presentation modes (with different ratios of changing the specific display displayed in the display pattern δ to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ) may be used as the presentation mode of the action presentation. For example, a first effect that can change a specific display to display pattern β or display pattern γ by acting on a specific display displayed in display pattern δ, and an effect that has a different effect from the first effect and effect. A second effect effect is provided that can change the specific display to display pattern β or display pattern γ at a higher rate than the first effect effect by acting on the specific display displayed in display pattern δ. When the second effect is executed, the winning flash effect may be executed at a higher rate than when the first effect is executed.

By doing this, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the effect is executed as the first effect or the second effect, and by executing the flash effect at the time of winning, the effect is changed to the second effect. It is possible to increase expectations for what will be carried out in the action presentation.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-5, when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern ε, the flash effect is executed at a higher rate when winning a prize than when the specific display is displayed in the display pattern δ. is high, so if a specific display is displayed in display pattern ε and a flash effect is executed at the time of winning, the player will be discouraged by the change in the display pattern of the specific display to display pattern β or display pattern γ. Since the player can attract attention, the player's interest in the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the modification 135SG-5, a display pattern ε for displaying a character is provided as a display pattern for the specific display (suspended display and active display), and an action effect is executed for the character as the specific display. Although a form in which the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to display pattern β or display pattern γ is exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be possible that the display pattern of the specific display can be changed to the display pattern β or the display pattern γ by acting on another character as a result of the effect.

Specifically, as shown in Figures 10-121 (A) and 10-121 (B), when the number of 1st special symbols reserved is 3 and is being displayed in a variable manner, the prize is entered in the 1st starting slot. (starting prize) occurs, and when the display pattern of the pending display based on the starting winning is determined to be the display pattern ε as a pending display preview effect based on the starting winning, the fourth block of the first pending storage display area 135SG005D An ally character is displayed as a pending display, and the active display displayed in the active display area 135SG005A changes to an enemy character (see FIG. 10-121 (B-1)).

In this state, the variable display ends and a new variable display starts, that is, as shown in FIGS. 10-122(A) and 10-122(B), When an ally character (suspended display of display pattern ε) moves from the display position of the fourth suspended display to the display position of the third suspended display, the ally character moves from the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A. Act (shoot) against.

Then, each time the variable display ends and a new variable display starts, that is, as shown in FIGS. 10-122(C) and 10-122(D), the variable display is When the ally character displayed in the first hold memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the third hold display to the display position of the second hold display, the ally character displayed in the first hold memory display area 135SG005D moves from the display position of the third hold display to the display position of the second hold display. When moving from the display position of the display to the display position of the first suspended display, the friendly character acts (shoots) at the enemy character displayed in the active display area 135SG005A.

Furthermore, when the variable display ends and the variable display that is the target of the pending display preview effect starts, the ally character displayed at the display position of the first pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed as active. The player moves to area 135SG005A, and the ally character acts directly on the enemy character within the active display area 135SG005A (a battle effect between the ally character and the enemy character is executed).

Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-123 (G) and 10-123 (H), if the ally character wins as a result of the battle performance, the ally character is displayed in the display pattern β or in the active display area 135SG005A. The display changes to active display of display pattern γ. On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 10-123 (I) and 10-123 (J), if the ally character is defeated as a result of the battle performance, the enemy character or ally character is displayed in the display pattern in the active display area 135SG005A. Changes to active display of α.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-6, when displaying a pending display in display pattern ε, an ally character as a pending display in the display pattern ε defeats an enemy character in active display area 135SG005A, and the active display is performed. Although we have exemplified a form in which the ally character that has become ``can be changed to an active display in display pattern β or display pattern γ, the present invention is not limited to this, and when displaying a pending display in display pattern ε, By defeating the enemy character while the pending display is being displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D, the friendly character serving as the pending display may be changed to the pending display of the display pattern β or the display pattern γ.

In addition, when displaying a pending display in display pattern ε, when a winning flash effect is executed at the same time, the display pattern ε is displayed at a higher rate than when a winning flash effect is not executed. may be changeable to a pending display (or an active display) of display pattern β or display pattern γ. By doing this, not only can the player's attention be drawn to the battle result between the friendly character and the enemy character as a pending display of the display pattern ε, but also the winning flash effect can be executed while the battle is being executed. Since it is possible to draw the attention of the player to whether there is a player or not, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the modified example 135SG-5 and the modified example 135SG-6, the display pattern δ and the display pattern ε are added to the display patterns α to γ described in the feature section 135SG as display patterns for the hold display and the active display. , but when displaying a hold display or an active display using these display patterns δ or display pattern ε, it is the same as when displaying a hold display or an active display using display patterns α to display patterns γ. Then, specific display start effect A or specific display start effect B may be executed.

More specifically, when displaying a hold display or an active display in the display pattern δ, execute specific display start effect A (see Figure 10-19) as in the case of the display pattern α, and display the hold display or active display. When displaying with display pattern ε, as in the case of display pattern β and display pattern γ, specific display start effect B (see Figure 10-20) or the period during which the pending display or active display is completed is the specific display start. It is sufficient to execute a specific display start effect that is longer than the effect A and shorter than the specific display start effect B. By doing this, when displaying a pending display or an active display in the display pattern δ or display pattern ε, similarly to the feature section 135SG, from a timing before the display of the pending display or active display is completed. , the player will be able to recognize the winning flash effect sound and the light emission of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F.

Further, in the feature section 135SG, as an example of a winning flash effect, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 together with the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modification 135SG-7, the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 may be changed in stages according to the progress of the winning flash effect.

For example, as shown in FIGS. 10-124 (A) and 10-124 (B), when the winning ( When a winning (starting prize) occurs and it is decided to execute the pending display notice effect and the winning flash effect based on the starting winning, as shown in Figure 10-124(B), The performance begins.

First, as shown in FIG. 10-124(B), the winning flash effect starts from the speakers 8L and 8R at a volume of V1 (V1>V2), and , the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the game effect lamp 9 are temporarily turned off. Then, as shown in FIGS. 10-125(C) and 10-125(D), the effect image 135SG005E starts to be displayed from around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5, and the winning flash Blinking control of the lamp 135SG009F, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, the movable lamp 9d, the stick lamp 135SG00X, and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the cycle T1 is started. In the blinking control, each lamp is lit at a brightness C1 that is higher than the brightness C2.

In addition, when the first period winning flash effect is started, as shown in Figure 10-125 (D), Figure 10-126 (E), and Figure 10-126 (F), as the above-mentioned specific display start effect B, An animation in which the character A appears from the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, which is blink-controlled, is displayed, and an animation in which the character A moves to the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D is displayed. After the character A moves to the first pending memory display area 135SG005D, the character A moves to the position where the pending display in the first pending memory display area 135SG005D is displayed (if it is the main characteristic part 135SG, the fourth pending display is displayed). An animation that attacks (acts on) is displayed.

After character A acts on the first pending storage display area 135SG005D, the pending display that is the target of the winning flash performance (previous winning flash performance) that is currently being executed appears gradually from the bottom to the top at the position where the action occurred. An appearance animation is displayed (see Figures 10-20 (D-1) to 10-20 (D-5)). Note that the pending display whose appearance animation has been completed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D transitions to a rotating display as a specific display rotating display effect like other pending displays.

When the first-term winning flash performance ends, the second-term winning flash performance starts from the ending timing. As for the flash performance at the time of winning in the second half, as shown in FIGS. 10-127 (G) and 10-127 (H), the output of the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning starts from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2. , the winning flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C2 and cycle T2 (cycle T2>cycle T1), and the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and button lamp 135SG009Y blink at the brightness C2 and cycle T2 (Figure 10- 27(A) to blinking in the manner shown in FIGS. 10-27(D)), the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S of the character A around the winning flash lamp 135SG009F on the image display device 5 is started at regular intervals. Ru.

Incidentally, the flashing of the game effect lamps 9 excluding the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y at the brightness C2 and the cycle T2 is performed in a color corresponding to the background image of the image display device 5 (for example, if the background image is a daytime image) A gradation using blue-based colors, a gradation using red-based colors if the background image is an evening image, etc.) are performed.

The cycle T2, which is the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, is longer than the above-mentioned cycle T1, but shorter than the above-mentioned cycle T0 (lamp blinking cycle length: T0>T2). >T1). Incidentally, during the execution of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the stick lamp 135SG009X and the button lamp 135SG009Y are not lit.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 10-128(I) and 10-128(J), when the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5, the The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the transparent black image 135SG005B overlappingly displayed over the entire area of one display area 135SG005F.

As shown in FIG. 10-128 (J), FIG. 10-129 (K), and FIG. 10-129 (L), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the image display device 5 displays decorative symbols and small The symbol 135SG005M is derived and displayed in a combination indicating a failure (displayed with the variable display stopped), and the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Incidentally, the flash effect at the time of late winning in this modification 135SG-7 is executed regardless of whether or not it is the symbol confirmation period. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-128 (J), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly on the image display device 5, and the speakers 8L and 8R are When winning a prize, a sound corresponding to the flash effect is output at volume V2.

When the symbol confirmation period ends, a new variable display starts. At this time, in the image display device 5, the pending display displayed at the beginning in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D is moved to the active display area 135SG005A as an active display, and is also displayed in the first pending storage display area 135SG005D. The display positions of the remaining pending displays are shifted to the right one by one. Furthermore, the output of the variable display compatible sound from the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V2 is also started.

In addition, in this variable display, as shown in FIG. 10-129(K) and FIG. 10-129(L), the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed together with the black image 135SG005B on the image display device 5 is larger than the previous variable display. may be displayed. By displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S larger than the previous variable display in this way, the silhouette image is displayed in an overlapping manner in the active display area 135SG005A.

As shown in FIGS. 10-130 (M) and 10-130 (N), when the variable display ends based on the reception of the symbol confirmation command, the decorative symbol and the small symbol 135SG005M are displayed in a combination that indicates a miss on the image display device 5. At the same time, the output of the sound corresponding to the variable display from the speakers 8L and 8R is stopped. At this time, the active display is erased from the active display area 135SG005A. Even during the symbol confirmation period, the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half is executed. That is, as shown in FIG. 10-130(N), even during the symbol confirmation period, the silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed on the image display device 5 with the black image 135SG005B being displayed overlappingly. In particular, the silhouette image 135SG005S is also displayed overlappingly with the active display area 135SG005A. Further, the speakers 8L and 8R output a sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at a volume of V2.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, it is possible to display either of two silhouette images 135SG005S of different sizes as the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect at the time of winning, and a large-sized silhouette can be displayed. When the image 135SG005S is displayed, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A are displayed in an overlapping manner. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the large-sized silhouette image 135SG005S The active display area 135SG005A may be displayed in an overlapping manner only when the variable display that is the object of the winning flash effect is executed. By doing this, the player can easily recognize the variable display corresponding to the flash effect when winning, and the active display area 135SG005A, that is, the active display corresponding to the flash effect when winning, is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S. Therefore, it is possible to provide surprise to the players and improve their interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, silhouette images 135SG005S of different sizes can be displayed on the image display device 5 as a flash effect when winning a prize, and depending on the size of the displayed silhouette image 135SG005S, the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active Since the overlapping aspect with the display area 135SG005A is different, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modified example 135SG-7, depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, there are cases in which the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap and cases in which they do not overlap. , the present invention is not limited to this, but in the case where the overlapping area between the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A differs depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, when the active display area 135SG005A A case where only a part of the area 135SG005A overlaps with the silhouette image 135SG005S, a case where the entire active display area 135SG005A overlaps with the silhouette image 135SG005S, etc. may be provided.

Further, in the present modification example 135SG-7, depending on the size of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5, there is a case where the silhouette image 135SG005S and the active display area 135SG005A overlap. However, before the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect starts, it overlaps with the pending display that is the target of the winning flash effect that is displayed in the first hold storage display area 135SG005D. The silhouette image 135SG005S is displayed so as to overlap with the active display displayed in the active display area 135SG005A, which is the target of the winning flash effect, while the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is being executed. A silhouette image 135SG005S may be displayed. By doing this, the player can easily recognize the pending display and active display that correspond to the flash effect when winning a prize, and the silhouette image 135SG005S hides not only the pending display but also the active display. It is possible to improve the game's interest by adding even more surprise to the game.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-7, only one of the pending display and the active display is hidden by displaying the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a case may be provided in which both the pending display and the active display are hidden by the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning.

Further, in the present modification 135SG-7, a form is exemplified in which the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning can be displayed overlappingly in the active display area 135SG005A and the first reserved storage display area 135SG005D, but the present invention The present invention is not limited to this, and in the case where the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the variable display during the execution of the winning flash effect as exemplified in the feature section 135SG, when the decorative pattern temporarily stops, The silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect when winning a prize may be displayed overlappingly on the special symbol (see FIG. 10-40, etc.) that stops in the decorative symbol display area 5C. By doing this, the special symbol for notifying the temporary stop is hidden by the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning, so it is possible to give surprise to the player and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in the present modification example 135SG-7, as a re-variable display effect of the present invention, a form in which the special symbol stops in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a re-variable display effect, an image different from the special symbol may be displayed on the image display device 5, and the silhouette image 135SG005S as a flash effect at the time of winning may be displayed overlapping with the image.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, if a starting winning at the first starting opening occurs during execution of the super reach reach effect, execution of the winning flash effect based on the starting winning is not determined (determined to be non-executable). Although the present invention is not limited to this example, as a modified example 135SG-8, if a starting winning occurs in the first starting opening while the variable display is being executed, the variable display The remaining period may be specified, and if the specified period is less than the execution period of the winning flash effect in the previous period, execution of the winning flash effect may not be determined (determined not to be executed). By doing this, the winning flash effect (previous period winning flash effect) is executed when the remaining period of the variable display is shorter than the execution period of the previous winning flash effect. It is possible to prevent the specific display (pending display or active display) of the target of the performance from becoming difficult to understand.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-8, a mode is exemplified in which it is determined whether or not to execute the flash effect at the time of winning a prize based on the remaining period of the variable display and the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and whether or not to execute the flash effect when winning a prize depends on the remaining period of the variable display and the period other than the execution period of the flash effect when winning the previous period (for example, a period of 5 seconds, 10 seconds, etc.) ) may be used as a criterion.

Furthermore, in this modification example 135SG-8, if a starting winning occurs at the first starting opening while the variable display is being executed, the remaining period of the variable display is specified, and the specified period is the flash effect at the time of winning in the previous period. Although the embodiment is exemplified in which the execution of the winning flash effect is not determined if the specified period is less than or equal to the execution period of the winning flash effect, the present invention is not limited to this. In this case, it may be possible to perform a winning flash effect from the start timing of the next variable display, provided that the variable display result of the variable display is a loss. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the super reach reach effect and the winning flash effect from becoming less interesting due to the overlap of the super reach effect and the winning flash effect.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, the light emission mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect is blinking at a brightness C1 and a cycle T1 (the light emitting mode in the previous winning flash effect), and a blinking mode with a brightness C2 and a cycle T2. There are two lighting modes: blinking (lighting mode in the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half). On the other hand, the light emission mode of the starting port lamp 135SG009S in the starting port lamp lighting effect includes blue light emission at a brightness C2 according to the display pattern β, and red light emission at a brightness C2 according to the display pattern γ. It is provided. In other words, the feature section 135SG exemplifies a form in which the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect is the same as the number of light emission modes of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission effect. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-9, the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash effect and the light emission of the starting lamp 135SG009S in the starting lamp light emission effect. The number of aspects may be different.

In particular, as shown in modification example 135SG-5, display patterns δ and display patterns ε are provided as display patterns for the hold display and active display, and these display patterns δ are used as the light emission mode of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission effect. By providing a light emission mode according to the display pattern ε, the number of light emission modes of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S in the starting gate lamp light emission performance can be set to be greater than the number of light emission modes of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F in the winning flash display. good. By doing this, the variation of the light emission of the starting port lamp 135SG009S increases, so that the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

Furthermore, in the feature section 135SG, an example is given in which the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is made to emit light as a winning flash effect, and the starting gate lamp 135SG009S is made to emit light in a starting door lamp light emission effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, as a modified example 135SG-10, the light emitting area where the winning flash lamp 135SG009F emits light as a winning flash effect may be set larger than the light emitting area where the starting entrance lamp 135SG009S emits light as a starting exit lamp light emitting performance. good.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 10-28, in the case where it is decided to execute both the winning flash effect and the pending display notice effect based on the starting winning, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is activated when the starting winning occurs. On the other hand, the starting gate lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the reach effect on the variable display that is the target of the starting prize winning flash effect, while the starting gate lamp 135SG009S emits light until the start timing of the reach effect on the variable display that is the target of the starting winning flash effect. Since the light is emitted until the end of the variable display (which is the target of the flash effect), by applying the modified example 135SG-10, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F will emit light in accordance with the winning flash effect for an excessively long time. It is possible to maintain the player's expectation that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state by the light emitting mode of the starting port lamp 135SG009S while preventing a decrease in gaming interest due to the above.

In addition, in the characteristic part 135SG, a mode in which the starting lamp 135SG009S emits light without blinking is illustrated as the starting lamp lamp lighting effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starting lamp lamp 135SG009S is not limited to this. The mouth lamp 135SG009S may be blinked. Furthermore, when the starting port lamp 135SG009S is blinked as the starting port lamp light emission effect in this way, the blinking cycle of the starting port lamp 135SG009S is set to the blinking period (period T2) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F as the winning flash effect. It may be different. In this way, by making the blinking cycle of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F different from the blinking cycle of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S, players pay attention to both the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F and the blinking of the starting gate lamp 135SG009S. It is possible to improve the player's interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the feature section 135SG has a configuration in which the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, etc. are temporarily turned off when performing a flash effect upon winning. Although shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 135SG-11, when performing a flash effect at the time of winning, the brightness of the backlight etc. built in the image display device 5 is The winning flash effect may be started after the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is lowered by lowering the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5. In this manner, when the winning flash effect is executed, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced to make it easier for the player to recognize the start of the winning flash effect.

In addition, in this modification 135SG-11, the visibility of the image displayed on the image display device 5 is reduced by reducing the brightness of the backlight etc. built into the image display device 5, that is, the image display Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the image display device 5 is changed to a low visibility state in which visibility is lower than the previous state by changing the brightness of the device 5, the present invention is not limited to this. Forms of reducing the visibility of the image displayed on the display device 5 include, in addition to reducing the 5 luminance (brightness) of the image display device, temporarily stopping the display of the image on the image display device 5; The movable body 32 is moved in front of the image display device 5, the image display device 5 itself is moved repeatedly in the vertical direction, etc., and the brightness of the game effect lamp 9 is increased to relatively display the image on the image display device 5. It may also be something that reduces the visibility of the image being displayed.

In other words, a "low visibility state" in the present invention is a state in which the visibility on the image display device 5 is lower than the immediately previous state, and is defined as a state in which the visibility on the image display device 5 is lowered than the previous state. Contains images that reduce visibility.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-28, when it is decided to execute the winning flash effect in response to a starting winning, the output of the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is started from the speakers 8L and 8R. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is started after the winning flash is started.As a modified example 135SG-12, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts flashing in response to the starting winning. If it is decided to execute, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display is completed. You can. By doing this, it is possible for the player to quickly recognize that a starting winning has occurred and that the execution of the winning flash effect has been decided by the blinking (light emission) of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F. You can improve your interest in gaming.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-12, after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, the winning flash effect sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the appearance animation of the pending display and active display is completed. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the winning flash lamp 135SG009F starts blinking, a sound corresponding to the winning flash effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a hold display is displayed. An appearance animation of the active display may be started.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, as shown in FIG. 10-28, during the execution period of the flash performance at the time of winning in the first period, the speakers 8L and 8R output the sound corresponding to the flash performance at the time of winning at the volume V1, The lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the period T1, the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period, the volume of the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning by the speakers 8L and 8R is executed. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the output at V2, the blinking of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C2 and period T2, and the display of the silhouette image 135SG005S on the image display device 5 are repeatedly executed, the present invention is limited to this. Rather, as a modified example 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the second term, when the variable display that is the target of the flash effect at the time of winning the award is started, it is the same as during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning the first term. , Outputting the sound corresponding to the winning flash effect by the speakers 8L and 8R at the volume V1, blinking the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at the brightness C1 and cycle T1, and temporarily displaying the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5. You may. By doing this, even during the execution period of the flash performance when winning a prize in the second half, the sound corresponding to the flash performance when winning a prize is output at the volume V1 from speakers 8L and 8R, as in the flash performance when winning a prize in the first half, and the sound for the flash performance when winning a prize is output at volume V1. By flashing the lamp 135SG009F at a brightness C1 and a cycle T1 and displaying the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5, the player recognizes that the variable display that is the subject of the winning flash effect will start. Since it is easy to play, it can improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modification example 135SG-13, even during the execution period of the second period winning flash effect, when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started, the same as during the execution period of the first period winning flash effect, The speakers 8L and 8R temporarily output the sound corresponding to the flash effect at the time of winning at the volume V1, the flash lamp 135SG009F blinks at the brightness C1 and the period T1 at the time of winning, and the effect image 135SG005E is displayed on the image display device 5. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect is started during the execution period of the latter winning flash effect, the winning time flash effect by the speakers 8L and 8R is Execute only one or two of the following: outputting the sound corresponding to the flash effect at volume V1, flashing the winning flash lamp 135SG009F at brightness C1 and period T1, and displaying the effect image 135SG005E on the image display device 5. You can do it like this.

In addition, the pachinko game machine 1 of this specification has a jackpot probability that differs depending on the set value (FIGS. 1 to 9), a pending display notice effect based on a starting win, and a flash effect at the time of winning. It is possible to perform the winning flash effect and the light emission mode changes depending on the lamp (characteristic section 135SG, Figures 10-1 to 10-68), and during the winning time flash effect during the variable display pattern confirmation period. (Modified Example 135SG-1, Figures 10-69 to 10-89), it is possible to perform super reach reach performances with different jackpot expectations, and the movable body movement is performed before the reach performance with high jackpot expectations. If the performance can be executed and the movable body movement performance is executed, the light emitting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed from the start timing of the movable body movement performance to a light emission mode corresponding to the movable body movement performance. (Modification 2, Figures 10-90 to 10-107), it is possible to perform a step-up effect during variable display, and if the step-up effect is executed when the winning flash effect is not executed, the winning flash While the lamp 135SG009F for the winning flash emits light in a manner corresponding to the step-up effect, if the step-up effect is executed while the winning flash effect is being executed, the lighting mode of the winning flash lamp 135SG009F is changed to the winning flash effect. One that does not change from the corresponding light emission mode (Modification 135SG-3, Figures 10-108 to 10-118), it is possible to execute a movable body movement performance before the start of the reach performance of super reach, and the lamp for flashing when winning a prize When the light emitting mode of 135SG009F changes from the light emitting mode according to the flash effect when winning a prize to the light emitting mode corresponding to the movable body movement effect from the start timing of the movable body movement effect, and from the start timing of the reach effect to the light emitting mode according to the reach effect. The jackpot expectation level differs depending on the lighting mode (Modified Example 135SG-4, Figure 10-119), and display patterns α to ε are provided as display modes for pending display and active display. The ratio of which display pattern is determined as the display pattern of the pending display or the active display is different depending on the execution of the winning flash effect due to winning a prize (Modification 135SG-5, Figure 10- 120), when the display pattern ε is determined as the display pattern of the hold display, the display pattern ε changes to any of the display patterns α to γ according to the execution of the action effect (Modification 135SG- 6, Fig. 10-121 to Fig. 10-123), the display mode of the silhouette image 135SG005S displayed on the image display device 5 changes according to the progress of the flash effect at the time of winning (Modification 135SG-7, Fig. 10-124 to Fig. 10-130), etc., but the pachinko game machine of the present invention may be implemented by combining two or more of these plurality of features and modifications. good.

In addition, in the feature section 135SG, the pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as a game machine that plays a predetermined game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game machine that plays a predetermined game is defined as a game machine that plays at least a predetermined game. In addition to the pachinko game machine 1, it may be a slot machine or a general game machine as long as it performs the following.

The present invention is not limited to what has been described above. In addition, the specific configuration is included in the present invention, in addition to the above-mentioned embodiments and other embodiments described below, even if there are changes or additions within the scope of the present invention.

Furthermore, all or some of the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modification example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment example and each modification example described later may be combined arbitrarily.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiments and the later-described embodiments disclosed this time are illustrative in all respects and should not be considered restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description and the following description, and it is intended that all changes within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims are included.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention executes variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and provides an advantageous advantage when a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to a state (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
Light-emitting means capable of emitting light (for example, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable lamp 9d, winning flash lamp 135SG009F),
Display means (e.g., image display device 5) capable of displaying a specific display (e.g., pending display and active display) corresponding to the variable display;
A specific display effect that displays the specific display based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (for example, the occurrence of a starting prize) (for example, a part that displays a pending display or an active display in any of display patterns α to display patterns γ) ), and a specific light emitting effect (for example, a flash effect when winning a prize) that causes the light emitting means to emit light;
Equipped with
The effect executing means executes the specific light emitting effect so that the light emission of the light emitting means can be recognized by the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIG. -28, as shown in Figures 10-29 (A) to 10-32 (H), and Figures 10-49 (A) to 10-50 (D), before the display of the pending display is completed. The part that lights up the flash lamp 135SG009F when winning a prize),
The rate of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-24, when the winning flash effect is executed) (If the flash effect is not executed at the time of winning, the percentage of control to be in the jackpot gaming state is higher than when the flash effect is not executed)
The light emitting means includes a first light emitting means (e.g. winning flash lamp 135SG009F) and a second light emitting means different from the first light emitting means (e.g. main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body). lamp 9d);
The first light emitting means includes a first period from the start of the specific light emitting effect to a predetermined timing (for example, a period from the start of the previous period winning flash effect to the end timing of the previous period winning flash effect); A second period from the predetermined timing to the specific timing of the variable display that is the target of the specific light emitting effect (for example, from the start of the late winning flash effect to the start timing of the variable display that is the target of the winning flash effect) (for example, as shown in FIG. 10-28, the prize-winning flash lamp 135SG009F has a brightness of C1 and (The part that blinks at cycle T1, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second half, the brightness is C2 and blinks at cycle T2),
The second light emitting means emits light in a manner that corresponds to the specific light emission effect during the first period, and emits light in a manner that corresponds to the variable display being executed during the second period (for example, FIG. 10-28 As shown in , the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, the attacker lamp 9c, and the movable lamp 9d flash at a brightness C1 and cycle T1 during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the first period, and during the execution period of the flash effect at the time of winning in the second period. During the period, the part that blinks at a brightness of C2 and a period of T0),
The effect execution means can start the specific light emission effect before the start of the specific display effect (for example, as shown in FIGS. 10-29(A) to 10-32(H), When executing start effect B, the winning flash lamp 135SG009F, main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, movable body, etc. the part where the lamp 9d emits light),
moreover,
State control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 As shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the updating means that can update the numerical information based on the variable display being executed (for example, As shown in FIGS. 12-13, the state control means includes a part for executing step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the state control means makes the numerical information updated by the updating means a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. By this, it is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, As shown, the updating means (the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100) is used when variable display of the first identification information is executed and when variable display of the second identification information is executed. It is characterized in that the numerical information is updated depending on the case (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100).
According to this feature, since the light emitting means emits light before the display of the specific display is completed, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect, and the first period of the specific light emission effect In this case, the specific light emitting effect can be made more conspicuous by causing not only the first light emitting means but also the second light emitting means to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the specific display. Furthermore, even if the gaming state changes and any of the identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing his motivation to play.

In other words, it is possible to create a gaming machine in which the player can easily recognize the specific display that is the target of the specific light emission effect depending on the light emission mode of the light emission means, and also when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the second Since numerical information is updated when variable display of identification information is executed, for example, numerical information is updated only when either variable display of first identification information or variable display of second identification information is executed. It is easier for the numerical information to reach the special number of times than in the case where the player is rescued, so that the player's desire to play can be increased. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that, when installed in a gaming parlor, can make the effects easy for players to understand and can increase the players' desire to play.

Furthermore, the light emission mode of the light emitting means and the numerical information may be associated with each other. For example, the light emission mode is made different before and after the numerical information reaches the special number of times. By doing so, the player can easily understand the number of variable displays, and the game becomes more interesting.

Furthermore, as another example of a gaming machine that can improve interest, a variable display of the first identification information and a variable display of the second identification information are executed, and a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol) is derived and displayed. A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous when the situation occurs, and a state control means ( For example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173, as shown in FIG. 12-19, a part in the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS537. ), and an updating means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update the numerical information based on the execution of the variable display. The state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display (for example, , as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100. The updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is executed or when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 (a portion of the game control microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS71), a predetermined suggestion effect execution means (for example, FIG. 12- As shown in FIG. 49, a part for executing step 108IWS811 in the performance control CPU 120) and a special notification performance that notifies that the control of the special state will be started based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, in FIG. -52 The background image changes as shown in (C1) and (C2). As shown in Figure 12-53 (B), there is a blackout at the start of the change. As shown in Figure 12-54 (C), the change ends. The system further includes a special notification effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-23, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638), which can execute a special notification effect execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-23, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638). In the period before the special condition is satisfied, the rate at which the predetermined suggestive performance is executed is common (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-44, the portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A). (See Figure 12-50) Examples include gaming machines. An example of the form of this gaming machine will be explained below as another example of the form.

(Other form examples)

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S901). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S902). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on with the clear switch on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S903; Yes), initialization processing (step S908) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process to clear the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

Further, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command instructing initialization to the production control board 12 (step S909). When receiving the performance control command, the performance control CPU 120 displays a screen on the image display device 5, for example, to notify that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S903; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power outage or the like (power outage), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop processing immediately before the pachinko game machine 1 becomes unable to operate due to the power supply stop. In this power supply stop processing, processing for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is to be backed up in the RAM 102, data protection processing for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. The data protection process includes adding error detection codes (checksum, parity bit, etc.) and backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data for proceeding with the game (including various flags, states of various timers, etc.), as well as backup flag states and error detection codes. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is on. If the backup flag is off and no backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; No), initialization processing (step S8) is executed.

If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S904; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a data check on the backed up data (performed using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step S904; Yes). S5). In step S5, it is determined whether the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of power supply stop, using, for example, a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that these match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S905; No), initialization processing (step S908) is executed because the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped.

If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S905; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S906) to return the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time the power supply was stopped. In the recovery process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (the contents of the backed up data). As a result, the gaming state is restored to the state at the time of power supply stoppage, and if the special symbols are fluctuating, the fluctuation of the special symbols will be restarted from the state before restoration by executing the game control timer interrupt process described later. That will happen.

Then, the CPU 103 transmits a production control command to the production control board 12 to instruct recovery from the power outage (step S907). In line with this, a production control command that specifies the game state before the power outage that has been backed up, or a production control command that specifies the display result of the special pattern game that is currently being executed if the special pattern game is being executed. A command may also be sent. These commands can be the same as the commands that are set to be sent in the special design process described later. When the performance control CPU 120 receives a performance control command that specifies the time of recovery from a power outage, it notifies the image display device 5, for example, that recovery from a power outage has been completed or that recovery from a power outage is in progress. Display the screen to do so. The performance control CPU 120 may perform appropriate screen display based on the performance control command.

After completing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the production control command to the production control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, the register of the CTC built in the gaming control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9011), and the interrupt is permitted (step S9012). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

Next, a gaming machine according to Example 1 in the feature section 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-1 to 12-47.

(Board configuration)
FIG. 12-1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic part 108IW. In the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic part 108IW, in addition to the board configuration of the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 1, as shown in FIG. ing. Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1, a right-handed hitting notification LED 100IW20 is provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-1, fourth symbol displays 100IW21a and 21b are provided on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, respectively. Among these, the fourth symbol display device 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5 is a display device that executes variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol. Further, the fourth symbol display device 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5 is a display device that executes variable display of the fourth symbol in synchronization with the variable display of the second special symbol. In this example, the fourth symbol display devices 100IW21a and 21b are each composed of two LEDs arranged one above the other, and the fluctuating display of the fourth symbol is executed by repeating alternately lighting and extinguishing the two LEDs. Ru.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-1, in the pachinko game machine 1 in this feature section 108IW, instead of the passage gate 41 shown in FIG. A gate 100IW41 is provided. In this feature section 108IW, a common figure game is executed based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 100IW41. Therefore, in this feature section 108IW, in the variable probability state or time saving state, the probability of hitting a common symbol increases, so it is advantageous to perform the firing operation (right-handed operation) aiming at the right side of the game area. On the other hand, in the present feature section 108IW, in the normal state, it is more advantageous to perform a firing operation (left-handed operation) aiming at the left side of the game area.

(Jackpot probability, time saving probability)
FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability for each set value. Of these, FIG. 12-2 shows the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. Moreover, FIG. 12-3 shows the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. In this example, the setting value can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities), and when the power is turned on to the pachinko gaming machine 1. It is possible to execute setting confirmation processing and setting change processing to check current setting values and change setting values. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3, this example shows a configuration in which the settings can be changed in six steps from setting values "1" to "6". It should be noted that the configuration is not limited to the case where the settings can be changed in 6 stages, but may be configured so that the settings can be changed in 2 to 5 stages, or the settings can be changed in 7 stages or more, for example.

As shown in Figures 12-2 (A) and 12-3 (A), both when executing the variable display of the first special symbol and when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the non-probability variable state (low probability In the probability state (normal state or time saving state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "205/65536" (approximately 1/319), making it the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "242/65536", which is the highest. This setting is high (approximately 1/270) and is the most advantageous setting for the player.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 (B) and 12-3 (B), both when executing the variable display of the first special symbol and when executing the variable display of the second special symbol, the probability variable state ( In the high probability state), the setting value "1" has the lowest jackpot probability of "2050/65536" (approximately 1/32), making it the most disadvantageous setting for the player. The jackpot probability increases in the order of setting value "2", setting value "3", setting value "4", and setting value "5", and for setting value "6", the jackpot probability is "2420/65536", which is the highest. This setting is high (about 1/27) and is the most advantageous setting for the player. Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3, in this example, the jackpot probability is increased 10 times in the variable probability state compared to the non-probable variable state.

In addition, as shown in Figure 12-2, when performing a variable display of the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6" (in addition, whether it is in a variable state or not) (regardless of whether the state is in a variable state or not), the probability of time saving failure is constant at "164/65536" (approximately 1/400). In addition, as shown in Figure 12-3, when performing a variable display of the second special symbol, regardless of the setting value "1" to "6" (in addition, whether it is in a variable state or not) (regardless of whether the state is non-determinable or variable), the probability of time saving failure is constant at "328/65536" (approximately 1/200). That is, in this example, the determination value for determining the time saving deviation is the same regardless of the set value.

As shown in Figures 12-2 and 12-3, even if the jackpot probability is varied depending on the setting value and the probability of losing time is constant as described above, the probability of winning without time saving is fixed. By varying the probabilities between set values "1" to "6", the number of determination values for each set value may be made consistent.

In addition, it may be further configured to be controllable to a small winning gaming state. If the configuration is such that the small win can also be determined, for example, the configuration may be such that the small win probability is constant regardless of the set value "1" to "6".

In addition, in the case where the small win can also be determined, the structure may be such that there is a small win with time saving that controls the time saving state using the small win as an opportunity.

Note that the examples shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3 are just examples, and various ways can be considered for setting the jackpot probability and the short-time loss probability. For example, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3, when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, the time saving probability is approximately 1/400, and the variation of the second special symbol is approximately 1/400. In the case where the display is executed, the probability of time saving failure is approximately 1/200, but on the contrary, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the time saving failure probability is approximately 1/200, When performing a variable display of the second special symbol, the time saving probability may be configured to be approximately 1/400.

(Jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 12-4 is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Of these, FIG. 12-4(A) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 12-4(B) shows a specific example of the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in FIG. 12-4 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result will be a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referred to to determine the type of jackpot as one of "normal jackpot", "probable variable jackpot", or "sudden probability variable jackpot".

As shown in FIG. 12-4 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result will be a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referred to to determine the type of jackpot as one of "normal jackpot", "probable variable jackpot", or "sudden probability variable jackpot".

"Normal jackpot" is a jackpot that controls the jackpot game state for 15 rounds and shifts to the time saving state after the jackpot game state ends. When the time saving state is entered, the time saving state is maintained until the 100-time variation display is completed or the next jackpot occurs.

A "variable probability jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state for 15 rounds and then shifts to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Once the state changes to the variable probability state, the variable probability state is maintained until the 100 variable displays are completed or the next jackpot occurs. In addition, in this example, when controlled to the variable probability state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

"Suddenly variable probability jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a two-round jackpot gaming state and then shifts to a variable probability state after the jackpot gaming state ends. Once the state changes to the variable probability state, the variable probability state is maintained until the 100 variable displays are completed or the next jackpot occurs. In addition, in this example, when controlled to the variable probability state, it is also controlled to the time saving state.

In addition, in this example, in the case of "normal jackpot" and "probable variable jackpot", in each of the 15 rounds during the jackpot game, 29 seconds elapse or a predetermined number of games (10 in this example) are played. The grand prize opening is controlled to be open until a ball wins (therefore, the long opening of the grand prize opening is performed 15 times). On the other hand, in the case of a "suddenly variable jackpot", the jackpot is controlled to be open for an extremely short period of 0.5 seconds in each of the two rounds of the jackpot game (therefore, the jackpot is kept open for a short period of time). (opening is done twice). Therefore, in the case of a "suddenly variable probability jackpot", it is virtually impossible to expect a prize to enter the big winning hole, and it can be made to appear as if the state has suddenly shifted to a variable probability state.

As shown in Figure 12-4 (A), in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and results in a jackpot, it is determined that there is a 40% probability of a "normal jackpot"; A ``probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 20%, and a ``sudden probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 20%. In addition, as shown in Figure 12-4 (B), in this example, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and a jackpot occurs, it is determined that it is a "normal jackpot" with a probability of 40%, and the 55 A ``probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a probability of 5%, and a ``sudden probability variable jackpot'' is determined with a 5% probability.

(Time saving type determination table)
FIG. 12-5 is an explanatory diagram showing a time saving type determination table stored in the ROM 101. Among these, FIG. 12-5(A) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the first special symbol. Further, FIG. 12-5(B) shows a specific example of the time saving type determination table for the second special symbol.

As shown in Figure 12-5 (A), the jackpot type determination table for the first special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a time-saving losing symbol. , is a table that is referred to in order to determine the time saving type as one of "time saving difference A", "work time saving difference B", or "work time saving difference C".

As shown in Figure 12-5 (B), the jackpot type determination table for the second special symbol is based on the random number for type determination when it is determined that the variable display result is a time-saving losing symbol. , is a table that is referred to in order to determine the time saving type as one of "time saving difference A", "work time saving difference B", or "work time saving difference C".

As shown in FIGS. 12-5(A) and (B), in this example, when the first special symbol fluctuates and the time is shortened, and when the second special symbol fluctuates and the time shortens. In any case, there is a probability of 1/3 that it is determined to be a "time saving error A", a 1/3 probability that it is determined to be a "time saving error B", and a 1/3 probability that it is a "time saving error C". It is determined that

Note that the example shown in FIG. 12-5 is just one example, and various ways of determining the time saving type can be considered. For example, if it is determined that the first special symbol is a change in time saving, the probability of determining ``time saving C'' is increased, but if it is determined that the second special symbol is a change in time saving, it is determined that the time saving is incorrect. The determination rate of the time saving type may be made different between the case where the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, such as by increasing the probability of determining ``missing A''.

Further, for example, if the configuration is configured such that the time reduction can be determined even during the time reduction state via the rescue time reduction, it may be configured so that the time reduction number counter etc. is not uniformly overwritten even if the time reduction is exceeded, or the time reduction failure symbol Depending on the type, the time saving counter etc. may be overwritten or not overwritten in some cases.

FIG. 12-6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the time saving types. As shown in FIG. 12-6, in this example, in the normal state, when "time saving difference A" occurs, the time reduction state is controlled to 100 time reduction times, and when "work time reduction difference B" occurs, the time reduction state is controlled to 50 time reduction times. The time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 30 times, and in the case of "time saving failure C", the time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 30 time saving times. In addition, in the time saving state, when it becomes "time saving loss A", the time saving state is controlled until the next jackpot, and when it becomes "time saving loss B", it is controlled to the time saving state with 200 time saving times, and "time saving loss C'', the time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 100 time saving times. In addition, in the normal state and the time saving state, in the case of saving time saving, the time saving state is controlled to the time saving state of 800 time saving times.

In addition, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where it is determined that the time saving is off in a variable probability state. Furthermore, in this example, as will be described later, there is no case where it is determined that the time saving is canceled even in the time saving state due to the relief time saving. In addition, in this example, as will be described later, after the time reduction is controlled to a time reduction state of 800 time reductions due to the relief time reduction, if a jackpot does not occur even after 800 fluctuation displays are completed, the relief time reduction is resumed. Accordingly, the time saving state (relief time saving) is controlled to the number of time saving times of 800 times. Therefore, the number of time reductions due to relief time reduction is essentially until the next jackpot occurs.

Here, the relief time reduction attainment rate for each setting value will be explained. The relief time reduction attainment rate is the rate at which the time reduction state is controlled via the relief time reduction. The time saving state via the relief time saving is not controlled by the jackpot gaming state, but is controlled by changing n times (800 times in this example), so the relief time saving attainment rate K is as follows. It can be calculated as follows.
K=(1-ML)n={(P-1)÷P}n
(K=Relief time saving attainment rate, P=Denominator of jackpot probability ML, n=Number of operations)

Specifically, for example, if the setting value is "1", the jackpot probability ML is approximately 1/319, so the relief time saving attainment rate K is 8.1%, and if the setting value is "2", the jackpot probability ML is approximately 1/319. Since it is about 1/310, the rescue time saving attainment rate K is 7.5%, and if the setting value is "3", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/300, so the rescue time saving attainment rate K is 6.9%, If the setting value is "4", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/290, so the relief time saving attainment rate K is 6.3%, and if the setting value is "5", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/280. The rescue time saving attainment rate K is 5.7%, and if the setting value is "6", the jackpot probability ML is about 1/270, so the rescue time saving attainment rate K is 5.1%.

In this way, the lower the set value of the jackpot probability, the higher the relief time shortening attainment rate. Thereby, even if the jackpot probability is set to a low value, it is possible to rescue the player.

Further, the method of controlling the number of time reductions when the time reduction is delayed is not limited to that shown in FIG. 12-6. For example, even if the same time saving pattern is derived and displayed, the control may be configured such that the number of time saving times is the same (100) in the normal state and in the time saving state. Also, for example, even if the same time saving symbol is derived and displayed, if it is in the normal state, the number of time savings is controlled to be 100 times, and if it is in the time saving state, it is controlled to be 0 times (i.e. It may also be configured such that the current state falls from the time saving state to the normal state. There are various possible ways to control the number of time reductions when the time reduction is delayed in this way.

(Fluctuation pattern table)
FIGS. 12-7 and 12-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of variation pattern tables in the feature section 108IW. Of these, FIG. 12-7(A) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table A for jackpot. Further, FIG. 12-7(B) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state. Further, FIG. 12-7(C) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table C for the loss during the time saving state controlled via the jackpot. Further, FIG. 12-7(D) shows a specific example of the fluctuation pattern table D for the time-saving state time deviation controlled via the time-saving deviation.

Further, FIG. 12-8(E) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table E for failures in the time-saving state controlled via the relief time-saving method. Further, FIGS. 12-8(F) and (G) show specific examples of variation pattern tables F and G for deviations within the last 10 variations that shorten the relief time. Among these, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 12-8(F) is a variation pattern table immediately before relief time reduction that is selected when the number of pending memories (for example, the total number of pending memories) is 3 or less. Further, the variation pattern table F shown in FIG. 12-8(G) is a variation pattern table immediately before relief time reduction that is selected when the number of pending memories (for example, the total number of pending memories) is 4 or more.

Further, FIG. 12-8 (H) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table H for failure in a variable probability state. However, in this example, even in the variable probability state or the time saving state, if the number of pending memories is not 1 or more (if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern is determined using the variation pattern table B.

Further, FIG. 12-8(I) shows a specific example of the variation pattern table I for the deviation of the variation display, which shortens the relief time. Further, FIG. 12-8 (J) shows a specific example of a fluctuation pattern table J for a jackpot with a fluctuation display that shortens the rescue time.

As shown in FIG. 12-7(A), in this example, in the case of a jackpot, the variation patterns include variation pattern PB2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PB2-2 (super reach α), variation pattern PB2 -3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-7(B), in this example, when there is a deviation in the normal state, the variation patterns are variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach). , variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (C), in this example, if there is a deviation during the time-saving state controlled via the jackpot, the fluctuation patterns PA1-2 (ultra shortening fluctuation), fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra shortening fluctuation), The pattern is determined to be one of pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), and variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-7 (D), in this example, when there is a deviation during the time saving state controlled via the time saving deviation, the variation pattern is set to the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra shortening variation), The variation pattern PA2-3 (shortened variation), the variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is determined.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (E), in this example, if there is a deviation in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, the variation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortened variation) is used as the variation pattern. , variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in Figures 12-7(C), 12-7(D), and 12-8(E), in this example, in the time shortening state, the fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening fluctuation) and the fluctuation pattern Pattern PA1-3 (shortening variation) and variation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortening variation) are determined at a high rate, and the average variation time is shorter than in the normal state. Furthermore, even in the same time-saving state, when the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving error, the selection probability of variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation) is 80% compared to when the time-saving state is controlled via a jackpot. %, and the average fluctuation time is short. In addition, in the time saving state controlled via relief time saving, the selection rate of variation pattern PA1-4 (extremely shortening variation) is as high as 99%, compared to the time saving state controlled via time saving or jackpot. In comparison, the average fluctuation time is even shorter. With this configuration, when the number of executions of the fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the relief time is shortened (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), the fluctuation pattern PA1-4 (Extremely shortened variation) increases the rate at which variable display is executed, and the period until the next jackpot is controlled is shortened, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

Also, as shown in Figures 12-7(C), 12-7(D), and 12-8(E), in this example, compared to The selection probability is high at 80%, and the average fluctuation time is short. Also, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time saving, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time saving or jackpot, the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β ), and there is no case where a super reach is executed. In other words, in the time saving state controlled via the relief time reduction, unlike the time saving state controlled via the time reduction loss or jackpot, the super reach is not executed at the time of loss, and the average fluctuation time is shortened. There is. With this configuration, when the number of executions of the fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the rescue time is shortened (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), it is determined that the super reach has failed. This prevents the user from losing interest in the game. Furthermore, since the period until the next jackpot is controlled is shortened, a decrease in interest can be suppressed. In addition, in this example, in the time saving state controlled via the rescue time saving, super reach is not executed at the time of failure, but it may be configured so that it is executed. For example, in a time saving state controlled via a relief time saving, super reach may be executed at a lower rate than in a time saving state controlled via a time saving loss or a jackpot. With this configuration, when the number of executions of the fluctuation display reaches a predetermined number (900 times in this example) and the rescue time is shortened (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), it is determined that the super reach has failed. Since the ratio of such events is lowered, a decline in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, as shown in Figure 12-8 (F), in this example, if the failure occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the rescue time, even if the number of pending memories (for example, the total number of pending memories) is 3 or less, For example, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of determining the fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation) is 95%. It's getting expensive. In addition, as shown in Figure 12-8 (G), in this example, if the failure occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the relief time, even if the number of pending memories (for example, the total number of pending memories) is 4 or more. For example, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be either the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach), and the probability of determining the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is 95%. It's getting expensive.

In addition, as shown in Figures 12-8 (F) and (G), if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the relief time, fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or fluctuation pattern PA2-3 There is no case where (super reach β) is determined, and there is no case where super reach is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a variable display of the super reach is executed in the period immediately before the relief time is shortened, but a jackpot does not occur. Incidentally, even if the deviation occurs within 10 fluctuations immediately before the relief time is shortened, the fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) may be determined. For example, within the 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the relief time, the ratio is lower than the period before the 10 fluctuations immediately before the shortening of the relief time (that is, the period using the fluctuation pattern table C shown in FIG. 12-7(C)). The variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) may be determined at the time of a miss.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (H), in this example, if there is a deviation in the variable probability state, the variation patterns are variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortening variation), variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach variation), and variation pattern PA2-1 (normal reach variation). ), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α), or variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β).

As shown in Figure 12-8 (H), in this example, in the variable probability state, the variation pattern PA1-2 (ultra-shortened variation) is determined with a high probability of 90%, and the average variation time is further reduced than in the short time state. is shorter.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-8 (I), in this example, if the fluctuation display shortens the rescue time and the result is a failure, the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (missing the rush) is determined as the fluctuation pattern. Ru. In other words, the variation pattern PA3-1 (missing entry) is a variation pattern dedicated to saving time saving, which is not used for a variation display that does not shorten rescue time, but is used only for a variation display (missing) that shortens rescue time. In this example, when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be the fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (missing entry), as will be described later, a time-saving entry effect (for example, 12-38 (G) and (H)) is executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player that the rescue time is shortened and the game is controlled to be in a time-saving state, and it is also possible to improve the interest when the rescue time is shortened.

In addition, as shown in Figure 12-8 (J), in this example, if the variation display shortens the relief time and the jackpot is missed, the variation pattern PA3-2 (pretend jackpot) is determined as the variation pattern. be done. That is, the variation pattern PA3-2 (rushing fake jackpot) is a variation pattern dedicated to saving time that is not used for a variation display that does not shorten the rescue time, but is used only for a variation display that shortens the rescue time (jackpot). In this example, when the fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (pretend jackpot) is determined, as will be described later, a time-saving entry effect (for example, Fig. 12 -38 (G), (H)) and the same type of performance (for example, see Figure 12-41 (G')), there is a performance that notifies you of a jackpot (for example, Figure 12-41 (G')). (H')) is executed. With such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the rescue time has been shortened, he is informed that he will win the jackpot, so it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and improve his interest.

Note that the method of setting the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 12-7 and 12-8 is an example, and various methods are possible. For example, if there is a time saving error during the time saving state and the time saving state is controlled again, it is the same as the fluctuation pattern table C for the time saving state time controlled via jackpot shown in Figure 12-7 (C). The variation pattern may be determined using a table.

In addition, for example, only when the time saving state is continued until the next jackpot (in this example, when the time saving state becomes A during the time saving state) in the case where the time saving is missed, the jackpot shown in Figure 12-7 (C) can be achieved. The variation pattern may be determined using the same table as the variation pattern table C for the time-saving state controlled by .

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figure 12-8 (E), during the time saving state via relief time saving, the selection rate of the variation pattern PA1-4 of extremely shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is high, and the variation display Because the digestion speed is fast, there are few types of executable preview performances and advance preview performances. For example, when in a time saving state via relief time saving, an effect image may be displayed at the edge of the display screen of the image display device 5, a lamp or LED may be turned on, a predetermined effect sound, or a normal effect may be displayed. Performances such as outputting different fluctuating stop sounds are performed.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which a variation pattern table E is provided exclusively during the time saving state via relief time saving, but the variation pattern table E is not provided exclusively during the time saving state via relief time saving, and for example, when The variation pattern may be determined using the variation pattern table C (see FIG. 12-7(C)) during the time saving state.

Additionally, in this example, when the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the case is shown in which the changeover pattern tables are switched to fluctuation pattern tables F and G (see Figures 12-8 (F) and (G)). , but is not limited to such embodiments. For example, the variation pattern table may be configured to be switched so that the reach ratio gradually decreases as the number of remaining variations until the relief time becomes short becomes smaller, or the number of breaks such as 100 or 200 remaining variations may be configured. It may be configured such that the remaining number of fluctuations can be suggested by switching the fluctuation pattern table only in this case.

Furthermore, in this example, the configuration is such that different fluctuation pattern tables are used (that is, the average fluctuation times are different) for the time saving state via jackpot, the time saving state via losing time saving, and the time saving state via rescue time saving. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the same fluctuation pattern table may be used in both cases (that is, the average fluctuation time is the same), or the time saving state via relief time saving is better than the time saving state via jackpot or loss time saving. Alternatively, the average fluctuation time may be made longer.

(Production control command)
FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the content of the production control command sent to the production control CPU 120. In the examples shown in FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10, the command 80XX(H) is an effect control command that specifies a variation pattern of decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols. (variable pattern command). Note that the performance control command that specifies the variation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of variation. Therefore, upon receiving any of the commands 80XX(H), the production control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols.

Command 9000 (H) is a production control command (display result 1 specification command) (missing specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a failure (no time saving). be.

Command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 specification command) (time saving deviation A specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is time saving deviation A. be. Command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 3 specification command) (time saving deviation B specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is time saving deviation B. be. Command 9003 (H) is a production control command (display result 4 specification command) (time saving deviation C specification command) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is time saving deviation C. be.

Command 9004 (H) is a performance control command (display result 5 designation command (normal jackpot designation command)) that designates that the display result of the variable display of decorative symbols designated by the variable pattern command is a normal jackpot. Command 9005 (H) is a performance control command (display result 6 designation command (probability variable jackpot designation command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the variable pattern command is a variable probability jackpot. Command 9006 (H) is a production control command (display result 7 specification command (sudden probability variable jackpot specification command)) that specifies that the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol specified by the variation pattern command is suddenly a variable probability jackpot. .

Command 95XX(H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 1 designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (126 times or less) until the relief time is shortened. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (126 or less) until the relief time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 1, command 9501 (H) is sent as the 1 designation command for the number of relief time reductions, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 126, Command 957E(H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction count 1 designation command. In this example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 127 or more, the maximum value 7F (H) is set in the EXT data, and it is uniformly issued as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. Command 957F(H) is transmitted.

Command 96XX(H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number 2 designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until the relief time is shortened. In this example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until the rescue time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100, command 9601 (H) is sent as the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 800, Command 9608 (H) is transmitted as a relief time reduction count 1 designation command.

Command 97XX(H) is an effect control command (relief time reduction number designation command) that specifies the remaining number of fluctuations (number of times in units of 100) until the rescue time is shortened at the time of power restoration. In this example, when the power is restored, a value corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the command for specifying the number of times to shorten the rescue time at the time of restoration and is transmitted. For example, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened when the power is restored is 100 or less, command 9701 (H) is sent as a command to specify the number of times that the rescue time is shortened at the time of restoration, and the remaining number of fluctuations is 701 or more. If the number of times is 800 or less, a command 9708 (H) is sent as a command for specifying the number of times to save time during recovery.

In addition, in this example, the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened can be transmitted in units of 126 times, and if the remaining number of fluctuations is 127 times or more, it can be specified in units of 100 times. Although the example is shown in which the information is sent to the Internet, the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a combination of two commands may be transmitted so that even if the remaining number of commands is 127 or more, the commands can be transmitted in a specific manner.

Command A000(H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. Command A001 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. Command A002 (H) is a production control command (first symbol confirmation C specified command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the first special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

Command A100 (H) is a performance control command (second symbol confirmation A designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds. Command A101 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol confirmation B designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 10 seconds. Command A102 (H) is a production control command (second symbol confirmation C designation command) that can specify the stop of the variable display of the second special symbol and also specify that the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds. be.

Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (jackpot start specification command: fanfare specification command) that specifies the start of a jackpot game. Command B001 (H) is a production control command (jackpot end specification command: ending specification command) that specifies the end of the jackpot game.

Command B1XX(H) is an effect control command (big winning opening display command) that specifies the display during a round during the jackpot game. Note that the number of rounds to be displayed is set in "XX". Command B2XX(H) is an effect control command (display command after opening of the jackpot opening) that specifies the display after the round (display of the interval between rounds) during the jackpot game.

Command B400 (H) is a performance control command (big winning opening winning designation command) that specifies that a game ball has won in the big winning opening.

Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first pending memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the first pending memory number is increased by one. Command C001 (H) is an effect control command (second pending memory number addition designation command) that specifies that the second pending memory number is increased by one. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (first pending memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first pending memory number is decreased by one. Command C101 (H) is an effect control command (second pending memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second pending memory number is decreased by one.

Command E000(H) is an effect control command (normal state designation command) that designates that the gaming state is controlled to the normal state. Command E001 (H) is a performance control command (time saving state A designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to a time saving state at the end of the jackpot game. Command E002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state B designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state when the time saving is over. Command E003 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state C designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to be in a time saving state during rescue time saving. Command E004 (H) is a performance control command (probability variable state designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is controlled to a probability variable state.

Command E100 (H) is a production control command (right-handed hitting notification start designation command) that specifies to start right-handed hitting notification. Command E101 (H) is a production control command (right-handed hitting notification end designation command) that specifies ending the right-handed hitting notification.

Command F000(H) is an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) that specifies to start displaying a customer waiting demonstration. The customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted, for example, at the end of the symbol confirmation period and at the end of the jackpot game, when no pending memory is stored (that is, when the total number of pending memories is 0). Further, the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, for example, when the power is turned on (it is transmitted when either the initialization process or the recovery process is executed). Also, for example, when transitioning to a setting change mode that executes setting change processing or a setting confirmation mode that executes setting confirmation processing, a setting value specification command is sent after each mode ends, and then a customer waiting demo specification Command is sent. In addition, when the recovery process or setting confirmation process is executed, the customer A waiting demo specification command is sent. As described later, when the performance control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demonstration designation command, if 10 seconds elapse without receiving any other commands such as the performance control command at the time of starting winning, the rescue time saving function is activated. A telop display indicating that the device is installed is started (in this example, whether or not to display a telop is determined by lottery). Furthermore, when three minutes have passed without receiving any other commands after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, the demonstration movie is played back.

Command F1XX (H) is a production control command (setting value designation command) that designates the set value that has been set. Note that "XX" is set to a value corresponding to the set value.

When the production control CPU 120 (specifically, production control CPU 120) mounted on the production control board 12 receives the production control command described above from the game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11, The display state of the image display device 5 is changed according to the contents shown in 12-9 and FIG. Note that production control commands other than the production control commands shown in FIGS. 12-9 and 12-10 are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12. For example, a more detailed performance control command regarding the jackpot game and a performance control command indicating the game state (for example, a performance control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 12-11 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing in the feature section 108IW. In this example, the processing in steps S1 to S7, the processing in steps S8 to S9, and the processing in steps S10 to S12 are similar to those shown in FIG. 11.

In this example, when the effect control command instructing recovery from power outage is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 checks the value of the relief time reduction counter for counting the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened, Control is performed to set a value corresponding to the current value of the rescue time reduction counter and send a recovery rescue time reduction number designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS11). For example, when the current value of the rescue time reduction counter is 100 or less, the CPU 10 performs control to transmit a command 9701 (H) as a recovery time rescue time reduction designation command. Further, for example, when the current value of the rescue time saving number counter is 701 or more and 800 or less, the CPU 10 performs control to transmit a command 9708 (H) as a recovery time saving time saving number designation command. Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clearing process is not executed when the gaming machine is powered on and the recovery process is executed, a command to specify the number of times the recovery time is shortened is sent, and the remaining recovery time up to the current rescue time is sent. The number of changes will be notified. Further, by executing the variable display based on the suspended memory restored by the recovery process (that is, the suspended memory stored before the power outage), it is possible to shorten the rescue time. With this configuration, in a situation where a pending memory corresponding to a variable display that shortens the rescue time is stored before a power outage, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage to the player when a power outage occurs.

Note that although this example shows a case where a recovery time reduction number specifying command is transmitted separately from the recovery command at the time of power outage recovery, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened may be set in the EXT data of the recovery command (for example, power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7, and then transmitted.

Further, when the production control command instructing the initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets "800" in the relief time reduction counter (step 100IWS12). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, "800" is set in the rescue time reduction counter. That is, in this example, after the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, if neither a jackpot nor a time saving error occurs even after 800 fluctuation displays are executed, the relief time is shortened and the time saving state is entered. will be controlled by. In this example, it is possible to specify the initial value to be set in the relief time reduction counter based on the effect control command instructing initialization transmitted in step S9.

In addition, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "800" and initialized. First, the configuration may be such that the rescue time reduction counter is not initialized when the RAM clear process is executed. For example, when the RAM clearing process is executed, the time saving flags A to C indicating the time saving state, the time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of the variable display during the time saving state, and the pending memory are initialized. On the other hand, the value of the relief time reduction counter may be restored. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the continuation of the value of the previous day's relief time reduction counter, so the investment amount until the relief time is shortened can be reduced, and the configuration is such that it is not disadvantageous to the player. be able to. Further, it is possible to prevent the rescue time reduction number counter from being initialized intentionally, and it is possible to increase the degree of rescue for the player.

In addition, in the case of the above configuration, the configuration is such that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when the ON of the clear switch is detected (Y in step S3) and the RAM clearing process is executed. When an abnormality is detected (N in steps S4 and S5) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the rescue time saving counter may be initialized.

(Special design normal processing)
FIGS. 12-12 and 12-13 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step 100IWS51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is checked. If the total number of pending memories is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second number of pending memories is 0 (step 100IWS52). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the second pending storage counter for counting the second pending storage number is 0 or not. If the second pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 uses the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set in (step 100IWS53). If the second pending memory number is 0 (that is, if only the first pending memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 100IWS54).

In this feature section 108IW, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in priority to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, the aspect shown in this example is not limited, and for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in the order in which the game ball wins in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 102, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 100IWS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = 1 in the first pending memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = 1 in the second pending memory number buffer. and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 100IWS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending memory number counter, and stores each storage area in the first pending memory number buffer. Shift the contents of . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending memory number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 saves the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total number of pending memories by one. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1 (step 100 IWS57). Note that the CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 100IWS61), and executes the jackpot determination module (step 100IWS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for winning determination extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value (see Figures 12-2 and 12-3) with a random number for hit determination, and executes processing to determine that it is a jackpot if they match. It is a program. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, if the probability variable flag indicating that the probability variable state is not set (if it is a low probability state), the CPU 103 determines the low probability jackpot determination value (Figure 12-2 (A) and Figure 12-3 (See (A)) to determine the jackpot. Furthermore, if the probability change flag is set (if the probability is high), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot judgment value for high probability (see Fig. 12-2 (B) and Fig. 12-3 (B)). Make a jackpot determination. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any of the jackpot determination values shown in FIGS. 12-2 and 12-3, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

If it is determined to be a jackpot (Y in step 100IWS63), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (step 100IWS64). Then, the CPU 103 determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variable jackpot, sudden probability variable jackpot) corresponding to the value that matches the value of the type determination random number stored in the random number buffer area (step 100 IWS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for type determination extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if it is not determined to be a jackpot (N in step 100 IWS63), the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of the variable display during the time saving state is 0 or not. (Step 100IWS66). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving number counter (step 100IWS67), and checks whether the value of the time saving number of times counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS68). ). If the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended at the end of the fluctuation (step 100 IWS69).

Note that this example shows a case where steps 100IWS66 to S69 are executed to subtract the time reduction counter before the process of counting the number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction after step 100IWS70, but such a processing mode is not applicable. Not limited to. For example, the process of subtracting the time saving number counter may be performed after the process of counting the number of fluctuations up to the time saving time reduction after step 100IWS70 is executed. In this case, for example, in the case of a variable display that results in a relief time reduction, if the subtraction process is executed after setting the time saving number counter to "800" (see step 100 IWS172), the value of the time saving number counter will increase by 1. Since the value is subtracted, in a variable display that shortens the relief time, the value of the time saving number counter may be incremented by 1 again after the subtraction process. Alternatively, the time reduction counter may be set to "901", which is one more, in advance.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100 IWS70). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the process moves to step 100IWS79. If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the relief time reduction number counter (step 100IWS71). In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS71, the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated regardless of whether the gaming state is a normal state, a time reduction state, or a variable probability state. . In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 100IWS71, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol is executed or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. , the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time saving number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 100IWS72). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 126 or less (N at step 100 IWS72), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction number counter in the EXT data and issues the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. Control is performed to transmit to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS73). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9501 (H) as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 126, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 957E(H) as a relief time reduction number 1 designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100 IWS74). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process moves to step 100IWS79. If the value of the relief time reduction count counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating that the time reduction state is to be controlled at the end of the variation based on the occurrence of relief time reduction (step 100 IWS75). . Then, the process moves to step 100IWS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (Y in step 100IWS72), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7F (H) as EXT data and commands 957F as the relief time reduction number 1 designation command. (H) is controlled to be transmitted to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS76). Next, the CPU 103 determines the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened in units of 100 (in this example, 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800). It is checked whether it is (step 100IWS77). Note that whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the relief time reduction number counter. If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is the number of times in units of 100, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction number counter in the EXT data, and performs production control of the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. control to transmit the information to the CPU 120 (step 100IWS78). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 100, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit command 9601 (H) as a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 800, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9608 (H) as a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS79.

In addition, in this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) side counts the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time reduction, and sends the relief time reduction number 1 designation command or the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. is shown, but is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the CPU 120 for effect control may be configured to count the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened and execute a stirring effect, a countdown effect, or an effect effect, which will be described later.

For example, as described later, the rescue time reduction count counter is set (set to "800") at the timing when the rescue time reduction occurs, and in a configuration where relief time reduction can occur continuously, the rescue time reduction is The configuration is configured so that the command to specify the number of rescue time reductions 1 or the command to specify the number of rescue time reductions 2 is sent only when the time reduction occurs, and the command to specify the number of rescue time reductions 1 or the number 2 of rescue time reductions is sent when the rescue time is shortened from the second time onwards. It may be configured not to do so.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag C indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the relief time saving mode is set (step 100 IWS79). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is via the relief time saving mode), the process moves to step 100IWS84. In this example, when the process of step 100IWS79 is executed and the time saving state is in the state of time saving via relief time saving, the process of determining whether the time saving is missed after step 100IWS81 is not performed, and the time saving is determined to be the case without saving. It was decided that

It should be noted that the configuration may be such that the time saving state is not uniformly determined as a time saving failure not only during the time saving state via the rescue time saving, but also during the time saving state via the jackpot and the time saving state via the time saving loss. In other words, not only when the time saving flag C is set, but also when the time saving flag A and the time saving flag B are set, the process for determining whether the time saving is not achieved after step 100IWS81 is not performed, and the time saving is not performed as it is. You may decide to set it as an outlier.

Conversely, even in the time saving state via relief time saving, the process from step 100IWS81 onward may be executed to determine the time saving deviation. Further, it may be configured such that both a relief time reduction and a time reduction deviation may occur in the same variable display. In this case, for example, it may be configured to control to a time saving state with priority given to saving time, or it may be configured to control to a time saving state giving priority to a time saving error.

If the time saving flag C is not set (that is, if the time saving state is not via the relief time saving), the CPU 103 checks whether the probability change flag is set (step 100IWS80). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state is present), the process moves to step 100IWS84. In this example, when the process of step 100IWS80 is executed, if the state is in a variable probability state, it is determined that the time saving is not possible without performing the process of determining whether the time saving is not possible after step 100IWS81. Ru.

If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if it is not in a probability variation state), the CPU 103 performs a lottery process based on a random number for determining whether or not to save time, using a decision table for determining whether or not to reduce time. is carried out, and it is determined whether or not to shorten the time (step 100 IWS81). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "1st", the time-saving failure determination table for the first special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time-saving failure occurs with a probability of approximately 1/400. (See Figure 12-2). In addition, when the value of the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the time saving error determination table for the second special symbol is selected, and it is determined that the time saving error occurs with a probability of about 1/200 ( (See Figure 12-3).

If it is determined that the time reduction is not achieved (Y in step 100IWS82), the CPU 103 selects the type (time reduction A, time reduction B, time saving error C) is determined as the type of time saving error (step 100 IWS83). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the type determination random number extracted in the start-up winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first suspension storage buffer or the second suspension storage buffer in advance, and determines the time saving type. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS84.

In addition, in step 100IWS83, time saving type determination is performed using a type determination random number common to the type determination random number used in the jackpot type determination in step 100IWS65. Furthermore, when configured to determine both the small hit and the small hit type, a common random number for type determination is used in the small hit type determination in addition to the jackpot type determination and time saving type determination. The configuration may be such that the determination process is performed based on the determination process.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbols of the special symbols according to the determination results of the jackpot type and the time saving type (step 100IWS84). In this case, for example, if it is decided to make it a normal jackpot, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "3", and if it is decided to be a probability variable jackpot, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "7". If it is decided to suddenly make a probability variable jackpot, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "9", and if it is decided to be a time saving loss A, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "2". If it is determined that the time saving difference is B, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "4", and if it is decided that the time saving difference is C, the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "6". If it is decided to be a miss (no time saving), the stop symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "-". Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined special symbol stop symbols in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 100IWS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 100IWS86).

(Fluctuation pattern setting process)
FIG. 12-14 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the special symbol process process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1701A). When the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (that is, when the relief time is shortened and the fluctuation display is a jackpot), the CPU 103 uses the table shown in FIG. 12-8 (J) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. ) is selected (step 100IWS1701B). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 12-7(A) as the table for determining the variation pattern (step 100IWS1702). .

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if it is a loss), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 100IWS1702A). When the value of the relief time reduction count counter is 0 (that is, when the relief time reduction number of times counter is 0 (in other words, it is a fluctuation display that results in relief time reduction and is off), the CPU 103 uses FIG. 12-8 (I) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. ) is selected (step 100IWS1702B). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 10 or less (step 100IWS1703). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 10 or less (that is, if the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less), the CPU 103 determines that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 3 or less. Check whether it is. Note that the configuration is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and may be configured to, for example, check whether the value of the first pending storage number counter or the second pending storage number counter is 3 or less.

If the value of the total pending memory number counter is 3 or less (Y in step 100 IWS1704), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. The variation pattern table F is selected (step 100IWS1705). If the value of the total pending memory number counter is 4 or more (N in step 100IWS1704), the CPU 103 uses the table for determining the fluctuation pattern as shown in FIG. The variation pattern table G of is selected (step 100IWS1706).

If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 10 or less (N in step 100IWS1703), the CPU 103 checks whether the probability change flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if it is in a probability variation state), the CPU 103 creates a fluctuation pattern table for failure in the probability variation state shown in FIG. 12-8 (H) as a table for determining the variation pattern. H is selected (step 100IWS1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot as shown in FIG. 12-7(C) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. A variation pattern table C for the deviation of the controlled time saving state is selected (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table C based on the value of the total pending memory number counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the time-saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag B, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving change, is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation), the CPU 103 uses the time saving deviation shown in FIG. 12-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. A variation pattern table D for deviations from the time-saving state controlled via the IWS 1712 is selected (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the time-saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via the relief time-saving method, is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the relief time reduction), the CPU 103 uses the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 12-8(E) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table E for the deviation during the time saving state controlled via the IWS is selected (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is also not set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select table B (step 100IWS1715).

Next, the CPU 103 uses the variation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1701B, S1702, S1702B, S1705, S1706, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, and S1715 and the variation pattern table stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 12-7 and 12-8 is to be used (step 100IWS1716). In this example, the variation time of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is determined by determining the variation pattern. Note that after determining the fluctuation time, a fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

After determining the fluctuation pattern, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined fluctuation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer to measure the fluctuation time. (Step 100IWS1718), and starts variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (Step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS1720).

(Special pattern variation processing)
FIG. 12-15 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation process (step S112) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol variation process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first sends the result of the decision as to whether or not it will be a jackpot, the result of the decision as to the type of jackpot, and the time saving type, if it has not yet been sent. Based on the determination result, control is performed to transmit any of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 7 designation command) to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1121).

Next, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step 100IWS1122), and when the variable time timer times out (step 100IWS1123), the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it has been decided to skip the time reduction (step 100IWS1122). 100IWS1124). It should be noted that whether or not it is decided to skip the time saving can be determined, for example, by checking the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85.

If it is determined to skip the time saving, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1125). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed hitting notification start designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1126).

By executing the process of step 100IWS1125, in this example, when a time saving losing symbol is derived and displayed, the lighting of the right hit LED 100IW10 is started at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 100IWS1127). If neither the time-saving flag A nor the time-saving flag B is set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 selects a symbol for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "20 seconds" is set in the fixed period timer (step 100IWS1128). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol confirmation A specification command or a second symbol confirmation A specification command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1129). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS1139.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in a time saving state), the CPU 103 determines the symbol confirmation period for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "10 seconds" is set in the timer (step 100IWS1130). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol determination B designation command or a second symbol determination B designation command that can specify that the symbol determination period is 10 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1131). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to transmit the first symbol confirmation B designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation B designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS1139.

If it is not decided to cancel the time saving (N in step 100IWS1124), the CPU 103 checks whether the relief time saving determination flag is set (step 100IWS1132). If the relief time saving determination flag is set, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS1133). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed hitting notification start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1134).

In this example, when the relief time is shortened by executing the process of step 100IWS1133, lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 is started at the start of the symbol determination period.

Next, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to "20 seconds" to a symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol (step 100IWS1135). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol confirmation A specification command or a second symbol confirmation A specification command that can specify that the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1136). In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation A designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation A designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS1139.

If the relief time shortening determination flag is not set (N in step 100 IWS1132), the CPU 103 sets "0.5" to the symbol confirmation period timer for measuring the confirmation display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. A value corresponding to "second" is set (step 100IWS1137). In addition, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a first symbol confirmation C designation command or a second symbol determination C designation command that can specify that the symbol determination period is 0.5 seconds to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1138). . In this case, if the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "first", control is performed to send the first symbol confirmation C designation command, and the value of the special symbol pointer is a value indicating "second". In this case, control is performed to transmit a second symbol confirmation C designation command. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS1139.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop processing (step S113) (step 100IWS1139).

(Special pattern stop processing)
FIGS. 12-16 and 12-17 are flowcharts showing the special symbol stop process (step S113) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol determination period timer (step 100IWS131), and checks whether the value of the symbol determination period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS132). .

If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has not yet ended), the special symbol stop processing ends. do. If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has ended), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot flag. It is confirmed whether or not it is set (step 100IWS133). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 controls the probability change flag, time saving flag A, time saving flag B, time saving flag C, and for counting the number of executions of the fluctuation display during the probability change state. The time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of the variable display during the time saving state is reset (step 100 IWS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the relief time reduction counter to "800" (step 100IWS135). Therefore, in this example, when a jackpot is triggered, "800" is set in the rescue time reduction counter, and even if the fluctuation display is executed 800 times after the jackpot game ends, neither the next jackpot nor the time reduction error occurs. , the rescue time is shortened and the time is controlled to shorten the time.

In addition, this example shows a case where, when a jackpot is achieved by executing the process of step 100IWS135, the rescue time shortening counter is initialized by setting "800" at the start of the fanfare period of the jackpot. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the relief time reduction counter may be set to "800" during a round of a jackpot game, and the relief time reduction counter may be initialized to "800" at the start or end of the ending period of a jackpot game. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS136). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed hitting notification start designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100 IWS137).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for time before the opening of the big winning hole to measure the time before opening the big winning hole (fanfare time) until the special variable winning ball device 7 is controlled to be in the open state (step 100 IWS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release pre-processing (step S144) (step 100IWS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (N in step 100IWS133), the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving end flag is set (step 100IWS141). If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step 100IWS142). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag C is set (step 100IWS143). If the time saving flag C is set, the CPU 103 sets the relief time saving counter to "800" (step 100IWS144).

In this example, as will be described later, when the relief time is shortened, the time saving state is controlled to a time saving state of 800 time saving times (see steps 100IWS172 and S173). By executing the processing in steps 100IWS143 and S144, in this example, if the time saving state is controlled to be shortened by taking the relief time shortening as an opportunity, the fluctuation display is executed 800 times without hitting the jackpot or losing the time shortening. Taking this as an opportunity, "800" is set in the relief time reduction counter. Thereafter, if the next jackpot or time saving error does not occur even after performing the variable display 800 times, the second relief time saving occurs and the time saving state is controlled. In addition, in this example, a time reduction error does not occur in a time reduction state triggered by a relief time reduction, but it may occur, and when it occurs, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is reset (that is, "800" is set). ).

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the set time saving flags (any of the time saving flags A to C) and ends the time saving state (step 100IWS145). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS150.

If the time saving end flag is not set (N in step 100IWS141), the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the variable probability counter is 0 (step 100IWS146). If the value of the probability variation counter is 0, the process moves to step 100IWS153. If the value of the probability variable number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the probability variation number counter (step 100IWS147), and checks whether the value of the probability variation number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS148). ). If the value of the probability variable number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 10 resets the probability variation flag and the time saving flag A, and ends the probability variation state (step 100IWS149). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS150.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed LED 100IW10 (step 100IWS150). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-hand hit notification end designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS151). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a normal state designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS152). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS153.

In addition, this example shows a case in which the process of steps 100IWS141 to S152 is executed, thereby transitioning to the normal state at the end of the symbol confirmation period in the time shortening final fluctuation or the probability changing final fluctuation, and ending the right hit notification. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, in the time-saving final fluctuation or the probability-variable final fluctuation, it may be configured to shift to the normal state and end the right-hit notification at the start of the fluctuation or the start of the symbol confirmation period.

In addition, this example shows a case where the definite variable state ends and the time saving state also ends in the definite variable final fluctuation, but this is not the only case; it is also possible to end only the definite variable state and continue the time saving state. may be configured.

Next, the CPU 103 confirms whether or not it has been decided to skip the time reduction (step 100IWS153). It should be noted that whether or not it is decided to skip the time saving can be determined, for example, by checking the stop symbols of the special symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85.

If it is decided to skip the time saving, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (step 100 IWS154). If neither the time saving flag A nor the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in a normal state), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "100" if the time saving is missed (Y in step 100 IWS155). (Step 100IWS156). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving is not A, and if the time saving is B (Y in step 100IWS157), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "50" (step 100IWS158). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving is not B (that is, the time saving is C), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "30" (step 100IWS159). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B is set (that is, if it is in a time saving state), the CPU 103 resets the value of the time saving number counter to 0 ( Step 100IWS161). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving is not A, and if the time saving is B (Y in step 100IWS162), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "200" (step 100IWS163). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

If the time saving is not B (that is, the time saving is C), the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "100" (step 100IWS164). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS165.

Next, the CPU 103 resets the time saving flag A if it is set (step 100IWS165). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag B and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS166).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the relief time reduction counter to "800" (step 100IWS167). Therefore, in this example, the relief time reduction counter is set to ``800'' due to the time reduction failure, and even if the fluctuation display is executed 800 times after the time reduction failure, neither the next jackpot nor the time reduction failure occurs. , the rescue time is shortened and the time is controlled to shorten the time.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state B designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS168).

In this example, by executing the processing in steps 100IWS166 and S168, when a time-saving losing symbol is derived and displayed, the time-saving state is controlled at the end of the symbol confirmation period, and the time-saving state B designation command is executed. By transmitting the image, the background image is switched to a background image corresponding to the time saving state via time saving.

If it is not decided to skip the time saving (N in step 100IWS153), the CPU 103 checks whether the relief time saving determination flag is set (step 100IWS170). If the relief time reduction determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time reduction determination flag (step 100IWS171), sets the time reduction number counter to "800" (step 100IWS172), and sets the relief time reduction number counter to "800". is set (step 100IWS172A). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS173). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state C designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS174).

In addition, in this example, by controlling the time saving state at the timing when the relief time becomes short and also setting the relief time shortening counter (set to "800"), it is possible to cause the relief time shortening to occur continuously. Although the time saving state is configured so that once the time saving occurs, the time saving state continues until the jackpot occurs, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, at the timing when the rescue time is shortened, the rescue time shortening counter is not set, only the time saving state is controlled, and after that, the rescue time shortening counter is set at the timing when the 800-time fluctuation display ends and control is returned to the normal state. (see step 100IWS144).

In addition, in this example, when setting the relief time reduction number counter, "800" is set, and each time the variable display is executed, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is subtracted by 1, so that the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes "0". ”, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when setting the relief time reduction counter, set it to 0, and each time you execute the variable display, the value of the relief time reduction counter is incremented by 1, so that the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 800. It may be configured to shorten the relief time based on this.

In addition, in this example, when the relief time is shortened, the symbol confirmation period is set to 20 seconds, which is longer than usual, to secure a production period such as mode transition production, but during the symbol confirmation period, the image display device In step 5, the decorative pattern may not be displayed, but only the small pattern may be displayed, so that the small pattern is not hidden by the performance accessory or the like.

Furthermore, in this example, a case is shown in which the process of step 100IWS172 is executed to set the number of time reductions to 800, which is the same as the number of fluctuations until relief time reduction occurs, but this is not limited to such an aspect. do not have. For example, in step 100IWS172, a value larger than "800" may be set in the time saving number counter, or a value smaller than "800" may be set.

Further, in step 100IWS172, the time saving counter may be configured to be able to set values corresponding to a plurality of types of time saving times. For example, if the time saving is shortened the first time, the time saving counter is set to ``100'', and if the saving time is shortened the second time, the time saving counter is set to ``800''. Good too.

Alternatively, for example, a lottery process based on random numbers may be performed to determine the number of time reductions, and in step 100IWS172, a value corresponding to the number of time reductions determined by the lottery process may be set in the time reduction counter. good. In this case, for example, the number of time reductions may be determined to be 100 times with a probability of 10%, and 800 times with a probability of 90%. In addition, when the number of time savings is determined by lottery processing, the number of time savings may be determined by using the type determination random number used for determining the jackpot type and time saving type, or the number of time savings may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may.

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step 100IWS175).

(External output signal)
FIGS. 12-18 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of external output signals externally output from the pachinko gaming machine 1. As shown in FIGS. 12-18, in this example, a jackpot 1 signal, a jackpot 2 signal, a jackpot 3 signal, a jackpot 4 signal, and a fluctuation stop signal are output as external output signals. Among these, the jackpot 1 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game. Further, the jackpot 2 signal is a signal that is output externally during the jackpot game and during the time saving state. Moreover, the jackpot 3 signal is a signal that is externally output during the symbol determination period of the time saving loss. Further, the jackpot 4 signal is a signal that is externally output during the symbol determination period of the variable display, which shortens the relief time. Further, the fluctuation stop signal is a signal that is output externally at the start of the symbol confirmation period.

In this example, in addition to the case where the time saving state is entered at the end of the jackpot game, the time saving state may also be entered when the time saving winning symbol is derived and displayed, so if the time saving winning symbol is derived and displayed. At the end of the symbol determination period, external output of the jackpot 2 signal is started. Also, if the relief time is shortened, it may be shifted to the time shortening state, so if a symbol that is out of the fluctuation display that shortens the relief time is derived and displayed, the jackpot 2 signal will be activated at the end of the symbol confirmation period. External output starts.

Note that the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be output not only during the symbol confirmation period but also during the jackpot game. In addition, this example shows a case where separate external output signals (3 jackpot signals and 4 jackpot signals) are output in the case where the time saving is missed and the case where the rescue time is shortened, but the dual-purpose external output signal It may be configured to output .

Further, the jackpot 3 signal and the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be output at a timing after outputting the fluctuation stop signal during the pattern determination period.

For example, a fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol confirmation period for a losing symbol, and three jackpot signals may be output during the symbol confirmation period after outputting the fluctuation stop signal, or a variation display that shortens the relief time. A fluctuation stop signal may be output at the start of the symbol determination period, and four jackpot signals may be output during the symbol determination period after outputting the fluctuation stop signal. With such a configuration, when outputting the fluctuation stop signal and the jackpot 3 signal or jackpot 4 signal at the same time, it is possible to avoid signal failure from occurring externally.

Further, the jackpot 3 signal may be configured to be continuously output during the time saving state via the time saving loss. Further, the jackpot 4 signal may be configured to be continuously outputted even during the time saving state via the rescue time saving. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably determine the type of time saving even during the time saving state.

(Jackpot end processing)
FIG. 12-19 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end process (step S117) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot end display timer is set (step 100IWS531), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, the process moves to step 100IWS535. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the CPU 103 resets the jackpot flag (step 100IWS532) and performs control to transmit a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS533). Then, the CPU 103 sets the jackpot end display timer to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 100IWS534), and executes the process. finish.

In step 100IWS535, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the jackpot end display timer. Then, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 100IWS536). If the time has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step 100IWS536), the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag A and controls the time saving state (step 100 IWS537). Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the jackpot that ends this time is a normal jackpot (step 100IWS538). It should be noted that whether or not it is a normal jackpot can be determined, for example, by checking the special symbol stop symbols stored in the stop symbol storage area in step 100IWS85. If it is a normal jackpot, the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "100" (step 100IWS539). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state A designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS540).

If it is not a normal jackpot (that is, if it is a probability variable jackpot or a sudden probability variable jackpot), the CPU 103 sets a probability variation flag and controls to a probability variable state (step 100IWS541). Further, the CPU 103 sets the probability variation counter to "100" (step 100IWS542). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a probability change state designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS543).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S110) (step 100IWS544).

(state transition)
Next, the state transition in this feature section 108IW will be explained. FIG. 12-20 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transitions in the feature section 108IW. As shown in FIG. 12-20, in the normal state, if a variable probability jackpot or a sudden variable probability jackpot occurs, the control is controlled to a variable probability state (see steps 100 IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the time saving state A ( (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). In addition, in the normal state, even if it is a loss, if a time-saving loss symbol is derived and displayed, it is controlled to the time-saving state B (time-saving state via a time-saving loss) (see step 100 IWS166). Furthermore, even if the result is a loss, if the relief time is shortened (after RAM clearing processing, jackpot or time shortening failure, the number of fluctuations reaches 800 without the next jackpot or time shortening failure occurring) case), the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) is controlled (see step 100 IWS173).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-20, in the variable probability state, if a probability variable jackpot or a sudden probability variable jackpot occurs, the control is again controlled to the variable probability state (see steps 100 IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the time is shortened. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the probability variable state, there is no case where the time saving symbol is derived and displayed (see Y in step 100 IWS80), and there is no case where the saving time is shortened. In addition, in the variable probability state, if the variable display is completed 100 times without a jackpot occurring, the control is returned to the normal state (see steps 100IWS146 to S149).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-20, in the time saving state A, if a probability variable jackpot or a probability variable jackpot suddenly occurs, the control is controlled to a variable probability state (see steps 100 IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the control is performed again. The time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot) is controlled (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). In addition, even if the time saving state A is a loss, if a time saving loss symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving loss) is controlled (see step 100 IWS166). Further, in the time saving state A, if the variable display is completed 100 times without a jackpot occurring, the control is returned to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66 to S69 and S145). On the other hand, in the time-saving state A, there is no case where the relief time is shortened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-20, in the time saving state B, if a probability variable jackpot or a sudden probability variable jackpot occurs, the control is controlled to a variable probability state (see step 100 IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the time saving state B is controlled. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). In addition, even in the case of a loss in the time saving state B, if the time saving loss symbol is derived and displayed, the time saving state B (time saving state via the time saving loss) is controlled again (see step 100 IWS166). Further, in the time saving state A, if the variable display is completed 30 times, 50 times, 100 times, or 200 times without a jackpot occurring, the control is returned to the normal state (see steps 100IWS66 to S69 and S145). However, if the time saving is off A during the time saving state and the time saving state B is controlled, the time saving state B is continued until the next jackpot occurs (see step 100 IWS160, S161). On the other hand, in the time-saving state B, there is no case where the relief time is shortened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-20, in the time saving state C, if a probability variable jackpot or a sudden probability variable jackpot occurs, the control is controlled to a variable probability state (see steps 100 IWS541 to S542), and if a normal jackpot occurs, the time saving state C is controlled. It is controlled to state A (time saving state via jackpot) (see steps 100IWS537 to S539). On the other hand, in the time saving state C, there is no case where the time saving symbol is derived and displayed (see Y in step 100IWS79). In addition, in the time saving state C, when 800 fluctuation displays are completed without a jackpot occurring, the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) is controlled again (see steps 100IWS170 to S173).

In addition, although this example shows a case where the time saving state B is uniformly transferred when a time saving missed symbol is derived and displayed during the time saving state A, the control mode is not limited to such a control mode. For example, it is configured to compare the remaining number of current time saving times with the number of time saving times corresponding to the determined time saving type, and if the remaining number of current time saving times is greater, the current time saving state A is continued as is. You can.

In addition, although this example shows a case where when a normal jackpot occurs during time saving state B, the time saving state A is uniformly shifted to, but the control mode is not limited to such a control mode. For example, compare the remaining number of times of the current time saving number and the number of time saving times corresponding to the normal jackpot (in this example, 100 times), and if the remaining number of times of the current time saving number is greater, continue the current time saving state B. It may be configured to do so.

Further, in this example, a case is shown in which the time saving losing symbol is not derived and displayed during the time saving state C (see Y in step 100 IWS79), but this is not limited to such a mode, for example. , it may be configured such that even in the time saving state C, it can be determined that the time saving is over.

Further, in this example, when the variable probability state is controlled, the variable probability state is terminated based on the execution of the variable display 100 times, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it may be configured such that a lottery process is used to determine whether or not to end the variable probability state for each variable display, and the variable probability state may be terminated based on the decision to end the variable probability state.

(Main processing for production control)
Next, the operation of the production control means will be explained. FIG. 12-21 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the production control main processing in the feature section 108IW. In FIG. 12-21, the processes in steps S71 to S76 are similar to those shown in FIG.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes the small symbol process process (step 087IWS701). In this example, by executing the small symbol process process in step 087IWS701, in the image display device 5, in addition to the variable display of the decorative pattern, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, In the image display device 5, a variable display of small symbols in the form of a reduced left-center right ornamental symbol is performed.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes the fourth symbol process process (step 100IWS702). In this example, by executing the fourth symbol process process in step 100IWS702, in the image display device 5, in addition to the fluctuating display of the decorative design, synchronization with the fluctuating display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed. A variable display of the fourth symbol is executed. In addition, in this example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed on the fourth symbol display 100IW21a provided on the left side of the image display device 5. Moreover, when the variable display of the 2nd special symbol is executed, the variable display of the 4th symbol is executed on the 4th symbol display 100IW21b provided on the right side of the image display device 5.

The process in step S77 is the same as the process in step S77 shown in FIG.

When the variable display of the fourth symbol is executed, the two LEDs arranged above and below alternately turn on and off in the fourth symbol display device 100IW21a, 21b, thereby executing the variable display of the fourth symbol. be done.

Further, when the variation time ends, the fourth symbol, the stop symbol, is displayed as a fixed symbol at the start of the symbol confirmation period. In this case, when a jackpot occurs, two LEDs arranged above and below are stopped and displayed in red as a jackpot symbol. In addition, when the time saving is over, two LEDs arranged above and below are stopped and displayed in a blue light state as a time saving lapse symbol. In addition, in the case of a loss (no time saving), the two LEDs arranged above and below are stopped and displayed as a loss symbol (no time saving) in a state where they are turned off.

In addition, the mode of the stop symbol of the fourth symbol is not limited to the mode shown in this example, for example, the stop symbol of the fourth symbol may be derived and displayed in a manner that can distinguish the jackpot type and the time saving type. Good too.

In addition, in this example, a case is shown in which a special symbol is provided as the time saving loss symbol of the 4th symbol, but the stop symbol of the 4th symbol is not limited to such an embodiment. may be used as a common pattern.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, the operation of the production control means will be explained. FIGS. 12-22 and 12-23 are flowcharts showing specific examples of the command analysis process (step S75). The production control command received from the main board 11 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the production control CPU 120 checks the contents of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the performance control CPU 120 first checks whether the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step 100IWS611). Whether the command is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter and the read pointer. If both match, the received command is not stored. If the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the performance control CPU 120 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step 100IWS612). Note that after reading, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step 100IWS613). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read out at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variable pattern command (step 100IWS614), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received variable pattern command in the variable pattern command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS615). Then, a variable pattern command reception flag is set (step 100IWS616).

If the received production control command is a display result specification command (step 100IWS617), the production control CPU 120 stores the received display result specification command in the display result specification command storage area formed in the RAM 122 (step 100IWS618). ).

The received production control command is one of the symbol confirmation designation commands (first symbol confirmation A specification command, first symbol confirmation B specification command, first symbol confirmation C specification command, second symbol confirmation A specification command, second symbol confirmation B designation command, second symbol confirmation C designation command) (step 100IWS619), the performance control CPU 120 sets a confirmation command reception flag according to the received symbol confirmation designation command (step 100IWS620). For example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the first confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the first confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when the first symbol confirmed C designation command is received, the first confirmed C command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, a second confirmation A command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, a second confirmation B command reception flag is set. Further, for example, when a second symbol confirmed C designation command is received, a second confirmed C command reception flag is set.

If the received performance control command is a jackpot start designation command (step 100IWS621), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot start designation command reception flag (step 100IWS622). If the received performance control command is a jackpot end designation command (step 100IWS623), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot end designation command reception flag (step 100IWS624).

If the received production control command is a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command (step 100 IWS625), the production control CPU 120 stores the received rescue time reduction number 1 designation command in the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122. (Step 100IWS626).

If the received effect control command is a relief time reduction number 2 designation command (step 100 IWS627), the effect control CPU 120 stores the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command in the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command storage area formed in the RAM 122. (Step 100IWS628).

If the received effect control command is a command to specify the number of times to shorten the rescue time at the time of recovery (step 100 IWS629), the effect control CPU 120, based on the received command to specify the number of times to shorten the rescue time at the time of recovery, causes the image display device 5 to specify the number of times to shorten the rescue time at the time of recovery. Control is performed to display the initial roll according to the number of times (step 100 IWS 630). For example, if the received EXT data of the command to specify the number of times to shorten rescue time during recovery is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the time to save is reduced is 100 or less), the initial roll is "112". is displayed, indicating that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100 or less. For example, if the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction number designation command is "02 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 101 or more and 200 or less), the initial The result is displayed as "223", indicating that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 101 or more and 200 or less. For example, if the EXT data of the received recovery time reduction number designation command is "08 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 701 or more and 800 or less), the initial "889" is displayed as the result, indicating that the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 701 or more and 800 or less.

In addition to displaying the initial result indicating the number of fluctuations remaining when power is restored, for example, in the first fluctuation display after power restoration, a display indicating the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened may be displayed. , a combination of symbols indicating the remaining number of fluctuations may be displayed. In addition, for example, within 1 to 100 fluctuations after the power is restored, a display suggesting the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened, or a combination of symbols suggesting the number of remaining fluctuations, etc. The configuration may be such that the suggestion display is performed at a relatively early stage. Further, the configuration may be such that the number of remaining changes until the rescue time is shortened due to the initial roll is not suggested (for example, in the configuration of Example 2 described later, the number of remaining changes until the rescue time is shortened due to the initial roll is not indicated). (The remaining number of fluctuations may not be suggested).

If the received production control command is a normal state designation command (step 100IWS631), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue background image corresponding to the sea mode) in the image display device 5. (Step 100IWS632).

If the received performance control command is a time-saving state A designation command (step 100 IWS633), the performance control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, sunset) corresponding to the time-saving state A (time-saving state via jackpot) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to a yellow background image (according to the mode) (step 100IWS634).

If the received production control command is a time saving state B designation command (step 100 IWS635), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, Control is performed to switch to a green background image corresponding to the forest mode (step 100IWS636).

If the received production control command is a time saving state C designation command (step 100 IWS637), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image (for example, Control is performed to switch to an orange background image corresponding to the orange field mode (step 100IWS638).

In this example, by executing the processing of steps 100IWS633 to S638, even if the time saving state is the same, it is determined whether it is a time saving state via jackpot, a time saving state via time saving, or a time saving state via rescue time saving. Display different background images depending on the With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the difference in gaming status, and it is possible to increase interest.

In addition, not limited to the mode shown in this example, a common background image is displayed regardless of the time saving state via jackpot, time saving state via time saving loss, or time saving state via rescue time saving. may be configured. For example, a common background image is displayed in step 100IW634, step 100IWS636, and step 100IWS638, and a common background image is displayed in the time saving state via jackpot, the time saving state via time saving, and the time saving state via rescue time saving. It may be configured as follows.

If the received production control command is a probability variable state designation command (step 100 IWS639), the production control CPU 120 displays a background image corresponding to the probability variation state (for example, a red background image corresponding to the flame mode) in the image display device 5. Control is performed to switch to (step 100 IWS640).

If the received production control command is a right-handed notification start designation command (step 100IWS641), the production control CPU 120 performs control to start lighting the right-handed notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS642). In addition, in this example, the right hit notification start designation command is transmitted at the start of the symbol confirmation period when a time-saving missed symbol is derived and displayed or when a rescue time is shortened (see steps 100IWS1126 and S1134). , the lighting of the right hit notification LED 100IW20 is started at the start of the symbol confirmation period.

If the received production control command is a right-handed hitting notification end designation command (step 100IWS643), the production control CPU 120 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed hitting notification LED 100IW20 (step 100IWS644).

If the received production control command is another command, the production control CPU 120 executes processing such as storing the received production control command or setting a flag according to the received production control command (step 100 IWS645 ). For example, if a special winning slot winning designation command is received, a winning slot winning flag indicating that a winning slot has been won is set. Then, the process moves to step 100IWS611.

(Customer waiting demonstration performance control process)
FIG. 12-24 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting demonstration performance control process. As described above, in this example, at the end of the symbol confirmation period and at the end of the jackpot game, if no pending memory is stored (that is, when the total number of pending memories is 0), the performance control board is transferred from the main board 11. A customer waiting demonstration designation command is sent to No. 12.

When the customer waiting demo designation command is received, the performance control CPU 120 will perform a performance control CPU 120 if 10 seconds have elapsed without receiving any other commands such as the performance control command at the time of starting winnings after receiving the customer waiting demo designation command. (Y in step 105 IWS 250), a telop display execution lottery process is executed (step 105 IWS 251).

In this example, it is possible to display a telop indicating that the rescue time saving function is installed during a period when no variable display is performed. In step 105 IWS251, it is determined by lottery whether or not to display a telop.

FIG. 12-25 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a telop display execution lottery table and a telop mode determination lottery table. Of FIGS. 12-25, FIG. 12-25(A) is a subtitle display execution lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1", and FIG. 12-25(B) is This is a telop display execution lottery table used when the number is set to "6".

As shown in FIGS. 12-25(A) and 12-25(B), in this example, the ratio of displaying telops while waiting for a customer is configured to vary depending on the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened. With this configuration, it is possible to indicate the remaining number of times until relief time is shortened based on the presence or absence of a telop display while waiting for a customer.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-25 (A) and (B), in this example, the ratio of displaying subtitles while waiting for a customer is configured to vary depending on the set value. With this configuration, it is possible to indicate whether an advantageous setting value has been set based on the presence or absence of a telop display while waiting for a customer.

Although FIG. 12-25 shows an example of setting value 1 and setting value 6 to simplify the explanation, it is also possible to provide a table corresponding to each setting value, or to provide a table corresponding to each setting value. A table corresponding to the set values (for example, set values 1 to 3) may be provided.

When it is determined to execute the telop display (Y in step 105IWS252), the performance control CPU 120 executes a telop display mode determination lottery process (step 105IWS253). Then, telop display is started (step 105 IWS 254).

In this example, it is possible to display a telop using a red presentation mode and a blue presentation mode. In step 105 IWS253, the presentation mode of the telop display is determined by lottery.

Figure 12-25(C) is a subtitle mode determination lottery table used when the setting value is set to "1", and Figure 12-25(D) is a drawing table for determining the telop format used when the setting value is set to "6". This is a lottery table for determining the telop format used when

As shown in FIGS. 12-25(C) and (D), in this example, the presentation mode of the telop displayed while waiting for a customer is configured to differ depending on the number of times remaining until the rescue time is shortened. With this configuration, it is possible to indicate the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened by the display mode of the telop while waiting for a customer.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 12-25(C) and (D), in this example, the ratio of the performance mode of the telop display displayed while waiting for a customer is configured to vary depending on the set value. With this configuration, it is possible to suggest whether or not an advantageous setting value has been set depending on the presentation mode of the telop display while waiting for a customer.

Then, after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command, if 3 minutes have passed without receiving any other commands such as the performance control command at the time of starting winning (Y in step 105 IWS255), the performance control CPU 120 starts the demonstration. The movie is played back (step 105 IWS 256).

Note that the telop display and the reproduction of the demonstration movie while waiting for the customer end when the performance control command etc. at the time of starting winning is received.

FIG. 12-26 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the presentation mode of telop display. In the example shown in FIG. 12-26, the screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C), or in the order of (A), (D), and (E).

As shown in FIG. 12-26(A), if the pending memory is not stored when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, a customer waiting demonstration designation command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

After receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command on the production control board 12 side, 10 seconds have passed without receiving any other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning, and the telop while waiting for the customer is displayed. If it is determined to do so, a telop display indicating that the rescue time saving function is installed is displayed on the image display device 5.

At this time, if it has been decided to display the telop display according to the blue presentation mode, the telop display 108IW001 with blue edges is displayed (in the example of Figure 12-26(B), the edges are white). ). In addition, if it is decided to display a subtitle display according to the red presentation mode, the subtitle display 108IW002 with a red edge is displayed (in the example of Figure 12-26 (D), the subtitle display with a black edge is displayed). ).

Then, after receiving the customer waiting demonstration designation command on the performance control board 12 side, if 3 minutes elapse without receiving any other commands such as the production control command at the time of starting winning, a demonstration is displayed on the image display device 5. The movie is played. Note that, as shown in FIGS. 12-26(C) and (E), the telop display continues to be displayed even while the demonstration movie is being played.

(Pre-read notice setting process)
FIG. 12-27 is a flowchart showing the advance notice setting process (step S161) in the production control process shown in FIG.

In this example, in the starting winning determination process (step S101) in the special symbol process process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, a process of pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns is executed based on the extracted random numbers. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, pre-reading judgment, etc. It will be done. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

In the pre-read preview setting process (step S161), for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12-27, the production control CPU 120 sends production control commands at the time of starting winnings (for example, production control commands for specifying the occurrence of starting winnings, the number of pending memories, pre-reading judgments, etc.). ) is received (step 108 IWS701).

If the production control command at the time of starting winning is received, the production control CPU 120 determines that the number of pending memories including the pending memory that newly received the production control command at the time of starting winning is greater than the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened. It is determined whether the number is large (step 108 IWS702). That is, it is determined whether or not the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of the starting winning is to be executed after the relief time is shortened. If the number of pending memories is not greater than the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened, that is, if the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of a starting winning is executed after the rescue time is shortened. In this case, the advance notice setting process is ended.

In this example, by executing the process in step 108IWS702, a look-ahead preview effect is created that targets the variable display when the relief time becomes short among the variable displays corresponding to the suspended memory stored before the relief time becomes short. While it is possible to execute it, it restricts the execution of a look-ahead preview effect that targets a variable display subsequent to the variable display when the relief time is shortened. In other words, it is configured to restrict the execution of the pre-read preview performance across the relief time reduction period where the gaming state changes. With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complication of the control process, and it is also possible to avoid inconsistencies in the presentation contents.

If the number of pending memories is greater than the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened, that is, if the variable display corresponding to the newly stored pending memory due to the occurrence of a starting winning is executed before the relief time is shortened, The performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the pre-read preview performance, and the performance type and performance mode in the case of execution (step 108 IWS703).

FIG. 12-28 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a pre-read preview performance execution determination table, a pre-read preview performance type determination table, and a pre-read preview performance mode determination table. In step 108IWS703, each table shown in FIG. 12-28 is used to determine whether or not to execute a pre-read preview effect, and if so, the effect type and effect mode.

Specifically, when the gaming state is different from the time-saving state C, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read notice effect using the pre-read notice effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-28(A). However, when the gaming state is the time saving state C, it is determined whether or not to execute the pre-read notice performance using the pre-read notice performance execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-28(B).

As shown in Figures 12-28 (A) and (B), in this example, the pre-read preview performance can be executed in both cases where the display result is a jackpot and a jackpot. The configuration is such that the rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed is higher when the result is a failure than when the result is a failure. Therefore, by executing the look-ahead preview performance, it is suggested that the expectation level of a jackpot is high.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 12-28 (A) and (B), there is a case where the displayed result is lower in the time saving state C than in the gaming states other than the time saving state C. In addition, the system is configured so that the rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed is low. With such a configuration, in the case of time saving state C (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a jackpot does not occur even though the advance notice performance is executed.

In step 108 IWS703, when it is decided to execute the pre-read preview performance, if the gaming state is different from the time saving state C, the pre-read preview performance type determination table shown in FIG. 12-28(C) is used to execute If the game state is time-saving state C, the effect type of the pre-read preview effect to be executed is determined using the pre-read preview effect type determination table shown in FIG. 12-28(D). Decide on the type. Specifically, the performance type is determined to be either a chance performance or a pending change performance.

The chance eye effect is a variable display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect when the display result of the change display that is executed before the change display that is the target of the look-ahead notice effect becomes a chance eye (in this example, "778"). This is a performance that suggests that this will be a jackpot. In the chance effect, for example, an effect is performed to incite whether or not the display result will be a chance result ("778" in this example). Also, for example, when a chance eye effect is executed using a red effect mode, a red chance eye effect ("778" in this example) is stopped and displayed, and when a chance eye effect is executed using a blue effect mode. , a blue chance number (“778” in this example) is stopped and displayed.

The pending change performance suggests that the variable display that is the target of the advance preview performance will be a jackpot by displaying the pending display that corresponds to the variable display that is the target of the advance preview performance in a display mode that is different from the normal display mode. It is a performance that Also, for example, when a pending change performance is executed in a red production mode, a red pending display is displayed, and when a pending change production is executed in a blue production mode, a blue pending display is displayed. be done.

FIG. 12-29 is an explanatory diagram for explaining specific examples of each type of pre-read preview effect. Among Figures 12-29, Figures 12-29 (A1) to (E1) show specific examples of the chance effect, and Figures 12-29 (A2) to (B2) show specific examples of the hold change effect. This is an example.

When a chance effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, the first variable display starts as shown in Figure 12-29 (A1), and then as shown in Figures 12-29 (B1) and (C1). The left and right decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped state. Then, as shown in Figure 12-29 (D1), the central decorative pattern stops at either "7", which is the chance number "778", or "6", which is not the chance number "778". A performance that provokes this is carried out. After that, as shown in Figure 12-29 (E1), when the central decorative pattern "7" stops and the chance number "778" stops displaying, a fluctuating display that will become a jackpot will be displayed while it is being held in memory. This suggests the possibility that a corresponding retained memory exists. Note that after the inciting effect is executed, a symbol different from the chance number "778" (for example, "768", etc.) may be stopped and displayed.

When a hold change effect is executed as a look-ahead preview effect, as shown in FIGS. 12-29 (A2) and (B2), when a starting winning occurs, a new hold display is different from the normal mode. It is displayed in a display mode (for example, red), suggesting the possibility that a fluctuating display that results in a jackpot will be executed based on the pending memory corresponding to the pending display. In this example, the display mode of the pending display is taken over as the display mode of the active display. Note that the hold change effect is not limited to the mode shown in Figure 12-29, but can be performed at any timing after a new hold display is displayed in the normal mode and thereafter until the display of the corresponding hold display and active display ends. The display mode may be changed to a different display mode from the normal mode.

FIG. 12-30 is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period and the execution period of the pre-read preview performance in the time-saving state via jackpot and the time-saving state via rescue. Among FIGS. 12-30, FIG. 12-30(A) is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time-saving state via jackpot and the execution period of the advance notice performance, and FIG. 12-30(B) is , is a time chart for explaining the fluctuation period in the time saving state via relief and the execution period of the pre-read notice performance. In the examples shown in FIGS. 12-30(A) and (B), it is assumed that starting winnings occur at the same timing.

As shown in Figure 12-30 (A), when performing a chance effect as a look-ahead preview effect, in the variable display that is executed from the time when the starting winning occurs until the variable display for the look-ahead target starts. , an effect is performed to incite whether or not the chance pattern will stop, and then the chance pattern will be stopped and displayed. Since such an inciting effect is included, when executing the chance effect, it is necessary to ensure an execution period of a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) during at least one fluctuating display.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 12-30 (A), when executing a pending change effect as a pre-reading notice effect, the variable display of the pre-reading target is displayed at the timing when a starting prize occurs or from the time when a starting winning occurs. The display mode of the pending display (or active display) changes at any timing over a plurality of variable displays until the display ends. Then, the pending display and active display according to the changed display mode are continued until the variable display of the prefetch target is completed. In other words, when executing a pending change effect, it can be executed at any timing from the time when a starting prize occurs until the variable display of the pre-read target ends, and it continues until the variable display of the pre-read target ends. can do.

In this way, even in the look-ahead preview performance, the execution period is different between the chance performance and the pending change performance. That is, while the chance effect is executed during a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) during one variable display, the pending change effect is executed over a plurality of variable displays.

In addition, as mentioned above, in the time saving state via jackpot, the extremely shortening variation (1.5 seconds) is not executed at the time of loss, and the shortening variation (5 seconds) is mainly executed, but in the time saving state via relief In this case, an extremely short variation (1.5 seconds) is mainly performed when the time is off. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12-30, in the time saving state via relief, it is difficult to secure a period for executing the chance effect.

Therefore, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 12-28 (C) and (D), in the time-saving state via jackpot, it is possible to execute both the chance effect and the pending change effect as the look-ahead preview effect. On the other hand, in the time-saving state via relief, the execution of the chance effect is restricted as a look-ahead preview effect, and only the pending change effect can be executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to suitably execute a pre-read preview performance depending on the gaming state.

Further, in step 108IWS703, when it is decided to execute the pre-read notice performance, if the gaming state is different from the time saving state C, the pre-read notice performance mode determination table shown in FIG. 12-28(E) is used to , determines the presentation mode of the pre-reading notice effect to be executed, and when the gaming state is time saving state C, the pre-reading notice effect to be executed is determined using the pre-reading notice effect type determination table shown in FIG. 12-28(D). Determine the type of performance. Specifically, either the red presentation mode or the blue presentation mode is determined.

As shown in FIGS. 12-28(E) and (F), in this example, it is possible to perform a pre-read preview performance using the red performance mode and the blue performance mode, and the case of a jackpot is better than the case of a miss. The configuration is such that the rate at which the pre-read preview effect is executed is higher due to the red effect mode than in the case of . Therefore, by executing the pre-read preview performance in the red performance mode, it is suggested that the expectation level of a jackpot is high.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 12-28(E) and (F), when in the time saving state C, the pre-read preview effect is executed only in the red effect mode. With this configuration, in the case of time-saving state C (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time), the decrease in interest when the pre-read preview performance is executed is suppressed by the blue production mode with low jackpot expectation. be able to. In this example, when in the time saving state C, the pre-read preview effect is executed only in the red presentation mode, but when the time is off, the pre-read preview effect is not executed at a rate of 99%. Therefore, the configuration is such that cases in which the display result is incorrect even though the pre-read preview effect is executed in the red effect mode do not occur frequently.

In this example, by setting the determination ratio as shown in Figure 12-28, the pre-read notice can be used in the case of time-saving state C (that is, when no jackpot has occurred for a long period of time) and in the case of not time-saving state C. The performance execution ratio, the type of performance, and the ratio of performance modes can be varied, and the interest can be improved.

In addition, in this example, as will be described later, when the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, execution of the preview performance is restricted (even if only the preview performance with high expectations is not executed). However, the execution of the pre-read preview effect may also be restricted (for example, the execution rate may be lowered (or not executed). In this case, the execution of the pre-read preview effect in the event of a failure may be restricted. It may be configured such that the ratio is lowered (or not executed), or the execution ratio of pre-fetch preview performances of types with high expectations may be lowered (or not executed).

Furthermore, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 12-28, for example, even in the time-saving state C, if a fluctuating display that results in a jackpot or a time-saving loss is executed, the execution of the look-ahead preview effect is not restricted. Good too.

When the processing in step 108IWS704 is completed, the performance control CPU 120 performs execution settings for the pre-read preview performance based on the determined content (step 108IWS704). For example, when it is determined to execute the chance effect, a chance effect flag is set in step 108IWS704 as execution setting of the chance effect. Then, in steps 108IWS809 to S810 of the variable display start setting process to be described later, when the chance eye flag is set, the chance eye effect is executed by selecting a process table including the chance eye effect. Note that the chance flag is reset when the variable display immediately before the variable display to be read ahead is executed.

Further, for example, when it is determined to execute the hold change effect, in step 108IWS704, the hold change effect is executed by changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the command at the time of starting winning.

(Variable display start setting process)
FIG. 12-31 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop) of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read out in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command). symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802). That is, by executing the process of step 100IWS802 by the performance control CPU 120, the display result of the variable display of the identification information (stopping of the decorative pattern) is determined according to the variable display pattern (variable pattern) determined by the variable display pattern determining means. A display result determining means for determining a symbol) is realized. In addition, when a pseudo series is specified by the variation pattern command, the performance control CPU 120 selects a chance pattern (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo series in step 100IWS802. , combinations of jackpot symbols that do not reach reach and symbols that are off by one symbol) are also determined. Note that the performance control CPU 120 stores data indicating the stop symbols of the determined decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. In addition, in step 100IWS802, the production control CPU 120 may determine whether or not it is a jackpot based on the received variation pattern command, and may determine the stop symbol of the decorative symbol based only on the variation pattern command. .

In step 100IWS802, if the received display result designation command indicates a "normal jackpot", the performance control CPU 120 selects a decorative pattern in which three symbols are the same even-numbered symbol as a stop symbol. Determine the combination (usually the jackpot symbol). In addition, when the received display result designation command indicates a "probable variable jackpot", the production control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols in which three symbols are the same odd-numbered symbols (probable variable jackpot symbol) as the stop symbol. do. Further, when the received display result designation command indicates a "sudden probability variable jackpot", the production control CPU 120 determines a combination of decorative symbols "135" (sudden probability variable jackpot symbol) as the stop symbol.

Then, in the case of "missing", a combination of decorative symbols other than the above is determined. However, if a reach effect is involved, a combination of decorative symbols in which the two left and right symbols are aligned is determined. Moreover, even if it is a loss, if it is a "time-saving loss", a combination of decorative symbols of the loss symbol including a special symbol (for example, a star symbol) is determined. In addition, it may be configured to determine a combination of decorative symbols of missed symbols including special symbols (for example, a heart-shaped symbol or a diamond-shaped symbol) that differ depending on the time saving type. In addition, when the execution setting of the chance eye effect is performed, the combination of decorative symbols of the chance eye pattern (in this example, "778") is determined.

For example, the production control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of decorative symbols and numerical values are associated with each other, and determines the stop symbol of the decorative symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbols are determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Regarding the decorative patterns, a stop pattern that reminds you of a jackpot (a combination of patterns whose left, middle, and right sides are all the same pattern) is called a jackpot pattern. Also, among the jackpot symbols, a stop symbol (a combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right sides are all the same odd-numbered symbols) that is reminiscent of a probability-variable jackpot is called a probability-variable jackpot symbol. Also, among the jackpot symbols, a stop symbol (a combination of symbols whose left, middle, and right sides are all the same even-numbered symbols) that is reminiscent of a regular jackpot (non-probable variable jackpot) is called a non-probable variable jackpot symbol. Also, a stop symbol that reminds you of a miss is called a miss symbol.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 performs execution settings for a preview performance to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As a preview effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation, and when the count reaches "0", an effect image indicating the degree of jackpot expectation is displayed, and in step 108IWS802A, the timer effect You may also configure the execution settings.

FIG. 12-32 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the preview performance execution determination table and the preview performance mode determination table. In step 108 IWS802A, if the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened exceeds 10, it is determined whether or not to execute the advance notice performance using the advance notice performance execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-32 (A), and the relief time is shortened. If the remaining number of times is 10 or less, it is determined whether or not to execute the preview performance using the preview performance execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-32(B). In addition, when it is decided to execute a preview performance, if the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened exceeds 10, the performance mode of the preview performance is determined using the preview performance mode determination table shown in Figure 12-32 (C). However, if the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less, the mode of the preview performance is determined using the preview performance mode determination table shown in FIG. 12-32(D).

As shown in Figures 12-32 (A) and (B), in this example, the preview effect can be executed both when the display result is a jackpot and when it is a loss. It is configured such that the proportion of execution of the preview performance is higher when the result is a success than when the result is a failure. Therefore, by executing the preview performance, it is suggested that there is a high degree of expectation of a jackpot.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 12-32 (A) and (B), the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). In this case, the proportion of execution of the preview effect is lower when the display result is wrong than in the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened exceeds 10). It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the preview performance is performed during a predetermined period before the rescue time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less, and the countdown performance and effect performance described later are executed). It is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when the game is executed but does not result in a jackpot.

In addition, during a predetermined period before the rescue time is shortened (in this example, a period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less), a countdown performance and effect performance, which will be described later, are executed, but at this time, the timer is activated as a preview performance. By restricting the execution of the effect, it is possible to avoid displaying a plurality of numerical values indicating the counter, and it is possible to prevent them from interfering with each other.

As shown in FIGS. 12-32(C) and (D), in this example, there is a red presentation mode (for example, a red presentation image is displayed) and a blue presentation mode (for example, a blue presentation image is displayed). The system is configured such that the preview performance is executed in a red performance mode at a higher rate in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a loss. Therefore, by executing the preview presentation in the red presentation mode, it is suggested that the expectation level of a jackpot is high.

In such a configuration, as shown in FIGS. 12-32 (C) and (D), the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less) If the display result is lower than the period before the predetermined period (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is more than 10), a preview effect is executed using the red effect mode. It is structured so that the percentage of With this configuration, the interest when the preview performance is executed in the red performance mode during the predetermined period before the rescue time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 10 or less) but does not result in a jackpot. can suppress the decline in

In addition, if the configuration is such that multiple types of preview performances with different jackpot expectations can be executed, the preview performances of types with high jackpot expectations (for example, if the jackpot expectations are classified into 5 levels, The execution is limited only for the type of preview performance where the jackpot expectation level is 4th level or higher) during the predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (in this example, the period in which the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less). Good too.

In addition, not limited to the example shown in FIG. 12-32, for example, even if the remaining number of times until relief time reduction is 10 or less, if a fluctuating display that results in a jackpot or time reduction is executed, a preview effect may be executed. You may choose not to limit it.

In addition, as described above, in this example, in the case of time saving state C, the execution of the pre-read preview effect is restricted, but the execution of the preview effect is also restricted (for example, the execution rate is reduced). In this case, it may be configured to reduce the execution rate (or not execute) of the preview performance in case of a failure, or to reduce the execution rate of the preview performance for types with high expectations. The execution rate may be lowered (or not executed).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800. (Step 100IWS803). In addition, whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800 can be determined by the number of relief time shortening 2, for example. This can be determined by checking whether or not a designated command has been received.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, or 800, the production control CPU 120 will change the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. A process table including an inciting effect corresponding to the remaining number of fluctuations is selected (step 100 IWS804). For example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command is "01 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 100), the remaining number of fluctuations is "100". Select the process table that includes the appropriate inciting effect. For example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 2 designation command is "08 (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 800), the remaining number of fluctuations is "800". ” Select a process table that includes an inciting effect according to ``. Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is none of 100, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, and 800, the production control CPU 120 determines that the relief time is shortened. It is checked whether the remaining number of fluctuations is 0 (step 108 IWS805). In addition, whether or not the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 0 can be determined by, for example, checking whether the value of the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is 0. Can be judged.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is 0, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the display result is a jackpot (step 108IWS806A). If the display result is not a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a time-saving entry performance that informs that the time-saving state is controlled by the rescue time-saving (step 100IWS806B). With this configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player by the time-shortening effect that the game will be controlled to be in a time-shortening state as a rescue time-saving, and it is possible to improve the interest when the rescue time is shortened.

On the other hand, if the display result is a jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table that includes a time-saving pretense effect that notifies that a jackpot will be achieved after executing the same type of performance as the time-saving effect ( Step 100IWS806C). Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812. With such a configuration, after the player recognizes that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened is 0, the player is notified that the jackpot has been won, so it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise. It can improve your interest.

In addition, in this example, if the displayed result becomes a jackpot when the number of fluctuations in relief time saving is reached, a time saving rush effect is executed using a dedicated relief time saving fluctuation jackpot variation pattern. For example, even if a full rotation effect (that is, a jackpot is confirmed) is executed, which is not executed except when the number of variations of relief time reduction is reached, in which the three decorative symbols are aligned and vary. good. By configuring the game in this way, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and specialness, and it is possible to increase interest.

Also, for example, if the display result is a jackpot when the number of fluctuations in the relief time reduction is reached, the same fluctuation pattern for the jackpot as usual may be used, or a reach effect with a short fluctuation time may be specified. It may be configured to use a variation pattern.

In addition, in this example, if the display result is a failure when the number of fluctuations in relief time saving is reached, a dedicated fluctuation pattern for relief time saving fluctuation is used; It may be possible to use a variation pattern for losing the same as usual, or it may be configured to use a variation pattern that specifies a reach effect with a short variation time. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the fluctuation pattern common between when and before reaching the number of fluctuations for saving time reduction, and it is possible to reduce the data capacity. In this case, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the time saving state C is entered, and the image display device 5 displays a background image (in this example, orange) corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving). (background image of the display color) (see step 078 IWS638), it is possible to notify that the time saving state will be controlled by reducing the rescue time by this change in the background image.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not 0, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less ( Step 108IWS807). In addition, to check whether the remaining number of fluctuations until relief time reduction is 10 or less, for example, check whether the value of the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is 10 or less. It can be determined by

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table including a countdown performance and effect performance according to the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened. (Step 108IWS808). For example, if the received EXT data of the command specifying the number of rescue time reductions 1 is "0A (H)" (when the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is 10), the count number until the rescue time is shortened is "0A (H)". Select a process table including countdown effects and effect effects corresponding to ``10''. Also, for example, if the received EXT data of the command specifying the number of rescue time reductions 1 is "01 (H)" (the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time reduction is 1), the count until the relief time reduction is reached. A process table including a countdown performance and effect performance corresponding to the number "1" is selected. Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812.

In this example, when the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief fluctuation is reached is 10 or less, the countdown performance and the effect performance are executed. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect a relief change, and it is possible to increase interest. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the relief fluctuation occurs.

In addition, in this example, the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is determined based on the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 1 designation command and the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and an inciting effect or a countdown effect is executed. Although shown, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when a background specification command that specifies a background image is configured to be sent, a value corresponding to the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the background specification command and then sent. You can. Then, the performance control CPU 120 side may be configured to determine the remaining number of fluctuations based on the EXT data of the received background designation command, and execute an inciting performance or a countdown performance.

In addition, in this example, when the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief fluctuation is 10 or less, the countdown performance and effect performance are always executed, but whether or not they are executed by lottery is determined. It may also be possible to decide whether In addition, for example, when the number of fluctuations remaining before becoming a relief fluctuation is not 10 or less, so-called fake countdown performances and effect performances (for example, although they are executed in the same manner as countdown performances and effect performances, , the countdown performance and effect performance corresponding to the count number "0" are not continuously executed, but are interrupted in the middle. (See Figure 12-42) are determined by lottery to be executed or not. Good too. In this case, when the number of fluctuations remaining until the rescue fluctuation is 10 or less is better than when it is not 10 or less. ) may be executed at a higher rate. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect a relief change, and it is possible to increase interest. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the relief fluctuation occurs.

If the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is not less than 10 (N in step 108IWS807), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the execution setting of the chance production has been made (step 108IWS809). , when the execution setting of the chance effect has been made, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table that includes the chance effect (including the effect that stimulates whether or not it will become a chance effect) (step 108 IWS810). . In addition, if the execution setting of the chance eye effect is not set, a performance in which the chance eye pattern does not stop display after executing the effect to incite whether or not it will be a chance eye effect (so-called false chance eye effect) is executed by lottery. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to do so.

If the chance production is not set to be executed, the production control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

The process table is a table in which process data referred to by the production control CPU 120 when controlling the production device is set. That is, the performance control CPU 120 controls performance devices (performance components) such as the image display device 5 according to process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data indicating each variation mode that constitutes the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the decorative pattern. Specifically, data related to changing the display screen of the image display device 5 is described. Further, the process timer setting value has a variation time set in the manner of variation. The performance control CPU 120 refers to the process table and performs control to display the decorative pattern in the variation mode set in the display control execution data for the time set in the process timer setting value. Further, the process table is stored in the ROM in the effect control board 12. Further, process tables are prepared according to each variation pattern.

In addition, the process table used when executing performance control for a fluctuation pattern that involves a reach performance has a function that stops displaying the left symbol when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, and stops displaying the right symbol when a further predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stopping symbols and the temporary stopping symbols in pseudo-runs and sliding effects. You can.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance parts) is executed (step 108IWS813). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW, the performance control CPU 120 controls so that the decorative pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern command. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to .

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108 IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Variable display processing)
12-33 and FIG. 12-34 are flowcharts showing the variable display effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process shown in FIG. In the variable display performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step 100IWS841), and also subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step 100IWS842). When the process timer times out (step 100 IWS843), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step 100IWS844). Furthermore, the control state for the presentation device is changed based on the next set display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data (step 100IWS845).

Next, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol determination A designation command is received (step 100IWS846). Specifically, in the command analysis process, it is checked whether the first confirmed A command reception flag or the second confirmed A command reception flag is set. If the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 controls the mode transition production (production that notifies the transition to the time-saving state (time-saving mode)) and the right-handed hit. A process table corresponding to the notification is selected (step 100IWS847). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS848). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance parts) is executed (step 100IWS849). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 20 seconds to a fixed production period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the production control means side (step 100IWS850). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS862.

In addition, in this example, when the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received, there are cases where the time shortening occurs during the normal state and cases where the rescue time shortens. However, in step 100IWS847, if the time saving is missed during the normal state, a mode transition effect for the time saving is missed and a process table corresponding to the right hit notification is selected, and if the saving time becomes short, the process table for the relief time saving is selected. Select a process table according to the mode transition effect and right-handed notification. In addition, whether or not the first symbol confirmation A designation command or the second symbol confirmation A designation command is received due to the relief time reduction is determined, for example, if the EXT data of the received relief time reduction number 1 designation command is "00 ( This can be determined by checking whether or not H).

If neither the first symbol confirmation A specification command nor the second symbol confirmation A specification command has been received, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the first symbol confirmation B specification command or the second symbol confirmation B specification command has been received. (Step 100IWS851). Specifically, in the command analysis process, it is checked whether the first confirmed B command reception flag or the second confirmed B command reception flag is set. If the first symbol confirmation B designation command or the second symbol confirmation B designation command is received, the production control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the continuous production (production that notifies that the time saving state continues). (Step 100IWS852). Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS853). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance components) is executed (step 100IWS854). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to a fixed production period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the production control means side (step 100IWS855). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS862.

If neither the first symbol confirmation B designation command nor the second symbol confirmation B designation command has been received, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received. (Step 100IWS856). Specifically, in the command analysis process, it is checked whether the first confirmed C-command reception flag or the second confirmed C-command reception flag is set. If the first symbol confirmed C designation command or the second symbol determined C designation command is received, the process moves to step 100IWS858.

If neither the first symbol confirmation C designation command nor the second symbol confirmation C designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the variable time timer has timed out (step 100IWS857). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends.

When the first symbol confirmation C designation command or the second symbol confirmation C designation command is received (Y at step 100IWS856), or when the variable time timer has timed out (Y at step 100IWS857), the production control CPU 120 normally A process table corresponding to the symbol confirmation display is selected (step 100IWS858). Next, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 100IWS859). In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the performance devices (the image display device 5 as production components, the image display device 5 as production components, Control of various lamps and speakers 8L and 8R (as performance components) is executed (step 100IWS860). In addition, the production control CPU 120 sets a value corresponding to 0.5 seconds to a fixed production period timer for measuring the symbol fixed period on the production control means side (step 100IWS861). Then, the process moves to step 100IWS862.

In addition, in this example, in addition to when the symbol confirmation designation command is received, also when the variable time timer times out (see step 100IWS857), the process moves to steps 100IWS858 and subsequent steps to enter the symbol confirmation period. However, normally, unless the symbol confirmation designation command is missed, there is no case where a determination of Y is made in step 100IWS857 and the process moves to steps 100IWS858 and subsequent steps.

Then, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 100IWS862).

(Special drawing waiting process)
FIG. 12-35 is a flowchart showing the special symbol hit waiting process (step S173) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the special figure waiting process, the production control CPU 120 first subtracts 1 from the value of the confirmed production period timer (step 100 IWS871), and checks whether the value of the confirmed production period timer after the subtraction has timed out ( Step 100IWS872). If the value of the determined performance period timer after the subtraction has not timed out, the value of the process timer is subtracted by 1 (step 100 IWS873), and the contents of process data n (display control execution data n, lamp control execution data n, sound number data Control of the production device (the image display device 5 as production components, various lamps as production components, and speakers 8L and 8R as production components) is executed according to (step 100IWS874).

Furthermore, when the process timer times out (step 100IWS875), the production control CPU 120 switches the process data (step 100IWS876). Further, the production control CPU 120 sets the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer, and starts the process timer (step 087IWS877).

Next, the production control CPU 120 confirms whether or not the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is being displayed for confirmation (step 100IWS878). If the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is being displayed in a fixed manner, the process is immediately terminated. If the stop symbols of the decorative symbols are not being displayed in a fixed manner, the production control CPU 120 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbols (losing symbols (no time saving), losing time reducing symbols, jackpot symbols) (step 100 IWS879 ).

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step 100IWS879 (Y in step 100IWS880), the performance control CPU 120 sets a jackpot stop flag indicating that the jackpot symbol has been confirmed and displayed (step 100IWS881). Then, the process ends.

If the value of the confirmed production period timer after the subtraction has timed out (that is, if the symbol confirmation period has passed), the production control CPU 120 checks whether the jackpot stop flag is set (step 100IWS882). If the jackpot stop flag is set, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether a jackpot start designation command has been received (step 100IWS883). It should be noted that whether or not the jackpot start designation command has been received can be determined by, for example, checking whether the jackpot start designation command reception flag (see step 100 IWS622) is set. If the jackpot start designation command has not been received, the process ends immediately.

If the jackpot start designation command has been received, the performance control CPU 120 resets the jackpot stop flag (step 100IWS884). Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the jackpot performance including a mode transition performance (a performance that notifies the transition to a variable probability state (probability variable mode) or a time saving state (time saving mode)) and a right hit notification. (Step 100IWS885). Then, the production control CPU 120 starts the process timer by setting the process timer setting value to the process timer (step 100IWS886), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number Control of the presentation device (the image display device 5 as the presentation component, various lamps as the presentation component, and the speaker 27 as the presentation component) is executed according to the data 1) (step 100 IWS887).

Then, the production control CPU 120 updates the value of the production control process flag to a value corresponding to the production process during the jackpot (step 100IWS888).

If the jackpot stop flag is not set (that is, if the losing symbol (no time saving) or the time reducing symbol is stopped and displayed), the production control CPU 120 changes the value of the production control process flag to the variable display start waiting process. (Step S170) is updated to a value corresponding to (Step 100IWS889).

(Production execution timing)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time will be explained. FIG. 12-36 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the rescue time. As shown in Figure 12-36, in the variation display immediately before the variation display that results in a relief time reduction (the value of the relief time reduction counter is 1), the variation display of the special symbol and decorative symbol ends, and the missing symbol (no time reduction) is displayed. When is stopped and displayed, a missed symbol (no time saving) is confirmed and displayed for a symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100 IWS1137). Next, in the variable display in which the value of the rescue time reduction number counter becomes 0 at the start of the variable display and the rescue time is shortened (see step 100 IWS74, S75), a time reduction entry effect is executed on the image display device 5 during the variable display of the special symbol. (See step 108IWS806B). Then, when the variable display of the special symbols is finished and the missed symbols (no time savings) are stopped and displayed, the missed symbols (no time savings) are confirmed and displayed for a 20 second symbol confirmation period (see step 100 IWS1135). Further, during the symbol determination period, as shown in FIG. 12-36, a mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5 (see step 100IWS847). Next, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed during the symbol confirmation period, as shown in FIG. 12-36, right hit notification is started on the image display device 5 (see step 100 IWS847). Next, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the time saving state C is entered, and as shown in FIG. 12-36, the image display device 5 displays a background image (in this example In this case, the display color is switched to (the background image with an orange display color) (see step 100IWS638). With this configuration, it is possible to secure a period for notifying that control of the time saving state (relief time saving) is started in the normal state, and it is possible to clarify the effect when switching the gaming state, and also to improve the interest. can be improved.

(Example of production)
Next, a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to time saving state C, which is a relief time saving, will be explained. FIGS. 12-37 to 12-40 are explanatory diagrams for explaining specific examples of presentation modes up to the transition to the time saving state. Note that in FIGS. 12-37 to 12-40, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

As shown in FIG. 12-37(A), the remaining number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is displayed every 100 rotations when the symbol stops. In this example, in the image display device 5, a decorative pattern 100IW100 is displayed at the center of the screen, and a small pattern 100IW101 is displayed at the upper right. For example, when there are 800 rotations remaining until the transition to relief time saving, it is assumed that the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 stop and a missed pattern (in this example, a combination of "134" symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, a remaining rotation number display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left corner, which says, "Relief time saving starts in 800 rotations!". Further, at this time, an explanation regarding saving time saving (for example, an explanation of a saving time saving function and an effect of saving saving time) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by means of a telop display 100IW103. With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine that is equipped with a shortened rescue time.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-37(B), for example, when there are 700 rotations remaining until the transition to relief time saving, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 stop and the pattern (in this example, "423") stops. It is assumed that a combination of symbols) is derived and displayed. At this time, similar to FIG. 12-37(A), a remaining rotation number display 100IW102 is displayed in the upper left corner saying, "Relief time saving starts in 700 rotations!". Further, at this time, an explanation regarding saving time saving (for example, an explanation of a saving time saving function and an effect of saving saving time) is displayed at the bottom of the screen by means of a telop display 100IW103.

In addition, in this example, as shown in Figures 12-37 (A) and (B), a case is shown in which an inciting effect indicating the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is executed every 100 fluctuations. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the incitement effect is not executed when the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened is 400 to 800 times, and the incitement effect is performed when the remaining number of times is 300 times or less (therefore, the remaining number of times is 300, 200, or 100 times). It may be configured to run.

In addition, instead of always executing the inciting effect when the remaining number of fluctuations is reached, for example, when a command to specify the number of rescue time reductions 2 is received, a lottery process is performed based on random numbers, and when it is decided to execute the inciting effect, The configuration may be such that the excitement effect is executed in the manner shown in FIGS. 12-37(A) and (B). Further, in this case, it is desirable to configure such that as the number of remaining fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened decreases, the execution rate of the inciting effect increases.

Then, as shown in Figures 12-37 (C) to 12-38 (E), after 10 revolutions remain until the transition to the rescue time reduction mode, a countdown display 100IW104A corresponding to the number of remaining revolutions is displayed in the center of the screen. Ru. For example, in the countdown display 100IW104A, a countdown from "10" to "1" is displayed each time the fluctuating display of symbols ends and the symbols stop. Each figure shows an example in which out-of-place symbols (in this example, a combination of symbols "653", "844", and "123") are derived and displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-37 (C) to 12-38 (E), after 10 revolutions remain until the transition to the rescue time reduction mode, effect displays 100IW104B are displayed in a range corresponding to the remaining revolutions. . In this example, the effect display 100IW104B is displayed so that the range in which it is displayed becomes wider (the number of effects displayed increases) as the remaining number of revolutions decreases (that is, as the time for relief approaches the time).

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-38 (E), there is one rotation left until the transition to relief time saving, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed in a variable manner, and the pattern stops and the missing pattern (in this example, It is assumed that a combination of symbols "123" is derived and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-38 (F), when there are 0 rotations remaining until the transition to the relief time reduction, the variable display of the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 (that is, the variable display that reduces the relief time) starts. , as shown in FIG. 12-38 (G), a time-saving entry effect is started to notify that the time-saving state (relief time reduction) is being controlled, and a time-saving entry effect display 100IW104C is displayed on the image display device 5. With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the game is controlled to be in a time saving state (relief time saving), and it is possible to improve interest when the time saving state (relief time saving) is entered.

Further, as shown in FIG. 12-38(G), when the time-saving rush effect is started, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-38(H), when the symbols are stopped, the decorative symbols 100IW100 are not displayed, and only the small symbols 100IW101 (in this example, a combination of "254" symbols) are derived and displayed.

In addition, in the time-saving production, it is also possible to make notifications that are generally carried out during the ending period of the first win, such as a warning notification for forgetting to take out a prepaid card or a warning notification to prevent getting hooked, or the logo of the gaming machine manufacturer. may be displayed. In this case, the notification in the time-saving rush performance may be made in the same manner as in the ending period of the first win, or may be made in a simplified manner. Further, these notifications may not be made during the time-saving rush effect, but may be made during the ending period of the first jackpot after transitioning to the time-saving state due to the relief time reduction.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-39(I), when the symbol determination period begins, a mode effect start display 100IW105 of "Very hot!" is displayed, and the mode transition effect is started. Note that from now on, even in the mode transition performance, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed, and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-39 (J), when the mode transition effect is started, an operation suggestion image 100IW 106 that suggests operating (pressing) the push button 31B (see FIG. 12-1) is displayed. Ru. For example, in the operation suggestion image 100IW106, the words "Press" are displayed together with an image urging the user to press the push button 31B.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-39(K), when the push button 31B is operated when the operation suggestion image 100IW106 is displayed, or when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the operation suggestion image 100IW106 was displayed, "V A character display 100IW107 "STOCK x 1" is displayed to notify that the relief time reduction will start. Further, a right-handed hitting instruction display 100IW108 for instructing right-handed hitting is displayed next to the small pattern 100IW101.

In addition, in this example, even in the case of a jackpot, it can be configured to execute an effect of displaying the characters "V STOCK x 1" similarly to FIG. 12-39(K). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) performs a pre-reading judgment process on whether or not there will be a jackpot and the type of variation pattern in the starting winning judgment process (step S101), and Sends a prefetch judgment result specification command that allows the result to be specified. Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance similar to that shown in FIG. 12-39 (K) (so-called suspended continuous performance) based on the received pre-reading determination result designation command. For example, if it is determined that there is one jackpot in the pending memory based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the pending consecutive performance is displayed by displaying the text "V STOCK x 1". Execute. Also, for example, if it is determined that there are two jackpots in the pending memory based on the received look-ahead judgment result designation command, the text display of "V STOCK x 2" will be displayed. Execute a continuous performance.

On the other hand, in the case of shortening the rescue time, there is a high probability that a fluctuation display with an extremely short fluctuation time of 1.5 seconds will be executed during the time shortening state via the shortening rescue time (see Figure 12-8 (E)). ), the fluctuating display is digested extremely quickly, and it is easy to hit the jackpot relatively quickly. Therefore, in the variable display where the relief time is shortened (in this example, the symbol confirmation period), the character display "V STOCK x 1" shown in Figure 12-39 (K) is displayed without particularly checking the look-ahead judgment result. The effect to be displayed is executed. Therefore, the effect that displays the characters "V STOCK x 1" shown in Figure 12-39 (K) is similar to the pseudo-hold continuous effect, and it also shortens the rescue time. The performance is intended to inform the public.

Although the case where the display of the right-hand hitting instruction display 100IW108 starts from the display timing of the character display 100IW107 that reads "V STOCK x 1" has been shown, the display start timing of the right-hand hitting instruction display 100IW108 is limited to that shown in this example. do not have. For example, the display of the right hit instruction display 100IW108 may be started from the timing of the final display of the stop symbol shown in FIG. 12-38(H), and various modes are possible.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-39(L), a mode selection screen 100IW109 for selecting a rescue time saving effect mode is displayed. For example, a screen for selecting one of modes A to D is displayed. The mode selection is performed by moving the cursor by operating the stick controller 31A, and is confirmed by operating the push button 31B. Note that if a predetermined period of time has elapsed without selecting a production mode, the production mode that the cursor matches is automatically determined. Further, even when the mode selection screen 100IW109 is displayed, the right-hand hitting instruction display 100IW108 remains displayed next to the small pattern 100IW101.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-40(M), when the selection of the performance mode is completed, a start notification screen 100IW110 is displayed to notify that the relief time reduction will start. For example, the words "relief short rush" are displayed. Then, when the next fluctuation is started, a transition is made to the time saving state C, and the relief time saving is started.

Next, the production mode of the time-saving rush production will be explained. FIG. 12-41 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode of the time-saving rush performance. The example shown in FIG. 12-41 is performed following the example shown in FIGS. 12-37(A) to (D).

As shown in Figure 12-41 (E), there is one rotation left until the transition to relief time saving, the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 are displayed in a variable manner, and the pattern stops and the missing pattern (in this example, "123 It is assumed that the symbol combination ``'' is derived and displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-41 (F'), there are 0 rotations remaining until the transition to the rescue time saving mode, and the variable display of the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 is started. It should be noted that although this variable display can shorten the rescue time, the display result is a jackpot. Therefore, after the display result is derived and displayed, the game does not shift to a time saving state due to relief time saving, but shifts to a jackpot game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-41 (G'), the time-saving rush performance is started, and the time-saving rush performance display 100IW104C having the same aspect as the time-saving rush performance is displayed on the image display device 5. In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-41 (G'), when the time-saving rush effect is started, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed and only the small pattern 100IW101 is displayed, just like when the time-saving rush effect is started. Is displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-41 (H), when the display of the time-saving effect display 100IW104C ends, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is not displayed when the pattern stops, and the small pattern 100IW101 (in this example, the symbol "254" combinations) are derived and displayed. The variable display of the decorative pattern 100IW100 and the small pattern 100IW101 is stopped, and the jackpot pattern (in this example, a combination of "777" symbols) is derived and displayed. After that, the game shifts to a jackpot game. With this configuration, after the player once recognizes that the relief time reduction has been achieved, he is informed that he has won the jackpot, so it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and increase his interest.

In addition, the configuration of this feature section 108IW can also be used to execute a bonus game in which the game ball is controlled to be a jackpot game based on a game ball winning a prize (V prize) in a specific area (V prize winning area) in a prize object during a small prize game. When applied to a gaming machine that is configured to enable this, when the display result of the variable display that shortens the rescue time is a small hit, a time saving effect is executed to notify that a small hit has occurred. Good too.

Next, the so-called fake countdown performance and effect performance will be explained. FIG. 12-42 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of a so-called fake countdown performance and effect performance.

As shown in Figures 12-42 (A) to (C), when there are 49 rotations remaining until the transition to the rescue time reduction mode, a so-called fake countdown effect is executed, so that the number of remaining rotations is reduced to 10 rotations. A countdown display 100IW104A depending on the situation is displayed at the center of the screen. Then, each time the variable display of the symbols ends and the symbols stop, a countdown from "10" is displayed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 12-42 (A) to (C), when there are 49 rotations remaining until the transition to the rescue time reduction mode, a so-called fake effect is executed, so that the remaining rotations are reduced to 10 rotations. Effect display 100IW104B is displayed in a range depending on the number of times. Then, each time the variable display of the symbols ends and the symbols stop, the effect display 100IW 104B is displayed so that the range in which it is displayed becomes wider (the number of effects displayed increases).

As shown in FIG. 12-42(E), the countdown display 100IW104A and the effect display 100IW104B are is terminated. At this time, since the number of rotations remaining until the transition to rescue time saving is not 0, the time saving entry effect is not executed.

When configuring so-called fake countdown effects and effect effects as shown in Figure 12-42 to be executable, the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened as shown in Figures 12-37 (A) and (B). You may choose not to perform any inciting effects that suggest this. With such a configuration, when the countdown display 100IW104A or the effect display 100IW104B is displayed, it is possible to make it difficult to easily distinguish whether it is genuine or fake.

In this example, when the symbol is stopped, the number of rotations remaining until the relief time is shortened, the performance in the relief time shortening is explained, and a countdown is displayed, but it may be displayed when the symbol starts to fluctuate or while the symbol is fluctuating.

In addition, this example shows a case where a pattern confirmation period is secured for 20 seconds in a variable display that shortens the relief time and the mode transition effect and right hit notification are executed, but the pattern confirmation period is the usual 0.5 seconds. It may be configured to directly shift to the time saving state via the relief time saving mode without performing any mode transition effect or the like.

In addition, this example shows a case where the rescue time reduction counter is initially set to "800" when executing the RAM clearing process, when a jackpot is hit, or when the time reduction is missed. If the configuration is configured to execute a story (such as a story with high-speed fluctuation, etc.), the selection buffer and story counter of that story may also be cleared. Further, it may be configured such that a story can be set when the relief time reduction is activated, or a different story can be set depending on the game state.

(Modification 1)
In the feature section 108IW, the symbol confirmation period is set to 20 seconds, which is longer than the normal 0.5 seconds, in the variable display that shortens the rescue time, and the mode transition performance and right hit notification are executed during the symbol confirmation period. Although shown, the processing mode is not limited to this. For example, the pattern confirmation period is set to 0.5 seconds as usual, and then a postponement period is set until the next variation starts, and the mode transition effect and right-hand hit notification are executed during the postponement period. You may. Hereinafter, a first modification will be described in which a postponement period is provided until the start of the next variation and the mode transition effect and right-handed hit notification are executed.

FIG. 12-43 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing in modification 1. As shown in FIG. 12-43, in modification 1, in addition to the process shown in FIG. 5, the next variation postponement process (step 100IWS114) is included in the special symbol process process. In addition, in the first modification, the starting winning determination process (step 100IWS101) is the same as the starting winning determining process (step 101) shown in FIG.

In modification 1, the special symbol normal process (step 100IWS110) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0". Further, the fluctuation pattern setting process (step 100IWS111) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". Moreover, the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS112) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". Moreover, the special symbol stop process (step 100IWS113) is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3".

Further, the next variation postponement process (step 100IWS114) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4".

Moreover, the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 100IWS115) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". Further, the jackpot opening process (step 100IWS116) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". Further, the jackpot release post-processing (step 100IWS117) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". Moreover, the jackpot end process (step 100IWS118) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "8".

Moreover, the small hit opening preprocessing (step 100IWS119) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "9". Moreover, the small hit opening process (step 100IWS120) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "10". Moreover, the small hit end process (step 100IWS121) is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "11".

In modification 1, the special symbol normal processing (step 100IWS110) and the variation pattern setting processing (step 100IWS111) are the same as the special symbol normal processing (step S110) and variation pattern setting processing (step S111) shown in FIG. It is. In addition, in modification example 1, in the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS112) and the special symbol stop process (step 100IWS113), even if the relief time is shortened, the symbol confirmation period is set to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as usual. This differs from the special symbol variation process (step S112) and special symbol stop process (step S113) shown in FIG. 5 in that the first symbol confirmed C designation command or the second symbol determined C designation command is transmitted.

In addition, in modification 1, the jackpot opening preprocessing (step 100IWS115) to the small hit ending process (step 100IWS121) are the same as the jackpot opening preprocessing (step S114) to the small winning ending process (step S120) shown in FIG. It is similar to

FIG. 12-44 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing (step 100IWS113) in modification 1. In modification 1, the processing of steps 100IWS131 to S171 of the special symbol stop processing is similar to those shown in FIGS. 12-16 and 12-17. In modification example 1, when the relief time saving determination flag is reset in step 100IWS171, the CPU 103 sets a predetermined postponement period (in this example, 20 seconds) to the postponement period measurement timer for measuring the postponement period until the start of the next change. A value corresponding to is set (step 100IWS171A). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the next variation postponement process (step 100IWS114) (step 100IWS171B). Note that the process in step 100IWS175 is similar to the process shown in FIG. 12-17.

FIG. 12-45 is a flowchart showing the next change postponement process (step 100IWS114) in Modification 1. In the next change postponement process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the postponement period measurement timer (step 100IWS191), and checks whether the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 100IWS192). . If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is not 0, the process ends.

If the value of the postponement period measurement timer after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets the time saving number counter to "800" (step 100IWS193) and sets the relief time saving number counter to "800" (step 100IWS193A). ). Further, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag C and controls the time saving state (step 100IWS194). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state C designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 100IWS195).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step 100IWS110) (step 100IWS196).

In addition, in Modification 1, in the next change postponement process, a case is shown in which the time reduction state is entered at the timing when the postponement period (in this example, 20 seconds) until the start of the next change has elapsed. It is not limited to the form. For example, it may be configured such that a right-handed notification is given in the next variation postponement process, and the time reduction state is entered at the start of the postponement period or in the middle of the postponement period until the start of the next variation. That is, in the next fluctuation postponement process, the time saving state may be controlled and the right-handed hit notification may be performed, or the time saving state may not be controlled and only the right-handed hitting notification is performed. There are many possible ways.

Further, in the first modification, a case is shown in which 20 seconds is uniformly measured as the postponement period in the next change postponement process, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when the relief time reduction counter is set (set to "800") at the timing when the relief time reduction occurs, and the configuration is configured so that the relief time reduction can occur continuously, the time reduction will be different if the relief time reduction occurs during normal state. A different postponement period may be set depending on the case where the relief time is shortened during the state. For example, if the relief time is shortened during the time saving state, a shorter postponement period is set compared to the case where the relief time is shortened during the normal state, and it is measured in the next change postponement process, and the relief time is shortened from the second time onward. In some cases, the postponement period may be shortened.

Further, during the execution of the next fluctuation postponement process, the image display device 5 does not display the decorative pattern, but displays only the small pattern, and is configured so that the small pattern is not hidden by the performance accessory or the like. Good too.

In addition, in modification 1, when the relief time is shortened, the next change postponement process is executed to extend the period until the next change starts, but this is not limited to such a mode. The present invention may also be applied to a configuration in which the next variation postponement process similar to Modification Example 1 is executed to extend the period until the next variation is started.

Further, as described above, if the present invention is also applied to the display of fluctuations in time reduction, the processing of steps 100IWS154 to S168 shown in FIG. 12-17 may also be configured to be executed in the next fluctuation postponement processing. With such a configuration, the symbol confirmation period for the fluctuating display in the event of a time shortening can be made common to 0.5 seconds, which is the same as the normal fluctuating display, and processing related to right hit notification etc. can also be done in the case of relief time shortening, etc. can be executed in the same process.

FIG. 12-46 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the relief time in Modification 1. As shown in FIG. 12-46, in modification example 1, in the variable display immediately before the variable display that shortens the rescue time (the value of the rescue time shortening counter is 1), the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol ends, and the When the symbol (no time saver) is stopped and displayed, the missed symbol (no time saver) is confirmed and displayed for a symbol confirmation period of 0.5 seconds (see step 100 IWS1137). Next, in the variable display in which the value of the rescue time reduction number counter becomes 0 at the start of the variable display and the rescue time is shortened (see step 100 IWS74, S75), a time reduction entry effect is executed on the image display device 5 during the variable display of the special symbol. (See step 108IWS806B). Then, when the fluctuating display of the special symbols is finished and the losing symbols (no time savings) are stopped and displayed, the missing symbols (no time savings) are confirmed and displayed for the same 0.5 second symbol confirmation period as usual (step 078 IWS1135 reference). Next, when the 0.5 second symbol determination period ends, the process moves to a 20 second next fluctuation postponement period, as shown in FIG. 12-46 (see step 100 IWS114). Then, during the next change postponement period, a mode transition effect is executed in the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 12-46. Next, when a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed during the next change postponement period, right-handed hitting notification is started on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 12-46. Next, when the next change postponement period has elapsed, the time saving state C is entered, and as shown in FIG. In the example, the background image is switched to an orange display color.

In the case of configuring as in Modification 1, a fluctuation stop signal is output at the start of the symbol confirmation period for the losing symbol, and after the symbol determination period has elapsed, the fluctuation stop signal is output at the start of the next fluctuation postponement process (i.e., the start of the next fluctuation postponement period). (at the start), four jackpot signals may be output. The jackpot 4 signal here is a signal that is output to the outside during the next variation postponement period after the symbol confirmation period of the variation display in which the relief time is shortened. With such a configuration, when outputting the fluctuation stop signal and the four jackpot signals at the same time, it is possible to avoid failure to receive signals externally.

Furthermore, in the case of the configuration as in Modification 1, at the start of the next variation postponement process (that is, at the start of the next variation postponement period), the player is in a gaming state in which it is assumed that he or she will play right-handed. A test signal or an external output signal indicating this may be output, or a right-handed hit notification may be started. With such a configuration, it is possible to output a signal related to right-handed hitting and to notify right-handed hitting at an appropriate timing.

(Modifications 2 to 4)
In addition, in the feature section 108IW described above, during the time saving state controlled based on the relief time saving, the variation pattern table E (see FIG. 12-8 (E)) is uniformly selected, and the high-speed variation of 1.5 seconds is changed. Although the case where the display is executed is shown, it is not limited to such a mode. Modifications 2 to 4 in which the method of selecting a variation pattern during a time saving state based on relief time saving is different will be described below. FIG. 12-47 is an explanatory diagram for explaining Modifications 2 to 4 of the variation pattern selection method during the time saving state based on the relief time reduction.

First, using FIG. 12-47(A), a method of selecting a variation pattern during a time saving state based on relief time saving in Modification 2 will be described. In the feature section 108IW mentioned above, either the case is a case where the fluctuating display is executed 800 times after the RAM clearing process (without becoming a jackpot or a time saver error), or after a jackpot or a time saver miss (the next jackpot or a time saver miss). 12-8 (F), (G) ) is selected and a variable display of 5 seconds or 12 seconds is executed at a high rate to execute the countdown effect and effect effect, and after the rescue time is shortened and the time saving state is controlled, the variable pattern table E (see figure 1) is uniformly displayed. 12-8(E)) is selected and a high-speed fluctuation display of 1.5 seconds is executed, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode.

For example, as shown in Modification 2 of FIG. 12-47, when the relief time is shortened by performing 800 fluctuation displays after the RAM clearing process, from 10 fluctuations before to 1 fluctuation before the rescue time is shortened. also selects fluctuation pattern table B (see Figure 12-7 (B)) and executes the same fluctuation display as normal, and after being controlled to the time saving state based on the relief time reduction, fluctuation pattern table C (see Figure 12-7 (B)) is selected. (C)) may be selected to select a variation pattern similar to the time saving state during the jackpot, and the 5-second variation display may be executed at a high rate.

For example, as shown in Modification 3 of Figure 12-47, in the case where the relief time is shortened by executing 800 fluctuation displays after a jackpot, the fluctuation display when executing the 800th fluctuation display From the pattern table I (see FIG. 12-8 (I)), a variation pattern for relief time reduction variation (for example, variation pattern PA3-1) is selected, and a variation display with a variation time of 25 seconds is executed. Note that the feature section 108IW described above is configured to execute a time-saving rush effect during a variable display, and to execute a mode transition effect and right hit notification during a symbol confirmation period, but for example, during a 25-second variable display. It may be configured so that a mode transition effect or a right hit notification is executed in (Accordingly, in this case, the symbol confirmation period may be secured for 0.5 seconds as usual).

In addition, in Modification 2 and Modification 3 of FIG. 12-47, the selection ratio of the variation pattern in the variation display that shortens the rescue time is different between the case where the rescue time is shortened after RAM clear processing and the case where the rescue time is shortened after a jackpot. In addition, the effects can be made different by changing the selection ratio of the variation pattern in the variation display after transitioning to the time saving state via the rescue time reduction.

For example, as shown in modification example 4 of FIG. 12-47, the variation pattern table B (see FIG. 12-7 (B)) may be selected even from 10 variations before to 1 variation, which shortens the rescue time. Execute the same fluctuation display as usual, and select the fluctuation pattern table C (see Figure 12-7 (C)) during the time saving state based on the first relief time reduction to display the same fluctuation pattern as the time saving state when going through the jackpot. is selected to execute a 5-second fluctuation display at a high rate, and during the time saving state based on the second relief time reduction, select fluctuation pattern table E (see Figure 12-8 (E)) to display a 1.5-second high-speed display. It may be configured to perform a variation display of variation.
(Example 2)

Next, a gaming machine according to a second embodiment of the feature section 108IW of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 12-48 to 12-54. Note that, regarding the second embodiment, mainly the parts that are different from the first embodiment will be explained.

In the second embodiment, in principle, there is no indication that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is soon shortened. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the fluctuation pattern table F as shown in FIG. 12-8(F) of the first embodiment and the fluctuation pattern table G as shown in FIG. 12-8(G) are used immediately before the relief time is shortened. No variation pattern table is provided for this purpose. In other words, if the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 12-8 (F) and (G) only immediately before the relief time is shortened, the player will not be aware of the fact that the relief time is just before the shortening due to the tendency of the fluctuation pattern. However, by not using such a variation pattern table, it is possible to prevent this from being noticed.

In addition, in the second embodiment, the variation display that shortens the rescue time is not a dedicated variation pattern for shortening the rescue time, but a variation pattern that is also used for a variation display that does not shorten the rescue time (for example, variation pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)). is used. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the variation pattern table I as shown in FIG. 12-8(I) of the first embodiment and the variation pattern table J as shown in FIG. 12-8(J) are used to reduce the relief time. There is no variation pattern table provided for variations when this occurs. With such a configuration, it is possible to make the variation pattern common between when the relief time is shortened and before the relief time is shortened, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Variation pattern setting process in Example 2)
Next, the variation pattern setting process in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 12-48 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S111) in the second embodiment. In the fluctuation pattern setting process, the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) first checks whether the jackpot flag is set (step 100IWS1701). If the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 selects the jackpot variation pattern table A shown in FIG. 12-7(A) as the table for determining the variation pattern (step 100IWS1702).

If the jackpot flag is not set (that is, if it is a loss), the CPU 103 checks whether the probability variation flag is set (step 100IWS1707). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if it is in a probability variation state), the CPU 103 creates a fluctuation pattern table for failure in the probability variation state shown in FIG. 12-8 (H) as a table for determining the variation pattern. H is selected (step 100IWS1708). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table H on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the probability change flag is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving flag A indicating that the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot is set (step 100IWS1709). If the time saving flag A is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the jackpot), the CPU 103 uses the jackpot as shown in FIG. 12-7(C) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. A variation pattern table C for the deviation of the controlled time saving state is selected (step 100IWS1710). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table C on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table C based on the value of the total pending memory number counter. If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the time-saving flag A is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag B, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via a time-saving change, is set (step 100IWS1711). If the time saving flag B is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the time saving deviation), the CPU 103 uses the time saving deviation shown in FIG. 12-7 (D) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. A variation pattern table D for deviations from the time-saving state controlled via the IWS 1712 is selected (step 100IWS1712). However, in this case, the CPU 103 checks the value of the total pending memory number counter, selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is 1 or more, and selects the variation pattern table D on the condition that the value of the total pending memory number counter is If is 0 (that is, if there is no pending memory), the variation pattern table B for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) is selected.

If the time-saving flag B is not set, the CPU 103 checks whether the time-saving flag C, which indicates that the time-saving state is controlled via the relief time-saving method, is set (step 100IWS1713). If the time saving flag C is set (that is, if the time saving state is controlled via the relief time reduction), the CPU 103 uses the relief time reduction shown in FIG. 12-8(E) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table E for the deviation during the time saving state controlled via the IWS is selected (step 100IWS1714).

If the time saving flag C is also not set (that is, in the normal state), the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern for deviations in the normal state shown in FIG. 12-7(B) as a table for determining the fluctuation pattern. Select table B (step 100IWS1715).

Next, the CPU 103 uses the fluctuation pattern table determined to be used in steps 100IWS1702, S1708, S1710, S1712, S1714, and S1715 and the random number for fluctuation pattern determination stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Based on this, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIGS. 12-7 and 12-8 will be used (step 100IWS1716).

After determining the fluctuation pattern, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a fluctuation pattern command indicating the determined fluctuation pattern to the performance control CPU 120 (step 100IWS1717).

Further, when the fluctuation time (fluctuation pattern) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is determined in step 100IWS1716, the CPU 103 sets the fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the fluctuation time timer to measure the fluctuation time. (Step 100IWS1718), and starts variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A or variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B (Step 100IWS1719). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol variation process (step 100IWS1720).

(Customer waiting demonstration performance control process in Example 2)
As described above, in the second embodiment, in principle, there is no indication that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is soon shortened. Therefore, based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, a caption indicating that the rescue time-saving function is provided is displayed (see Figure 12-26). There is no indication that the number of fluctuations remaining until the time is shortened or that the time for relief is near. That is, in the second embodiment, based on the reception of the customer waiting demonstration designation command, a telop explaining the reduction in relief time is always displayed in a common manner.

In the second embodiment as well, it may be possible to suggest the number of fluctuations remaining until the rescue time is shortened or that the rescue time is soon to be shortened, depending on whether or not the telop display is executed and the presentation mode. However, during a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (for example, a period in which the remaining number of fluctuations is 10 or less), the execution of the caption display is more restricted than in the period before that (for example, the execution rate decreases, (or not) is desirable. With this configuration, when the rescue time is shortened, a change in the background image (i.e., a notification that time saving control is to be started due to the rescue time shortening) is suddenly executed, giving the player a surprise. You can improve your interest by giving.

(Variable display start setting process in Example 2)
Next, variable display start setting processing in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 12-49 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the second embodiment. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first reads the variable pattern command from the variable pattern command storage area (step 100IWS801). Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines the display result (stop) of the decorative pattern according to the variation pattern command read out in step 100IWS801 and the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command). symbol) is determined (step 100IWS802).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 performs execution settings for a preview performance to be executed during the variable display (step 108IWS802A). As a preview effect, for example, a timer effect can be executed in which a countdown is started after the start of fluctuation, and when the count reaches "0", an effect image indicating the degree of jackpot expectation is displayed, and in step 108IWS802A, the timer effect You may also configure the execution settings.

FIG. 12-50 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the preview performance execution determination table and the preview performance mode determination table in the second embodiment. In step 108IWS802A of the second embodiment, regardless of the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened, it is determined whether or not to execute the preview performance using the preview performance execution determination table shown in FIG. 12-50(A). Furthermore, when it is determined to execute the preview performance, the performance mode of the preview performance is determined using the preview performance mode determination table shown in FIG. 12-50(B).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 12-50(A) and (B), regardless of the number of times remaining until the relief time is shortened, whether or not to execute the preview effect and the mode of effect when executed are as follows. It is configured to be determined by a common ratio. Also, in the second embodiment, when the relief time is shortened and the transition is made to the time saving state C, as in the first embodiment, a background image corresponding to the time saving state C (the time saving state via the relief time saving) is displayed on the image display device 5. (In this example, the background image has an orange display color) (see step 078 IWS638). With such a configuration, a change in the background image (i.e., a notification that time-saving control is to be started due to relief time-saving) is suddenly executed, so it is possible to provide a surprise to the player and increase interest. can.

As mentioned above, in the second embodiment, in principle, there is no indication that the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is close to being shortened. Processing for executing a countdown presentation, effect presentation, and processing for displaying an initial roll according to the number of times until relief time is shortened are omitted.

In the second embodiment as well, it may be possible to perform an inciting effect, a countdown effect, and an effect effect according to the number of remaining fluctuations until the relief time is shortened. However, during a predetermined period before the relief time is shortened (for example, a period in which the number of fluctuations remaining is 10 or less), the execution of incitement effects, countdown effects, and effect effects are more restricted than in the previous period (for example, , the execution rate is reduced, or it is not executed at all). With this configuration, a change in the background image (i.e., a notification that time saving control is to be started due to relief time saving) is suddenly executed, giving the player a sense of surprise and increasing interest. be able to.

Further, as described above, in the second embodiment, the variation display that shortens the rescue time is not a dedicated variation pattern for shortening the rescue time, but a variation pattern that is also used for a variation display that does not shorten the rescue time (for example, the variation pattern PA1-1). (normal fluctuation)) is used. Therefore, in the second embodiment, the process for executing the time-saving rush effect or the time-saving rush effect is omitted. With such a configuration, for example, after the fluctuation display of the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is performed, a change in the background image (i.e., notification that time saving control by saving time saving is to be started) is suddenly executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide surprise to the players and increase their interest.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the variation pattern (step 108IWS811). Then, the process moves to step 108IWS812.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table (step 108IWS812).

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the variable time timer to a value corresponding to the variable time specified by the variable pattern command (step 108 IWS814).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the variable display performance process (step S172) (step 108IWS815).

(Production execution timing in Example 2)
Next, the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the rescue time in the second embodiment will be explained. FIG. 12-51 is a timing chart for explaining the execution timing of the effect when executing the variable display that shortens the rescue time in the second embodiment.

As shown in Figure 12-51, in the variable display immediately before the variable display that shortens the rescue time (the value of the rescue time shortening counter is 1), the special symbol variable time ( For example, when 12 seconds) have elapsed, the losing symbol (no time saving) is stopped and displayed, and the losing symbol (no time saving) is confirmed and displayed for a 0.5 second symbol confirmation period (see step 100 IWS1137). Next, in the variable display (see step 100 IWS74, S75) in which the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 0 and the relief time is shortened at the start of the variable display, the variable display of the special symbols and decorative symbols is started in the same way as the previous variable display. It ends when the special symbol fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) has passed, and when the winning symbol (no time saving) is stopped and displayed, the winning symbol (no time saving) is confirmed and displayed for a 0.5 second symbol confirmation period. (See step 100IWS1137). When the symbol confirmation period has elapsed, the time saving state C is entered, and as shown in FIG. 12-51, the image display device 5 displays a background image (in this example In this case, the display color is switched to (background image with an orange display color) (see step 100IWS638). With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a sense of surprise to the player, and it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming complicated. Further, it is possible to clearly notify the player of a change in the game state, and it is possible to improve interest when the rescue time is shortened.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-51, during a period in which variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) after transitioning to time-saving state C, right-handed hit notification is performed (FIG. 12-52 (C1 )reference). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the production related to the transition to the time-saving state C from becoming complicated, while making the player aware that the player is in a gaming state in which he or she is playing right-handed, thereby preventing the occurrence of disadvantages for the player. can be suppressed.

(Example of production in Example 2)
Next, a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment, will be explained. FIG. 12-52 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode until the transition to the time saving state. Note that in FIG. 12-52, the effect screen changes in the order of (A), (B), and (C).

In the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12-52 (A), when the special symbol variation time (for example, 12 seconds) has elapsed after the start of the variable display that shortens the relief time, the display is displayed as shown in FIG. 12-52 (B). Then, a decorative pattern 100IW100 and a small pattern 100IW101 are derived and displayed in a combination of missed patterns.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. The background image is switched to a background image with a display color of orange (in this example, a background image with an orange display color), and right-handed hitting notification is executed.

Note that if the pending memory is not stored after the symbol confirmation period has passed, as shown in FIG. 12-52 (C2), the image display device 5 In this case, the background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) corresponding to the time saving state C (time saving state via relief time saving) may be switched to, and the right hit notification may be executed.

Also, at the timings shown in FIGS. 12-52 (C1) and (C2), an explanation regarding saving time saving by the telop display 100IW 103 as shown in FIGS. 12-37 (A) and (B) (for example, the relief time saving function and (explanation of the performance) may also be performed. In addition, although the number of fluctuations remaining until the rescue time is shortened and the effects that suggest that the rescue time is near are not executed, the subtitles 100IW103 as shown in Figures 12-37 (A) and (B) are displayed at any timing. may be displayed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

With the configuration shown in Figure 12-52, the change in the background image (that is, the notification that time saving control by saving time saving will start) is suddenly executed, giving the player a surprise and increasing their interest. can be improved.

Further, it is possible to clearly inform the player of a change in the game state, and it is possible to improve interest when the relief time is shortened. Further, it is possible to make the variation pattern common between when the relief time reduction is established and before it is established, and the data capacity can be reduced.

It should be noted that the performance mode until the transition to the time saving state C, which is the relief time saving in the second embodiment, is not limited to that shown in FIG. 12-52. For example, a modification 1 shown in FIG. 12-53 or a modification 2 shown in FIG. 12-53 may be used.

(Example of production in Example 2 [Modification 1])
FIG. 12-53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode up to the transition to saving time saving in Modification 1 of Embodiment 2.

In modification example 1 shown in FIG. 12-53, as shown in FIG. 12-53 (A), after the variable display immediately before the variable display that shortens the relief time is stopped, the variable display that shortens the relief time is started. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-53 (B), a time-saving effect (blackout effect) is executed in which the effect display that was displayed immediately before on the image display device 5 (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) is made difficult to see. be done.

Then, when the special symbol fluctuation time (for example, 12 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in Figure 12-53 (C), the blackout state is resolved and the decorative symbol 100IW100 and the small symbol 100IW101 are removed and derived by the combination of symbols. Is displayed.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. The background image is switched to a background image with a display color of orange (in this example, a background image with an orange display color), and right-handed hitting notification is executed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 12-53 (C) when the blackout state is resolved, an image display or a sound effect is displayed to notify that the time saving state (relief time saving) control is to be started. Good too.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 12-53 can be created, for example, by selecting a process table that includes a time-saving effect (blackout effect) when the variable display is a variable display that shortens the rescue time in the variable display start setting process. It can be realized.

(Example of production in Example 2 [Modification 2])
FIG. 12-54 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a specific example of the performance mode up to the transition to saving time saving in the second modification of the second embodiment.

In modification example 2 shown in FIG. 12-54, as shown in FIG. 12-54 (A), a variable display that shortens the relief time is started, and a predetermined period (for example, 12 seconds) of the special figure variable time (for example, 12 seconds) is started. For example, after 8 seconds have elapsed, as shown in FIG. 12-54(B), on the image display device 5, the decorative pattern 100IW100 is temporarily stopped and displayed in a combination of broken patterns. However, at the timing shown in FIG. 12-54(B), the special symbol variation time has not elapsed, so the small symbols 100IW101 are displayed in a variable manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-54(C), on the image display device 5, a time-saving effect (blackout effect) that makes the previously displayed effect display (for example, decorative pattern 100IW100, etc.) difficult to see is performed. executed. Further, the special symbol variation time elapses while the time-saving entry performance (blackout performance) is being executed, and the small symbols 100IW101 are derived and displayed in a combination of missed symbols. The time-saving rush performance (blackout performance) continues to be executed during the symbol confirmation period.

Then, when the symbol confirmation period has elapsed and the next variable display is started, the blackout state is resolved in the image display device 5 and the time saving state C ( The background image is switched to a background image (in this example, a background image with an orange display color) according to the time saving state (via the rescue time saving state). Further, as shown in FIG. 12-54(D), a right-handed hit notification is executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 12-53 can be created, for example, by selecting a process table that includes a time-saving effect (blackout effect) when the variable display is a variable display that shortens the rescue time in the variable display start setting process. It can be realized.

In addition, at the timings of FIGS. 12-53 (C), (D), FIGS. 12-54 (C), (D), etc., the relief by the telop display 100IW 103 as shown in FIGS. 12-37 (A), (B) An explanation regarding time saving (for example, an explanation of a rescue time saving function or an effect of saving time saving) may be provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

In the first embodiment of the characteristic part 108IW shown above, a variation pattern that becomes a super reach is determined in a period before the relief time becomes short (for example, a period in which the number of remaining variations until a relief variation occurs is 10 or less). , deciding to execute a notice performance is restricted, while in the second embodiment, neither is restricted, but by combining these, for example, before the relief time is shortened. In the period (for example, a period in which the number of fluctuations remaining before becoming a relief fluctuation is 10 or less), for example, the fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation) is determined, and the preview of the type of preview performance for which the expectation level is not very high is determined. The performance may be made executable. That is, it may be possible to limit the determination of a variation pattern that is a super reach, and to restrict the execution of a type of preview performance with a high degree of expectation among the preview performances.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above, the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened and the effect that suggests that the relief time is near (also referred to as a relief suggestion effect) include an inciting effect, a countdown effect, Effects may be executed, initial results may be displayed depending on the number of times until the rescue time is shortened, and a telop display while waiting for a customer (for example, the telop display 108IW101 shown in Figure 12-26) may be displayed. Unlimited. For example, an action effect in which the movable body 32 is operated at any timing during a variable display or while the variation is stopped, a light emission effect in which a light emitting body such as a decorative LED is made to emit light in a specific manner (for example, a rainbow light), and a light emission effect in which the movable body 32 Depending on the execution frequency and execution mode of a vibration effect that vibrates the stick controller 31A, push button 31B, etc., it may be suggested that the remaining number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened or that the rescue time is almost short.

In addition, in the feature section 108IW and each modification shown above, the effect control command (for example, the effect control command to instruct recovery from a power outage or the effect control command to instruct initialization) that is transmitted when the power is turned on. , If the performance control board 12 cannot receive the command normally (for example, if the command is missed or the command is garbled), the normal Although it is possible to carry out the effect, it may not be possible to execute the relief suggestion effect that suggests the number of fluctuations remaining until the relief time is shortened or that the relief time is near (note that once a jackpot has occurred, it may not be possible to execute possible). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to incorrect relief suggestion performance.

In addition, in the feature section 108IW and each modified example shown above, a rescue time reduction number 1 designation command and a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command (in this example, each time a variation display is executed, the command is sent The relief suggestion performance may not be executed if the message (received by the user) cannot be received normally. In this case, the relief suggestion performance may not be executed only during the fluctuation display in which the relief time reduction number 1 specified command or the relief time reduction number 2 specification command could not be received normally, or the relief suggestion effect may not be executed until the next jackpot occurs. The suggestive performance may not be performed. Also, for example, if the reception cannot be received normally, the relief suggestion effect is executed in a manner and execution ratio that suggests that the number of remaining fluctuations that will shorten the relief time is large (that is, the relief time is not close to being shortened). You can. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from having expectations due to incorrect relief suggestion performance.

In addition, although the feature section 108IW and each modified example shown above are applied to a gaming machine that controls a jackpot game based on a variable display result, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a gaming machine configured to be able to execute a jackpot game that controls a jackpot game based on a game ball winning a prize (V winning area) in a specific area (V winning area) of the jackpot during a small winning game; The configuration for controlling the time saving state via the relief time saving shown in the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above may be applied.

Further, in the characteristic portion 108IW and each modification shown above, the number of fluctuations until the relief time is shortened is fixed at 800 times, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, depending on whether the RAM clearing process is executed or when a jackpot occurs, the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be switched to "800" or "900", or the value set in the rescue time reduction counter may be randomly set. It may be switched to "800" or "900".

In addition, although the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above showed the case where the time saving flag C is set every time the relief time saving occurs, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the time saving flag (fourth numeric value) that is set when the second time saving time is transferred again may be different from the time saving flag (third numeric value) that is set when the first time saving time is being saved.

In addition, in the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above, the case where the time saving state after the jackpot and the relief time saving state are different effects (fluctuation patterns) is shown, but it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the same performance (fluctuation pattern) may be used for the time saving state after the jackpot and the rescue time saving state. Specifically, even if the same notification (such as the notification in Figure 12-39 (K) or notification suggesting future jackpot acquisition) is made just before the end of the time saving state after a jackpot and just before the start of the relief time saving, good.

In addition, although the characteristic part 108IW and each modification shown above have shown the case where different effects (variation patterns) are used for the time saving state where the time saving is missed and the relief time saving state, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the same effect (variation pattern) may be used for the time saving state where the time saving is missed and the relief time saving state. Specifically, even if the same notification (such as the notification in Figure 12-39 (K) or notification suggesting future jackpot acquisition) is made just before the end of the time saving state when the time saving is missed and just before the start of the relief time saving, good.

As explained above, the present feature section 108IW and each modification disclose the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1A) to (means 8A).

(Means 1A) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A game machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17) Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. update means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means can update the numerical information by the update means. When the numerical information becomes a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of variable display, it is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in Figures 12-13, game control As shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the microcomputer 100 for game control), the updating means updates the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the variable display of the second identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 is a predetermined suggestion effect execution means (for example, a step in the effect control CPU 120 as shown in FIG. 12-49 108IWS811) and a special notification effect that notifies that control of the special state will start based on the establishment of special conditions (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-52 (C1) and (C2)). 12-53 (B), blackout at the start of the fluctuation as shown in Figure 12-54 (C), blackout at the end of the fluctuation as shown in Figure 12-54 (C), etc.) The predetermined suggestion performance execution means further includes a performance execution means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-23, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638), and the predetermined suggestion performance execution means, in a period before the special condition is satisfied, The rate at which the predetermined suggestion effect is executed is common (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-44, the part where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A). (See Figure 12-50). According to such a configuration, by suddenly executing the special notification effect, it is possible to give surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 2A) In means 1A, the special notification performance execution means is capable of executing the special notification performance when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied is started, and the special notification performance is such that the special notification performance is executed in the display means. This is a mode in which the effect display displayed before the start is difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-53(B), it is blacked out at the start of the fluctuation). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 3A) In the means 1A, a variable display execution means capable of variably displaying identification information for presentation (for example, a decorative pattern) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information is provided. In addition, the special notification performance execution means is capable of executing a special notification performance when the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied ends, and the special notification performance is in a form that makes the performance identification information difficult to see (for example, , blackout occurs at the end of the fluctuation as shown in Figure 12-54(C)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 4A) In the means 1A, the special notification effect execution means is capable of executing the special notification effect when a variable display subsequent to the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and the special notification effect is executed on the display. This is a mode in which the background display in the means is changed to the background display corresponding to the special state (for example, as shown in Figure 12-52 (C1), the background image (orange) is displayed when the next variable display is executed. ). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest. Further, it is possible to prevent the performance from becoming complicated.

(Means 5A) Any one of the means 1A to 4A is provided with an explanatory effect execution means capable of executing an explanatory effect regarding the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, FIGS. 12-52 (C1), (C2) ), at the timings shown in FIGS. 12-53 (D) and 12-54 (D), an explanation will be given using the telop display 100IW 103 as shown in FIGS. 12-37 (A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 6A) In any one of the means 1A to 5A, a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 selects a variable pattern as shown in FIG. 12-48). When the special condition is satisfied, the variable display pattern determining means includes a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied (for example, a variable display pattern PA1-1 (usually )), and the special notification performance execution means can execute the special notification performance after a non-specific display result (for example, a missed symbol) is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display in which the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player that the special state is controlled due to the establishment of the special condition, and it is also possible to clearly notify the player of a change in the gaming state, and the special condition It is possible to improve the interest when the event is established.

(Means 7A) In any of the means 1A to 6A, a variable display execution means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a step A part that executes S112), a suspension storage means (for example, a first suspension storage number buffer and a second suspension storage number buffer) that can store information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied. a buffer), a backup storage means (e.g. RAM 102) capable of retaining the numerical information updated by the update means and the reservation information stored in the reservation storage means even if the power supply is stopped, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied, Initialization means (for example, the portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S8) capable of executing an initialization process that initializes the storage contents of the backup storage means, and the backup storage A recovery means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S6 part) and. According to such a configuration, while optimizing control through initialization processing, a power outage occurs in a situation where a hold memory corresponding to a special number of variable displays is stored before power supply is stopped. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of disadvantages to the player when playing the game.

(Means 8A) In any of the means 1A to 6A, a state storage means capable of storing special state information (for example, the state of time saving flags A to C) that can specify that the special state is being controlled; Execution count storage means capable of storing execution count information (for example, the value of a time saving count counter) that can specify the number of times variable display has been executed in a state, and special status information and execution count information that can be stored even when power supply is stopped. A backup storage means (e.g. RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information, and an initialization means (e.g. game control (a part in which the microcomputer 100 executes step S8), and the initialization means has special status information, execution number information, and numerical information stored in the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this case, in the initialization process, the special state information and the execution count information are initialized, but the numerical information is not initialized (for example, the states of the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving number counter are initialized). However, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not initialized (that is, the value before the power cut is set). According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the numerical information from being initialized intentionally, and it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, configurations of gaming machines shown below (Means 1B) to (Means 5B) are disclosed.

(Means 1B) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A game machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17) Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. an updating means capable of updating numerical information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), a predetermined variable display pattern, and a variable display pattern that is more variable than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including specific variable display patterns with long display periods (for example, variable pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variable pattern PA2-3 (super reach β)) pattern determining means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 12-14), and the state controlling means variably displays the numerical information updated by the updating means. When a special condition is established by setting a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the second identification information is displayed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. The display pattern determining means can determine the specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and when it is not a specific display result (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-7). As shown in A) and (B), variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) are determined in both cases of jackpot and miss. When the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result, the specific variable display pattern is determined at a higher rate than the predetermined variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-7(A), the variable pattern PA2-2 (Super Reach α) and fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (Super Reach β) have a higher probability of being determined in the event of a jackpot than fluctuation pattern PA1-1 (normal fluctuation), and special conditions are met. In the previous predetermined period, when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower than in the period before the predetermined period (for example, in Figure 12-8 ( As shown in F) and (G), just before the relief time becomes short, the rate of determining the variation pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) or the variation pattern PA2-3 (super reach β) is low). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a specific display result is not derived and displayed although variable display is performed using a specific variable display pattern during a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 2B) The means 1B includes a suggestive performance execution means capable of executing a suggestive performance related to the establishment of the special condition (for example, a countdown performance, an effect performance, and a caption display while waiting for a customer), and the suggestive performance execution means includes: In the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied, the ratio of execution of the suggestive effect is higher than in the period before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in FIG. ~The part where S809 is executed. Also, the part where the production control CPU 120 executes 105IWS251). According to such a configuration, it is possible to make the player expect that the special condition will be satisfied, and it is possible to increase the interest of the player. Further, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a disadvantage to the player due to the player ending the game immediately before the special condition is satisfied.

(Means 3B) In means 1B or 2B, an explanation performance regarding the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, an explanation is given using the telop display 100IW 103 as shown in FIGS. 12-37(A) and (B)) The explanation performance execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes steps 108IWS803 to S804) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

(Means 4B) In any of the means 1B to 3B, execution of a notice effect capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) that foretells that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed. The preview performance execution means is capable of executing the preview performance in both cases where the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result and when the display result of the variable display does not result in a specific display result. When the result is a specific display result, the proportion of advance notice performances is higher than when the result is not a specific display result, and the predetermined period before the special condition is met (for example, the remaining number of times until the shortening of the rescue time is 10 or less). 12-31), the percentage of execution of the preview effect is lower when the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result than in the period before the predetermined period (for example, as shown in Figure 12-31). , the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A (see FIGS. 12-32(A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview effect is executed during a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied, but a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

(Means 5B) In any of the means 1B to 4B, execution of a notice effect capable of executing a notice effect (for example, a timer effect) that foretells that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed. The preview effect executing means is configured to display a specific mode (for example, the effect mode "red") and a predetermined display mode in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and when the display result is not a specific display result. If the display result of the variable display is a specific display result, the proportion of the preview effect that is executed in the specific mode is higher than that in the predetermined mode. If the display result of the variable display does not become the specific display result during the predetermined period before the special condition is established (for example, the period when the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened is 10 or less) than in the period before the predetermined period. , the proportion of execution of preview effects is low depending on the specific mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS802A; see FIGS. 12-32 (C) and (D)) . According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest when a preview effect is executed in a specific manner in a predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied, but a specific display result is not derived and displayed.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1C) to (means 8C) are disclosed.

(Means 1C) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A game machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17) Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. an updating means (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-13), and a special variable display pattern (for example, the variable pattern PA3-1 ( A variable display pattern determining means (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIGS. 12-14) that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including , the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17. (for example, the part that executes the variable display of the first identification information), and the updating means updates the numerical information depending on when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, the section shown in FIG. 12-13). As shown, the variable display pattern determining means (the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) can determine the special variable display pattern when the special condition is satisfied, and before the special condition is satisfied. In this case, the special variable display pattern is not determined (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, the part that executes steps 108IWS1701A and S1701B in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display using the special variable display pattern is executed. A specific notification performance execution means capable of executing a specific notification performance to notify that the special state is being controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, executing step 108IWS806B in the game control microcomputer 100) part. 12-38 (G) and (H)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player that the special state is controlled due to the establishment of the special condition, and it is possible to increase interest when the special condition is established.

(Means 2C) In the means 1C, the specific notification performance execution means executes the specific notification performance when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a non-specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display. When a variable display is executed in which the special condition is satisfied and a specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the specific display result is A special notification performance execution means capable of executing a special notification performance that notifies that the is derived and displayed (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, a part that executes step 108IWS806C in the game control microcomputer 100. 41 (G'), (H')). According to such a configuration, after the player once recognizes that the special condition has been established, he or she is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, which can provide surprise to the player and improve interest. I can do it.

(Means 3C) In means 1C or 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, the execution is not performed before the special condition is satisfied. It is provided with a predetermined notification performance execution means capable of executing a predetermined notification performance (for example, a full rotation performance) for notifying that a specific display result is derived and displayed depending on the mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise and specialness, and it is possible to increase interest.

(Means 4C) In means 1C or means 2C, when a variable display in which a special condition is satisfied is executed and a specific display result is derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, the same aspect as before the special condition is satisfied. (For example, even if the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0, the same way as when the value is not 0, there is a variation This is realized by determining pattern PB2-2 (super reach α) and variable pattern PB2-3 (super reach β). According to such a configuration, the variable display pattern can be shared between when the special condition is satisfied and before it is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 5C) In any of the means 1C to 4C, the display period (for example, 20 seconds) of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied is the same as the display result of the variable display before the special condition is satisfied. longer than the display period (for example, 0.5 seconds) (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-15, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS1135; see FIG. 12-36), the special condition is satisfied. During the display period of the display result of the variable display when As shown, the production control CPU 120 includes a portion for executing step 100IWS847. According to such a configuration, it is possible to secure a period for executing the notification performance in the normal state, and it is possible to clarify the performance when switching the gaming state, and to improve the interest.

(Means 6C) In any of the means 1C to 5C, at the start of the display period of the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied, a specific signal (for example, a fluctuation stop signal) corresponding to the start of the display period. and, after outputting the specific signal, a signal output means for outputting a special signal (for example, jackpot 4 signal) corresponding to the control of the special state (see, for example, FIGS. 12-18). According to such a configuration, when outputting the specific signal and the special signal at the same time, it is possible to avoid failure of a signal to occur externally.

(Means 7C) In means 6C, the signal output means performs special processing (for example, the next fluctuation postponement process shown in FIG. ) outputs a special signal at the start of According to such a configuration, when outputting the specific signal and the special signal at the same time, it is possible to avoid failure of a signal to be received externally.

(Means 8C) In any of the means 1C to 6C, a first passage area (for example, a first starting prize opening ), a second passage area (for example, a second starting prize opening) provided at a position where game media passing through a special route (for example, a right-handed route) can pass, and a second passage area (for example, a second starting prize opening) as a variable display of identification information. Variable display execution means (for example, game control (where the microcomputer 100 executes step S112) and a special output that can specify that the game media should be ejected toward a special path (for example, during a gaming state in which the player is assumed to play right-handed). a special output means capable of outputting a test signal or an external output signal indicating that a right-hand ball is being played, and a special output means capable of outputting a test signal or an external output signal indicating that a player is in a right-hand hitting state; The second starting condition is established based on the passing of the game medium through the second passing area, and the special output means is configured to display the display result of the variable display when the special condition is satisfied. A special output can be executed at the start of a special process (for example, the next change postponement process shown in FIG. 12-45) that is executed after the display period of . According to such a configuration, it is possible to execute a special output that can specify that game media should be ejected toward a special route at an appropriate timing.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1D) to (means 5D) are disclosed.

(Means 1D) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A game machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17) Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. an updating means that can update numerical information (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100); and a variable means that determines a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns. display pattern determining means (for example, a part in which the game control microcomputer 100 executes the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 12-48); By setting a specific value corresponding to the special number of display execution times, it is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, The part that executes Step 100IWS74 and Step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes Step 100IWS170 and Step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the second identification information is displayed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), When the special condition is satisfied, the variable display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that can be determined even before the special condition is satisfied (for example, a variable pattern PA1-1 (normal variation)), and the special condition is satisfied. After a non-specific display result (for example, a missed symbol) is derived and displayed as a variable display result, a special notification effect (for example, a background image corresponding to shortening rescue time) is displayed to notify that special state control is started. It further includes a special notification performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 100IWS638) capable of executing the display (orange). According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly inform the player of a change in the gaming state, and it is possible to increase interest when the special condition is satisfied. Further, it is possible to use a variable display pattern in common between when the special condition is satisfied and before the special condition is satisfied, and the data capacity can be reduced.

(Means 2D) In means 1D, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, a portion where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) and a suspension storage means (for example, a first suspension memory number buffer or a second suspension memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied; A look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance effect or a hold change effect) in which a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the means is a notice target, the look-ahead notice execution means comprising: Among the variable displays corresponding to pending information stored before the special condition is met, it is possible to execute a look-ahead preview effect that targets the variable display when the special condition is met, while the variable display that the special condition is met can be executed. Execution of a pre-read preview performance that targets a variable display after the display is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-27, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process, and it is also possible to avoid inconsistencies in the content of the presentation.

(Means 3D) In the means 1D or 2D, the special notification performance execution means is capable of executing the special notification performance when a variable display subsequent to the variable display for which the special condition is satisfied is executed, and executes the special notification performance. This is a mode in which the background display on the display means is changed to a background display corresponding to a special state (for example, see FIG. 12-52 (C1)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide surprise to the players and increase their interest, and it is also possible to prevent the performance from becoming complicated.

(Means 4D) Any one of the means 1D to 3D is provided with a suggestive effect execution means capable of executing a suggestive effect related to the establishment of the special condition (for example, a countdown effect, an effect effect, a caption display while waiting for a customer, etc.) The suggestive effect execution means limits execution of the suggestive effect during a predetermined period before the special condition is established. According to such a configuration, since the special notification effect is suddenly executed, it is possible to provide surprise to the player and increase interest.

(Means 5D) In any of the means 1D to 4D, an explanatory effect execution means (for example, FIGS. 12-52 (C1), (C2), At the timings shown in FIGS. 12-53(D) and 12-54(D), explanations will be given using the telop display 100IW 103 as shown in FIGS. 12-37(A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's understanding of the specifications of the gaming machine.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, configurations of gaming machines shown below (Means 1E) to (Means 4E) are disclosed.

(Means 1E-1) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, A gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17). , a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19), and a variable display is executed. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), a predetermined variable display pattern, and an update means that can update numerical information based on the predetermined variable display pattern. Variable display pattern determining means (for example, The game control microcomputer 100 includes a part that executes the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. can be controlled to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. , it is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established by setting a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a microcomputer for game control 100 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, a portion that executes steps 100IWS170 and 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is a variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when is executed and when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. ), the variable display pattern determining means determines that the display result of the variable display is more likely to be a non-specific display result in a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established than in a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. In this case, there is a high rate of determining the shortened variable display pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, the part that executes step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100). (See Figure 12-7 (C) and Figure 12-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a specific number, the rate at which the variable display is executed increases due to the shortened variable display pattern, and the period until the next advantageous state is controlled is increased. Since the time period will be shortened, a decline in interest can be suppressed.

(Means 1E-2) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, A gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17). , a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19), and a variable display is executed. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and a specific variable display pattern that corresponds to the execution of the reach effect. (For example, variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including variable pattern PA2-2 (super reach α) and variable pattern PA2-3 (super reach β)) The microcomputer 100 includes a part for executing the variation pattern setting process shown in FIGS. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part where the game control microcomputer 100 executes step 100IWS537) can be controlled to a special state after being controlled by the updating means, and the numerical information updated by the updating means is variably displayed. When a special condition is established by setting a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS170 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the second identification information is displayed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. The display pattern determining means is configured to determine whether the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in a special state that is controlled after the special condition is controlled to be an advantageous state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, the part that executes step 108IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100. (See Figure 12-7 (C) and Figure 12-8 (E)). According to such a configuration, when the number of executions of the variable display reaches a specific number, the proportion of display results of the variable display based on the specific variable display pattern becoming non-specific display results is low, so that a decrease in interest is prevented. It can be suppressed.

(Means 2E) In means 1E, background display means is capable of displaying different background displays on the display means for a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-23, a part that executes steps 100IWS634 and S638 in the production control CPU 120) is provided. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the difference in the gaming state, and it is possible to increase interest.

(Means 3E) In the means 1E or 2E, a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the start condition and the establishment of the start condition (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes step S112) a holding storage means (for example, a first holding memory number buffer and a second holding memory number buffer) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as holding information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied. , a look-ahead notice execution means capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect (for example, a chance effect or a hold change effect) that targets a variable display corresponding to the hold information stored in the hold storage means; The method determines the rate at which the pre-reading notice performance is executed in the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when the special condition is established, and which pre-reading notice among the plurality of types. The rate at which the performance is executed is different (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-27, the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS703. See FIGS. 12-28(A) and (B)). According to such a configuration, the execution frequency and the type of pre-read preview performance can be determined between the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state and the special state that is controlled when the special condition is established. It can be made different and more interesting.

(Means 4E) In any of the means 1E to 3E, a variable display execution means (for example, the game control microcomputer 100 executes a step A part that executes S112), a suspension storage means (for example, a first suspension storage number buffer and a second suspension storage number buffer) that can store information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied. a buffer), and a pre-read notice execution means capable of executing a pre-read notice performance (for example, a chance effect or a pending change effect) in which the variable display corresponding to the pending information stored in the pending storage means is the subject of the preview, The look-ahead notice execution means is capable of executing a look-ahead notice performance that targets a variable display when the special condition is met among the variable displays corresponding to the pending information stored before the special condition is met; Execution of a pre-read preview performance that targets variable displays subsequent to the variable display for which the special condition is met is restricted (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-27, the part where the performance control CPU 120 executes step 108IWS702). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid complicating the control process, and it is also possible to avoid inconsistencies in the content of the presentation.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown in (means 1a) to (means 10a) shown below are disclosed.

(Means 1a) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game A game machine that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-17) Based on the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the control microcomputer 100 (as shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the variable display. update means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means can update the numerical information by the update means. When the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, it is possible to control the special state (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, step 100IWS74 in the game control microcomputer 100, The part that executes step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means, when variable display of the first identification information is executed. and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, the numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100). do. According to such a configuration, relief for the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, even if the gaming state changes and any identification information is displayed variably, the numerical information continues to be updated, making it easier for the player to be rescued and increasing his or her desire to play. I can do it.

In addition, although this example shows a case where an initial value is set in the rescue time reduction counter when a jackpot occurs, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, multiple types of jackpots (jackpots that do not give time savings, jackpots with a small number of game balls acquired, jackpots with the second special symbol, etc.) are provided, and for some jackpots, the initial value of the relief time savings counter is not set. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, although this example shows a case where the first special symbol mainly changes in the normal state, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the number of pending memories may be increased so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol fluctuate in the normal state.

(Means 2a) In means 1a, the special condition is established based on the fact that a predetermined display result different from the specific display result (for example, a missed symbol) is derived and displayed a special number of times in succession as a display result of the variable display ( For example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS63, step 100IWS71, step 100IWS74, and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 100). According to such a configuration, relief is provided when display results that are disadvantageous to the player are continuously derived and displayed, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

(Means 3a) In the means 1a or 2a, the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is executed even in a state different from the normal state (e.g., variable probability state, time saving state) (e.g., FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, the part that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, relief for the player can be suitably realized. Specifically, numerical information is updated fairly, and even after being controlled to a special state, it can be controlled to the special state again, so it is possible to control the special state until it is controlled to a substantially advantageous state. , Thereby, it is possible to suppress the player's investment and prevent the player from being disadvantaged.

Note that this example shows the case where the relief time reduction counter is updated on a low probability low base (normal state), a high probability high base (probable variable state), and a low probability high base (time saving state). It is not limited to the form. For example, the relief time reduction counter is updated in all four states: low probability low base (normal state), high probability high base (probable variable state), low probability high base (time saving state), and high probability low base (latent probability variable). It may be configured as follows. In this case, it is also possible to apply the present invention to a gaming machine that performs a lottery in which a probability change state falls to a normal state.

Although this example shows a case where the second special symbol is given priority, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, a variable winning ball device 6B is provided in the first starting winning hole, and a high probability low base (small winning RUSH) where small wins occur frequently is provided. It may be configured such that the symbols change simultaneously.

Although this example shows a case where a first special symbol and a second special symbol are provided, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, only the first special symbol may be provided.

(Means 4a) In any of the means 1a to 3a, the updating means sets numerical information to an initial value when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 100, a portion that executes step 100IWS144, and a portion that executes step 100IWS167 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-17. According to such a configuration, when the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming unnecessarily high.

(Means 5a) In the means 4a, the predetermined condition is to be controlled in an advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the part that executes step 100IWS135 in the game control microcomputer 100) is configured. may have been done. According to such a configuration, when controlled to be advantageous, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming unnecessarily high.

(Means 6a) In the means 4a, the state control means is capable of controlling the state to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result (e.g., time saving error) is derived and displayed in the normal state (e.g., FIG. 12 As shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined condition is that a special display result is derived and displayed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, The part that executes step 100IWS167 in the control microcomputer 100) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled, the situation becomes advantageous for the player, and there is no need to rescue the player, so it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming more intense than necessary.

(Means 7a) In the means 4a, the predetermined condition is that the variable display is executed a special number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the part that executes step 100IWS144 in the game control microcomputer 100). It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to substantially control the special state until the next advantageous state, so that the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

(Means 8a) The means 4a includes a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of retaining numerical information to be updated by the updating means even when the power supply is stopped, and the updating means , when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, execution of initialization processing), the numerical information held in the backup storage means is set to an initial value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-11, the game control microcomputer 100), the predetermined condition is that a specific condition is satisfied (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-11, the part that executes step 100IWS8 and step 100IWS12 in the game control microcomputer 100 ) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, if the numerical information up to the special number of times is retained when initialization is performed at the gaming parlor, it may be too disadvantageous for the gaming parlor. It can be made easier.

(Means 9a) Any one of the means 1a to 8a is provided with an effect control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) corresponding to variable display, and the state The control means is capable of controlling the special state for a specific period exceeding the special number of times based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, in the microcomputer 100 for game control The part that executes Step 100IWS74 and Step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes Step 100IWS172 in the game control microcomputer 100) It is possible to control the special state again for a specific period (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17, The part that executes step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the production control means executes different productions in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the modification of FIG. 12-47). The portion shown in Example 4) may also be configured. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled in the second specific period, it is a situation where the control is not in an advantageous state for a long period of time, so it is necessary to take measures such as shortening the execution time of the variable display. By changing the presentation mode, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming less interesting.

(Means 10a) Any one of the means 1a to 8a is provided with an effect control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, a part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the effect control CPU 120) corresponding to variable display, and the state The control means is capable of controlling the special state for a specific period exceeding the special number of times based on the execution of the variable display of the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, in the microcomputer 100 for game control The part that executes Step 100IWS74 and Step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes Step 100IWS172 in the game control microcomputer 100) It is possible to control the special state again for a specific period (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17, The part that executes step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100), the production control means executes a common production in the first specific period and the second specific period (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS172 in the control microcomputer 100). (portion shown in Modification 2 and Modification 3) may be configured. According to such a configuration, when the special state is controlled during the second specific period, the situation is such that it has not been controlled to be in an advantageous state for a long period of time, so by intentionally executing the same performance, it is possible to maintain an advantageous state for a long period of time. It is possible to prevent the player from being more aware of the uncontrolled situation than necessary, and it is possible to prevent the player from losing interest in the game.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, configurations of gaming machines shown below (means 1b-1), (means 1b-2) to (means 5b) are disclosed.

(Means 1b-1) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state), and a gaming area that can play game media separately into a first route (for example, a left-handed route) and a second route (for example, a right-handed route); State control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 As shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100) and the updating means that can update the numerical information based on the variable display being executed (for example, As shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), the game that is necessary to execute multiple types of processing including variable display control and advantageous state control. A process execution means (for example, a part that executes step S25 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 5) that updates a data value indicating the progress state and executes a process corresponding to the data value. In addition, the state control means can control the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13). 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is, Numerical information is updated depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is executed or when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the microcomputer 100 for game control (For example, as shown in FIG. S110 to S113), when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value, the second processing related to the advantageous state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the step in the game control microcomputer 100 (a part that executes S114 to S117), when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means executes a third process for controlling to a special state based on the establishment of a special condition. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-43, the part that executes step 100IWS114 in the game control microcomputer 100) In the normal state, the game is played by ejecting the game media to the first path, and in the special state, A game is played by firing game media into the second route, and firing promotion notification means (see Figure 12-46) executes firing promotion notification to the effect that the game media should be fired to the second route during execution of the third process. ). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, by giving a firing promotion notification to the second route before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to perform effects related to the firing promotion notification earlier when the special state is being controlled.

(Means 1b-2) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous state (for example, A gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a state control means that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17). , a part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, a part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19), and a variable display is executed. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), a variable display control, and an advantageous state control. Process execution means (for example, as shown in FIG. (a part of the microcomputer 100 that executes step S25), and the state control means enters the special state when the special condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating means becoming a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the step in the game control microcomputer 100) 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173), the updating means updates the numerical information depending on whether variable display of the first identification information is executed or when variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS67 in the game control microcomputer 100), the process execution means executes the first process regarding the variable display when the data value is the first numerical value (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS67 in the game control microcomputer 100). 5, the part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) executes the second process regarding the advantageous state when the data value is a second numerical value different from the first numerical value (for example, the part that executes steps S110 to S113 in the game control microcomputer 100) 5, when the data value is a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value, the state control means establishes the special condition. The third process for controlling the original special state is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-43, the part that executes step 100IWS114 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the special state is changed during execution of the third process. The present invention is characterized in that it includes a performance execution means (see FIG. 12-46) that performs a notification performance to notify that the control is being performed. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, by giving a firing promotion notification to the second route before being controlled to the special state, it is possible to perform effects related to the firing promotion notification earlier when the special state is being controlled.

Although this example shows a case where priority is given to processing related to jackpots, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the configuration may be such that priority is given to processing related to variable display or processing related to saving time.

In addition, although this example shows a case where a right hit is notified in the next fluctuation postponement process which is the third process, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured such that only a mode transition effect suggesting a shift to a time saving state is executed without giving a right-handed hit notification.

(Means 2b) In the means 1b-1 and 1b-2, the processing execution means executes the second processing after the first processing when the specific display result is derived and displayed in the variable display where the special condition is satisfied ( For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-16, when step 100IWS133 in the game control microcomputer 100 is Y, step 100IWS140 is executed, and step 100IWS114 is not executed. According to such a configuration, priority is given to controlling the advantageous state, so that no disadvantageous result is produced for the player, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

(Means 3b) In the means 1b-1, the means 1b-2, or the means 2b, the updating means updates the numerical information when the variable display is started (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, for game control (a portion of the microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS71), the processing execution means changes the special information from the first information to the second information when the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value (for example, as shown in FIG. 17, the part that executes step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100) changes the special information from the second information to the first information when the state control means controls the special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the part that executes step 100IWS145 in the game control microcomputer 100) executes different processing when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information (for example, as shown in FIG. As shown in 12-14, the part that executes step 100IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, by managing the special information, it is possible to suitably execute the process of transitioning to the special state.

(Means 4b) The means 3b includes variable display pattern determining means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a portion that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining the variable display pattern of the variable display, and The display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern that is different when the special information is the first information and when the special information is the second information (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, step 100IWS1714 in the game control microcomputer 100 (the part that executes) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, when the variable display of the special number of times is executed, the effect can be suitably executed.

(Means 5b) In the means 3b, a variable display pattern determining means (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, a part that executes step S111 in the game control microcomputer 100) for determining a variable display pattern of the variable display, The display pattern determining means determines a variable display pattern in which the finalization time of the display result is different depending on whether the special information is the first information or the second information (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-15, (a portion of the microcomputer 100 that executes step 100IWS1128 and step 100IWS1130). According to such a configuration, when the variable display of the special number of times is executed, the effect can be suitably executed.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1c) to (means 6c) are disclosed.

(Means 1c) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game It is a gaming machine that can control the state), and includes a game control means that can control the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120), and a variable display. Production control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 12-31, step 108IWS811 in the production control CPU 120) The game control means includes a state control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17) that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state. , the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19), and the variable display is executed. The update means (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIGS. 12-13) and the state controlled by the state control means can update the numerical information based on the above information. a state information control means for controlling specifiable state information, the state control means being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed as a display result of the variable display, and then changing to a special state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-12, the part that executes step 100IWS64 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. It is possible to control to a special state when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17) (in the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is configured to perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information. (For example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state information control means updates the state information with the first numerical value in the normal state. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the part that executes step 100IWS145 and step 100IWS149 in the game control microcomputer 100, that is, the time saving flags A and C are not set, and the corresponding data is " 0''), when the specific display result is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the state information is set to the second numerical value when the control is performed to the advantageous state and then to the special state (for example, in Figure 12- As shown in 19, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100, that is, the time saving flag A is set, and the data corresponding to the time saving flag A is "1"), and the special condition is satisfied. When controlled to a special state, the state information is set to a third numerical value different from the first numerical value and the second numerical value (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100 is executed part, that is, the time saving flag C is set, and the data corresponding to the time saving flag C is "1"), the game control means can transmit specific information to the performance control means, and when in a special state, the state It is possible to transmit specific information depending on whether the information is a second numerical value or a third numerical value (for example, as shown in Figure 12-10, as shown in Figure 12-19, The part that executes step 100IWS540 in the microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS174 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, since different game states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, when the performance control means executes a different performance, the performance can be suitably executed.

Although this example shows a case where a time-saving state A designation command and a time-saving state C designation command are transmitted as the specific information, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the background specification command and the fluctuation pattern command are configured to be transmitted in a manner that allows it to be specified that the user is in a time saving state via a jackpot, a time saving state via a time saving loss, or a time saving state via a relief time reduction. Good too. For example, when a jackpot occurs, a jackpot start designation command (fanfare designation command) and a jackpot end designation command (ending designation command) are transmitted in different ways depending on the gaming state, and depending on which command is received, The fanfare period and ending period may be configured to change.

(Means 2c) In the means 1c, when the special condition is established again after the special condition is controlled based on the establishment of the special condition, the status information control means changes the status information to the first numerical value, the second numerical value, and the second numerical value. It may be configured to have a fourth numerical value different from the third numerical value (for example, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, since different game states can be suitably identified, control becomes easy, and if the specific information is also changed at that time, when the performance control means executes a different performance, the performance can be suitably executed.

(Means 3c) In the means 1c or 2c, the effect control means controls when the state control means performs control to a special state based on the derived and displayed specific display result, and when the state control means realizes that the special condition is satisfied. It may be configured such that a different effect can be executed when the special state is controlled based on what has happened (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is a part that executes steps 100IWS634 and S638). According to such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently perform variable display in a controlled special state when special conditions are established, so it is possible to perform effects according to the situation, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 4c) In any of the means 1c to 3c, the effect control means controls the special state based on the derived and displayed specific display result, and the state control means It is possible to execute a common effect when controlling to a special state based on the fulfillment of a condition (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays a common background image in step 100IWS634 and step 100IWS638). It may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the effect in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is established, and thereby prevents an increase in development costs since new effects are not required. At the same time, since the player is not confused, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Means 5c) In any of the means 1c to 4c, the state control means is capable of controlling to the special state when a special display result different from the specific display result (for example, time saving error) is derived and displayed in the normal state. Yes (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS166 in the game control microcomputer 100), the effect control means is based on the state control means that the special display result is derived and displayed. Different effects can be executed when the special state is controlled and when the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs step 100IWS636, The part that executes S638) may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, it is possible to efficiently perform variable display in a controlled special state when special conditions are established, so it is possible to perform effects according to the situation, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

(Means 6c) In any of the means 1c to 4c, the state control means is capable of controlling to a special state when a special display result different from the specific display result is derived and displayed in the normal state, and the effect control means: When the state control means controls the special state based on the derivation and display of the special display result, and when the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. It may be configured such that the performance can be executed (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays a common background image in step 100IWS636 and step 100IWS638). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to make the effect in the controlled special state the same every time when the special condition is established, and thereby prevents an increase in development costs since new effects are not required. At the same time, since the player is not confused, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in this feature section 108IW and each modification, the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1d) to (means 4d) are disclosed.

(Means 1d) Variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information are performed, and an advantageous advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game It is a gaming machine that can control the state), and includes a game control means that can control the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120), and a variable display. Production control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 12-31, step 108IWS811 in the production control CPU 120) The game control means includes a state control means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17) that can control a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state. , the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, and the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100 as shown in FIG. 12-19), and the variable display is executed. An updating means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) that can update the numerical information based on the above, and when the power supply is stopped, The state control means includes a backup storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of execution times of the variable display, and the state control means is configured such that the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times. When a condition is satisfied, it can be controlled to a special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, the part that executes steps 100IWS74 and 100IWS75 in the game control microcomputer 100, as shown in FIG. 12-17) , the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means is configured to perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information. The numerical information is updated (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the game control means uses predetermined information for performance control when power supply is started. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-11, the part that executes step 100IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the performance control means can supply power based on receiving the predetermined information. It is characterized by being able to execute a suggestion effect regarding the number of execution times of the variable display during a predetermined period after the start of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. do. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, players are motivated to play games from the start of business at the gaming parlor, and the operating rate of the gaming machines can be increased.

Note that in this example, the initial roll is shown as a suggestion effect regarding the number of executions of the variable display, but the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to perform a background change, a fluctuating effect up to 100 revolutions, and a suggestive effect by displaying on a demo screen or menu screen.

In addition, when the command specifying initialization (S9 in FIG. 12-12) is transmitted, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to recognize the number of times until the relief time is shortened as an initial value and execute the effect. .

(Means 2d) In the means 1d, the game control means can transmit specific information that can specify the numerical information held by the backup storage means to the performance control means when power supply is started (for example, in FIG. As shown in 12-11, the part that executes step 100IWS11 in the game control microcomputer 100 may be configured as follows. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, it gives players an incentive to play games from the start of business at the gaming parlor, increasing the operating rate of the gaming machines and suppressing an increase in the processing load.

Note that although this example shows a case where a command that can specify the value of the rescue time reduction counter is transmitted at the time of recovery, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, sending a command that can specify a predetermined range such as specifying 1 to 99 rotations in units of 100 rotations, specifying 100 to 199 rotations, specifying 500 to 599 rotations, etc. It may be configured such that if the value of the time saving number counter is 128 or more, it cannot be specified, but if the value is 127 or less, a command that can be specified is transmitted.

(Means 3d) In the means 1d or 2d, the game control means can transmit specific information to the effect control means in connection with the execution of the variable display (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-14, The part that executes step 100IWS1717 in the game control microcomputer 100), the performance control means can execute a special performance related to being controlled to a special state based on the establishment of special conditions based on specific information ( For example, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the production control CPU 120) can specify, as specific information, that the difference between the number of executions of variable display and the special number of times is less than a predetermined value. First specific information (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-9, a command specifying the number of rescue time reduction times 1) and second specific information that can specify that the difference between the number of executions of the variable display and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-9, a relief time reduction number 2 designation command) may be configured. According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to the player, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly incurring losses and to suitably implement processing related to specific information.

Note that this example shows a case where the second specific information, the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, is transmitted when the difference between the number of executions of the variable display and the special number of times is larger than a predetermined value. Not limited to. For example, it may be configured such that the second specifying information, the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, is not transmitted when the difference between the number of executions of the variable display and the special number of times is greater than a predetermined value.

(Means 4d) In any of the means 1d to 3d, the production control means is controlled to be in a special state when a special condition is satisfied based on the first predetermined number of variable displays being executed, which is smaller than the special number of times. (For example, as shown in FIG. 12-33, the part that executes step 100IWS847 in the performance control CPU 120, )), it is possible to perform a suggestion effect each time a second predetermined number of variable displays smaller than the first predetermined number of times is performed before a special number of variable displays are performed (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-31). As shown, the part that executes step 100IWS804 in the performance control CPU 120 may be configured as shown in FIGS. 12-37 (A) to 12-38 (F)). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, by periodically suggesting functions to players, it is possible to reduce the risk of unknowingly incurring losses.

Note that although this example shows a case where the effect is executed based on the count value of the relief time reduction counter, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the effect control CPU 120 may be configured to count the number of fluctuations and execute the effect after resetting the rescue time reduction number counter.

In addition, the present feature section 108IW and each modified example disclose the configurations of the gaming machine shown below (means 1e-1) and (means 1e-2).

(Means 1e-1) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous state (for example, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a game control means that can control the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120); Production control means that controls production corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the part in the production control CPU 120) The game control means includes a state control means (for example, a part that executes step 108IWS811) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17). As shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display are executed. update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and an update means that can update the numerical information based on the state of the A backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of executions of the variable display, and a backup storage containing information regarding the number of times a predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means includes an initialization means that can initialize the storage contents of the means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, a part that executes step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means includes an update means. When the numerical information updated by becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, a special condition can be controlled when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, The part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the second identification information is displayed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), The performance control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition after the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized and before a specific display result is derived and displayed; There is a difference between when the specific display result is derived and displayed after the storage contents of the storage means are initialized and then controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition, and when it is controlled to a special state at . It is characterized by executing effects (for example, the portions shown in Modification 2 and Modification 3 of FIG. 12-47). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, since it is possible to know that the contents stored in the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of factors such as estimating setting values increases, and the interest in the game can be improved.

(Means 1e-2) Perform variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information, and based on the derivation and display of a specific display result (for example, a jackpot symbol), an advantageous state (for example, A game machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state), and a game control means that can control the game (for example, as shown in FIG. 5, the part that executes step S25 in the performance control CPU 120); Production control means that controls production corresponding to the variable display (for example, as shown in FIG. 7, the part that executes steps S170 to S172 in the production control CPU 120, as shown in FIG. 12-31, the part in the production control CPU 120) The game control means includes a state control means (for example, a part that executes step 108IWS811) that can be controlled to a special state (for example, a time saving state) in which variable display is more likely to be executed than a normal state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17). As shown in FIG. 12-19, the part that executes step 100IWS166 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100, the part that executes step 100IWS537 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the variable display are executed. update means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-13, a part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100) and an update means that can update the numerical information based on the state of the A backup storage means (e.g., RAM 102) capable of holding numerical information regarding the number of executions of the variable display, and a backup storage containing information regarding the number of times a predetermined display result is continuously derived and displayed when a predetermined condition is satisfied. The state control means includes an initialization means that can initialize the storage contents of the means (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-14, a part that executes step S8 in the game control microcomputer 100), and the state control means includes an update means. When the numerical information updated by becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times, a special condition can be controlled when a special condition is established (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, The part that executes step 100IWS74 and step 100IWS75 (as shown in FIG. 12-17, the part that executes step 100IWS172 and step 100IWS173 in the game control microcomputer 100), the updating means executes the variable display of the first identification information. The numerical information is updated depending on when the second identification information is displayed and when the variable display of the second identification information is executed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-13, the part that executes step 100IWS71 in the game control microcomputer 100), The performance control means is controlled to a special state by the state control means based on the establishment of a special condition after the storage contents of the backup storage means are initialized and before a specific display result is derived and displayed; After the storage contents of the storage means are initialized, the specific display result is derived and displayed, and the state control means controls the special state based on the establishment of the special condition. (for example, the portion shown in Modification 2 and Modification 3 in FIG. 12-47). According to such a configuration, even if a new function is installed and the specifications become complicated, suitable control can be performed. For example, since it is possible to know that the contents stored in the backup storage means have been initialized, the number of factors such as estimating setting values increases, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Note that although this example shows a case where only the variation pattern table B is used after the RAM is cleared, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be configured to be used with a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables as in the case after a jackpot.

Note that the configurations of the gaming machine shown in the following (means 1f) to (means 15h) may be applied to this feature section 108IW and each modification.

(Means 1f) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state based on a specific display result being derived and displayed. A state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the state, and an updating means capable of updating numerical information based on the execution of the variable display, the state control means controlling the variable display. It is possible to control to a special state after being controlled to an advantageous state based on a specific display result derived and displayed as a display result of The update means can be controlled to a special state when a special condition is satisfied by becoming a corresponding specific value, and the updating means can be controlled to be in a special state when a variable display of the first identification information is executed and when a variable display of the second identification information is executed. There are multiple types of advantageous states, including specific advantageous states and special advantageous states, and depending on which of the plurality of types of advantageous states is controlled, the numerical information is updated. The advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to a particularly advantageous state is different, and the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to a particularly advantageous state is higher than the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to a specific advantageous state. The degree of advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is higher than the degree of advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to a specific advantageous state. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase the degree of relief for the player.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 1f, for example, the special advantageous state is set as a definite variable jackpot, the specific advantageous state is set as a normal jackpot, and the time saving state after a fixed variable time reduction is set as after a normal jackpot. It may be configured such that the advantage is higher than the time saving state of , and the time saving state of relief time saving is more advantageous than the time saving state after a normal jackpot.

(Means 2f) In the means 1f, the advantageous state is controlled when the variable display of the first identification information triggers the advantageous state and when the variable display of the second identification information triggers the control into the advantageous state. The rate at which the vehicle is controlled to a special state with a special advantage after being controlled is different; when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. The number of executions of the variable display for the special condition to be satisfied is the same as the special number of times when the control is performed. According to such a configuration, the first identification information can be changed while increasing the interest by providing different gameplay characteristics depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed. Since the special number of times is the same in both cases of displaying and variable displaying of the second identification information, it is possible to prevent gambling from increasing excessively.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2f, for example, the rate of special advantage in the time saving state after a jackpot (time saving continues until the next jackpot) is set to the first special symbol. and the second special symbol, and 800 times, which is the condition that the relief time is controlled to be shortened when controlled to be a jackpot based on the first special symbol and when controlled to be a jackpot based on the second special symbol. The configuration may be such that the number of fluctuations is the same.

(Means 3f) In means 1f or 2f, an unfavorable setting value having a first probability of being controlled to an advantageous state, and an advantageous setting having a second probability of being controlled to an advantageous state higher than the first probability. The special condition is provided with a setting means that can set any one of a plurality of setting values including The advantage of a special state that is easy to establish and is controlled when a special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when an unfavorable set value is set, the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is the same as the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. By having a higher advantage than the state, it is possible to rescue the player more effectively.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 3f, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the settings can be changed in six levels from "1" to "6". In addition, setting an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") reduces the number of fluctuations, which is a condition for controlling to shorten the rescue time, than setting it to an advantageous setting (for example, "6"). However, the advantage in saving time may be configured to be higher than the advantage in the time saving state after a jackpot. Note that the rescue time reduction achievement rate is higher when set to an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") than when set to an advantageous setting (for example, "6"); Since the number of times is 800 (substantially until the next jackpot), it may be more advantageous than the time-saving state via a jackpot (for example, the number of time-savings is usually 100 after a jackpot).

(Means 4f) Any one of the means 1f to 3f is provided with a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the control is controlled to an advantageous state. Which of the multiple types of advantageous special states will be controlled later is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantageousness of the special state that will be controlled when the special condition is met. is common when any setting value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement in the gambling experience due to the setting value that is set, and it is possible to realize a healthy gaming experience.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 4f, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) is required. The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the settings can be changed in six levels from "1" to "6". Then, which of the multiple types of time-saving states will be controlled after a jackpot is set in common when any setting value is set, and the advantage in saving time is also set when any setting value is set. It may be configured so that they are also common.

(Means 5f) When any of the means 1f to 4f is controlled to an advantageous state by the variable display of the first identification information, and when it is controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the second identification information. The ratio of which of the plurality of types of advantageous states is controlled differs depending on the case, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. The advantage of the special state that is controlled after the special condition is satisfied is the same when the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, different gameplay characteristics are achieved depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed and the second identification information is variably displayed, and the game is controlled when the special condition is satisfied. Since the advantage of the special state is the same regardless of the set value, it is possible to suppress the increase in gambling quality and provide an appropriate degree of relief.

In addition, in this feature part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 5f, for example, when a jackpot occurs due to the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the second special symbol, The ratios controlled for the normal jackpot and the variable probability jackpot are different, and the relief time is shortened when the relief time is controlled to be short based on the first special symbol and when the relief time is controlled to be shortened based on the second special symbol. The configuration may be such that the advantages of the two are common.

(Means 6f) In any one of the means 1f to 5f, a variable display pattern is selected from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern whose variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. The variable display pattern determining means is configured to determine a variable display pattern in a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established, than in a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. When the display result is a non-specific display result, there is a high probability that the shortened variable display pattern will be selected. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 6f is based on a configuration using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 12-8(E), for example.

(Means 7f) Any one of the means 1f to 6f includes a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of a reach effect, and the variable display pattern The determining means is configured to determine whether the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in a special state that is controlled after the special condition is controlled to be an advantageous state. The proportion of specific variable display patterns is low. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 7f is based on a configuration using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 12-8(E), for example.

(Means 8f) In any of the means 1f to 7f, the updating means can update specific numerical information different from numerical information based on variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means By setting special information, it is possible to control the special state, and by canceling the setting of the special information, the special state can be terminated, and in the special state, the specific numerical information becomes a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times. a backup storage means capable of retaining the numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means and the setting information of the special information even if the updating means terminates the special state based on the fact that the power supply is stopped; and a predetermined condition is satisfied. an initializing means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the initializing means initializing the setting information of the special information and the specific numerical information, Do not initialize numerical information. According to such a configuration, even when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 8f initializes the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving number counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 12-11, for example, while The value of the relief time reduction counter may be configured not to be initialized.

(Means 1g) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous advantageous state based on the derived and displayed specific display result, A state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which the variable display is more likely to be executed than the state, an updating means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of the variable display, and a start condition established when a start condition is satisfied. a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on a start condition; a hold storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as hold information when a start condition is met but the start condition is not satisfied; a backup storage means capable of retaining numerical information and pending information; an initialization means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is met; and power supply is started. and a recovery means capable of executing recovery control for restoring the numerical information updated by the update means and the pending information stored in the pending storage means based on the storage contents of the backup storage device, and the state control device includes: , the numerical information updated by the updating means becomes a specific value corresponding to the special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display, so that the special state can be controlled when the special condition is satisfied, and after the recovery control is executed. , when a special condition is established based on the execution of the variable display corresponding to the restored pending information, the updating means can be controlled to a special state when the variable display of the first identification information is executed and the second identification information. Numerical information is updated when variable display of identification information is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to optimize the control by initialization while suppressing the occurrence of disadvantages to the player.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 1g, for example, when executing the initialization processing, the relief time saving counter and the pending memory are reset, while when recovering from a power outage, the Restore the relief time reduction counter and pending memory, and configure the system so that when the fluctuation display corresponding to the pending memory at the time of recovery reaches the 800th variation and the conditions for the relief time reduction control are met, the relief time reduction control becomes possible. Bye.

(Means 2g) In the means 1g, an advantageous state is achieved when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information and when controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. The rate at which the vehicle is controlled to a special state with a special advantage after being controlled is different; when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the first identification information, and when it is controlled to an advantageous state triggered by the variable display of the second identification information. The number of executions of the variable display for the special condition to be satisfied is the same as the special number of times when the control is performed. According to such a configuration, the first identification information can be changed while increasing the interest by providing different gameplay characteristics depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed or the second identification information is variably displayed. Since the special number of times is the same in both cases of displaying and variable displaying of the second identification information, it is possible to prevent gambling from increasing excessively.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of means 2g, for example, the rate of special advantage in the time saving state after a jackpot (time saving continues until the next jackpot) is set to the first special symbol. and the second special symbol, and the variation that becomes the condition for controlling the relief time to be shortened depending on when the jackpot is controlled based on the first special symbol and when the jackpot is controlled based on the second special symbol. The configuration may be such that the number of times is the same.

(Means 3g) In the means 1g or 2g, there is an unfavorable setting value in which the probability of being controlled into an advantageous state is a first probability, and an advantageous setting where the probability of being controlled in an advantageous state is a second probability that is higher than the first probability. The special condition is provided with a setting means that can set any one of a plurality of setting values including The advantage of a special state that is easy to establish and is controlled when a special condition is satisfied is higher than the advantage of a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. According to such a configuration, even when an unfavorable set value is set, the advantage of the special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied is the same as the advantage of the special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. By having a higher advantage than the state, it is possible to rescue the player more effectively.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3g, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". Furthermore, setting it to an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") reduces the number of fluctuations until the rescue time is shortened, and shortens the rescue time, compared to setting it to an advantageous setting value (for example, "6"). What is necessary is to configure the advantageous degree of this to be higher than the advantageous degree of the time saving state after the jackpot. Note that setting an unfavorable setting (for example, "1") has a higher probability of failure than setting an advantageous setting (for example, "6"), so it is easier to save time. ,Relief time saving is always 800 time saving times (substantially until the next jackpot), so it is more advantageous than the time saving state via jackpot (for example, usually after the jackpot, the time saving number is 100 times). Good too.

(Means 4b) Any one of the means 1g to 3g is provided with a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the control is controlled to an advantageous state. Which of the multiple types of advantageous special states will be controlled later is the same regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantageousness of the special state that will be controlled when the special condition is met. is common when any setting value is set. According to such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the improvement in the gambling experience due to the setting value that is set, and it is possible to realize a healthy gaming experience.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 4g, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the settings can be changed in six levels from "1" to "6". Then, which of the multiple types of time-saving states will be controlled after a jackpot is set in common regardless of which setting value is set, and the advantage in saving time-saving is also set when any setting value is set. It may be configured so that they are also common.

(Means 5g) When any of the means 1g to 4g is controlled to an advantageous state by the variable display of the first identification information, and when it is controlled to the advantageous state by the variable display of the second identification information. The ratio of which of the plurality of types of advantageous states is controlled differs depending on the case, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information, and when the special condition is satisfied corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information. The advantage of the special state that is controlled after the special condition is satisfied is the same when the special condition is satisfied. According to such a configuration, different gameplay characteristics are achieved depending on whether the first identification information is variably displayed and the second identification information is variably displayed, and the game is controlled when the special condition is satisfied. Since the advantage of the special state is the same regardless of the set value, it is possible to suppress the increase in gambling quality and provide an appropriate degree of relief.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 5g, for example, when a jackpot occurs due to the first special symbol and when a jackpot occurs due to the second special symbol, The ratios controlled for the normal jackpot and the variable probability jackpot are different, and the relief time is shortened when the relief time is controlled to be short based on the first special symbol and when the relief time is controlled to be shortened based on the second special symbol. The configuration may be such that the advantages of the two are common.

(Means 6g) In any one of the means 1g to 5g, a variable display pattern is selected from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a shortened variable display pattern whose variable display period is shorter than that of the predetermined variable display pattern. The variable display pattern determining means is configured to determine a variable display pattern in a special state that is controlled when a special condition is established, than in a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. When the display result is a non-specific display result, there is a high rate of determining the shortened variable display pattern. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 6g is based on the configuration using the variation pattern table E shown in FIG. 12-8(E), for example.

(Means 7g) Any one of the means 1g to 6g includes a variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a specific variable display pattern corresponding to execution of a reach effect, The determining means is configured to determine whether the display result of the variable display is a non-specific display result in a special state that is controlled when the special condition is satisfied than in a special state that is controlled after being controlled to an advantageous state. The proportion of specific variable display patterns is low. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 7g is based on the configuration using the variation pattern table E of FIG. 12-8(E), for example.

(Means 8g) In any of the means 1g to 7g, the updating means can update specific numerical information different from numerical information based on variable display being executed in the special state, and the state controlling means By setting special information, it is possible to control the special state, and by canceling the setting of the special information, the special state can be terminated, and in the special state, the specific numerical information becomes a predetermined value corresponding to a predetermined number of times. a backup storage means capable of retaining the numerical information and specific numerical information updated by the updating means and the setting information of the special information even if the updating means terminates the special state based on the fact that the power supply is stopped; and a predetermined condition is satisfied. initializing means capable of initializing the storage contents of the backup storage means when a predetermined condition is satisfied; Do not initialize numerical information. According to such a configuration, even when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the degree of relief for the player can be increased.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 8g initializes the time saving flags A to C and the value of the time saving number counter in the initialization process shown in FIG. 12-11, for example, while The value of the relief time reduction counter may be configured not to be initialized.

(Means 1h) A gaming machine that executes variable display of first identification information and variable display of second identification information, and that can be controlled to an advantageous state based on the derived and displayed specific display result, A state control means capable of controlling to a special state in which a variable display is more likely to be executed than a state, and an update means capable of updating numerical information based on execution of the variable display, the state control means comprising an update means. The numerical information updated by the first identification information becomes a specific value corresponding to a special number of times as the number of executions of the variable display, so that the update means can be controlled to a special state when the special condition is satisfied, and the updating means The system further includes a suggestion performance execution means capable of updating the numerical information depending on whether the display is executed or when the variable display of the second identification information is executed, and is capable of executing a suggestion production related to the establishment of the special condition. In the execution means, the ratio of which of the plurality of presentation modes is used to execute the suggestion effect varies depending on the number of executions of the variable display, and the presentation mode of the suggestion presentation suggests a period until the special condition is satisfied. This is the mode of doing so. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to the performance mode of the suggestive performance, and to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 1h, for example, it is necessary to decide whether or not to execute a countdown effect that suggests the number of fluctuations that is a condition for controlling to shorten the rescue time. The ratio may be configured to change according to the count value of the relief time saving counter. Further, the gaming machine of the means 1h can be realized by, for example, using a table shown in FIG. 12-25 to determine whether or not to display a telop while waiting for a customer and the performance mode.

(Means 2h) In the means 1h, the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation is such that the number of executions of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied can be specified. According to such a configuration, it is possible to clearly notify the player of the number of executions of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 2h is based on, for example, executing a countdown performance in a mode that suggests the number of fluctuations that is a condition for controlling to shorten the rescue time.

(Means 3h) In the means 1h or 2h, the suggestive effect is an effect that displays a specific image, and the specific image is displayed in a plurality of modes in which at least one of color and size is different, and in which mode it is displayed. The period until the suggested special conditions come into effect differs depending on whether the special conditions are met. According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the aspect of a specific image and improve interest.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 3h is configured to use, for example, the table shown in FIG. Based on. Further, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 3h, for example, the color and size of the numbers counting down in the image of the countdown effect may be configured to differ depending on the count value of the relief time saving counter.

(Means 4h) In any of the means 1h to 3h, there is a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the starting condition and the establishment of the starting condition; Suspension storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the variable display is not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not executed and no suspension storage is stored in the suspension storage means. The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and displays the predetermined image according to the number of executions of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the rate at which the suggestive effects are executed differs. According to such a configuration, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive performance is being executed, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In the present feature section 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 4h is based on a configuration in which, for example, the table shown in FIG. 12-25 is used to determine whether or not to display a telop while waiting for a customer.

(Means 5h) In any of the means 1h to 4h, there is a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the starting condition and the establishment of the starting condition; Suspension storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the variable display is not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not executed and no suspension storage is stored in the suspension storage means. The suggestive effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect when the predetermined image is displayed, and displays the predetermined image according to the number of executions of the variable display until the special condition is satisfied. When displayed, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the predetermined mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to the presence or absence of the mode of suggestive performance, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In the present feature section 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 5h is based on a configuration in which, for example, the table shown in FIG. 12-25 is used to determine the performance mode of the telop display while waiting for a customer.

(Means 6h) In any of the means 1h to 5h, there is a variable display execution means capable of executing a variable display based on the establishment of the starting condition and the establishment of the starting condition; Suspension storage means capable of storing information regarding the variable display as suspension information when the variable display is not established, and a predetermined image capable of displaying a predetermined image when the variable display is not executed and no suspension storage is stored in the suspension storage means. display means, and the suggestive performance execution means detects that the operation means has been operated or that the game medium has passed through the predetermined area when the predetermined image is displayed. Suggestive effects can be performed based on what has been done. According to such a configuration, it is possible to provide a suggestive effect to a player who actually plays a game, and it is possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the game machine of the means 6h, for example, when the game machine shifts to the demonstration state, the game ball is activated by operating the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 or by the starting port. If detected, it may be configured to display a telop indicating the remaining number of times until the relief time is shortened.

(Means 7h) Any of the means 1h to 6h includes a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive effect execution means: Depending on which setting value is set, the rate at which the suggestive effect is executed differs. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestion effect is to be executed, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

In this feature section 108IW and each modification, the means 7h is based on a configuration that uses the table shown in FIG. 12-25 to determine whether or not to display a subtitle while waiting for a customer.

(Means 8h) Any one of the means 1h to 7h includes a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and the suggestive effect execution means: Depending on which setting value is set, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed differs depending on the specific mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the player's interest by drawing attention to the mode of the suggestion effect, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine by suggesting the set value.

In this feature section 108IW and each modification, the means 8h is based on a configuration that uses the table shown in FIG. 12-25 to determine whether or not to display a telop while waiting for a customer and the presentation mode.

(Means 9h) In any of the means 1h to 6h, a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state, and Setting suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a suggested setting suggestion performance; The effect executing means has the same rate of executing the suggested effect regardless of the setting value. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is being executed, and it is also possible to suppress complexity of control.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 9h, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) is required. The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute a performance that suggests the set value (for example, a performance that has different execution rates depending on the set value), it is also possible to display a caption while waiting for a customer regardless of which set value is set. The configuration may be configured so that the ratio is the same.

(Means 10h) Any one of the means 1h to 6h and the means 9h includes a setting means capable of setting any one of a plurality of setting values having different probabilities of being controlled to an advantageous state; a setting suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a setting suggestion performance suggesting a setting value, and the setting suggestion performance execution means executes a setting suggestion performance in a specific manner depending on which setting value is set. The rate at which the suggestion effect is executed is different, and the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed is the same depending on the specific mode, regardless of the set value of the suggestion effect execution means. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to the mode of the suggestive performance, and it is also possible to suppress complication of control.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 10h, for example, one of a plurality of setting values that have different advantages for the player (in this example, different jackpot probabilities) The setting value can be set to the setting value, and setting confirmation processing and setting change processing are executed when the power is turned on to the pachinko game machine 1, so that the current setting value can be confirmed and the setting value can be changed. For example, the setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6". Then, while it is possible to execute a performance that suggests a setting value (for example, a performance with different execution rates depending on the setting value), it is also possible to execute a performance that indicates a setting value, while waiting for customers in a red performance mode regardless of which setting value is set. The configuration may be such that the execution rate of the telop display is the same.

(Means 11h) In any of the means 1h to 10h, the suggestive performance execution means determines whether the power supply is performed depending on whether the initialization process is executed when the power supply is started or the recovery process is executed. The rate at which the suggestion effect is executed during a specific period after the start is different. According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive performance is being executed, and it is also possible to promote the operation of the gaming machine.

In addition, in this characteristic part 108IW and each modification, in order to apply the gaming machine of the means 11c, for example, the execution rate of the ticker display and countdown effect while waiting for a customer is different after the initialization process and after the power outage recovery. You can configure it like this.

(Means 12h) Any one of the means 1h to 11h includes variable display pattern determining means for determining a variable display pattern from a plurality of variable display patterns including a special variable display pattern, and the variable display pattern determining means is configured to When the special variable display pattern is established, the special variable display pattern can be determined, and the special variable display pattern is not determined before the special condition is satisfied, and the special state is set when variable display using the special variable display pattern is being executed. The device further includes a specific notification performance execution means capable of executing a specific notification performance for notifying that the device is controlled. According to such a configuration, it is possible to inform the player that the special state is controlled due to the establishment of the special condition, and also to clearly inform the player of the change in the gaming state, and to increase the interest when the special condition is satisfied. can be improved.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 12h is based on, for example, a configuration using a pattern table for relief time saving fluctuation failure shown in FIG. 12-8(I).

(Means 13h) In any of the means 1h to 12h, a variable display pattern is determined from a plurality of variable display patterns including a predetermined variable display pattern and a specific variable display pattern having a longer variable display period than the predetermined variable display pattern. A variable display pattern determining means is provided, and the variable display pattern determining means is capable of determining a specific variable display pattern in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and when the display result is not a specific display result. Yes, when the display result of a variable display becomes a specific display result, the proportion of the specific variable display pattern being determined is higher than that of the predetermined variable display pattern, and the predetermined period before the special condition is satisfied is longer than the predetermined period. Compared to the previous period, when the display result of variable display does not result in a specific display result, the ratio of determining the specific variable display pattern is lower. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present characteristic part 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 13h is based on a configuration using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIGS. 12-8(F) and (G), for example.

(Means 14h) Any one of the means 1h to 13h is provided with a notice effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, The execution means can execute the preview effect in both cases where the display result of the variable display becomes a specific display result and when the display result does not become a specific display result, and the display result of the variable display becomes the specific display result. In this case, the proportion of execution of the preview effect is higher than in the case where no specific display result is obtained, and the predetermined period before the special condition is met is higher than the period before the predetermined period. When the result is not a specific display result, the ratio of executing preview effects is low. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present feature section 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 14h is based on a configuration in which, for example, a table shown in FIG. 12-32 is used to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance.

(Means 15h) Any one of the means 1h to 14h is provided with a notice effect execution means capable of executing a notice effect for notifying that a specific display result will be derived and displayed when the variable display is being executed, The execution means is capable of executing the preview effect according to the specific mode and the predetermined mode in both cases where the display result of the variable display is a specific display result and when the display result is not a specific display result, and the display of the variable display When the result is a specific display result, the proportion of preview effects executed in the specific mode is higher than in the predetermined mode, and the predetermined period before the special condition is established is more variable than the period before the predetermined period. When the display result of the display does not become a specific display result, the proportion of execution of the preview performance depending on the specific mode is low. According to such a configuration, a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

In the present feature section 108IW and each modification, the gaming machine of the means 15h is based on a configuration in which, for example, the table shown in FIG. 12-32 is used to determine whether or not to execute a preview performance and the performance mode.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 103 CPU
120 CPU for performance control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of variably displaying multiple types of production identification information and capable of controlling an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
A light emitting means capable of emitting light;
a display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display;
Effect execution means capable of executing a specific display effect of displaying the specific display and a specific light emission effect of causing the light emitting means to emit light based on a predetermined condition being satisfied;
a state control means capable of controlling to a specific state;
an updating means capable of updating the numerical information based on execution of the variable display;
The state control means is capable of controlling the state to the specific state when a specific condition is satisfied by the numerical information updated by the updating device becoming a specific value corresponding to a specific number of times;
The display means is capable of executing a specific notification effect that notifies that the specific condition is satisfied when the specific condition is satisfied,
The specific notification performance is a performance that reduces the visibility of the performance identification information,
The performance execution means executes the specific light emission performance so that the light emission of the light emission unit becomes recognizable to the player before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display performance,
further comprising a sound output means capable of outputting a sound corresponding to the specific light emission effect corresponding to the specific light emission effect,
The sound output means is capable of outputting the sound corresponding to the specific light emitting effect before the display of the specific display is completed in the specific display effect,
The ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is higher when the specific light emission effect is executed than when the specific light emission effect is not executed,
Even during the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, the light emitting means continues to emit light in a manner corresponding to the specific light emitting effect, and at a predetermined ending timing before the variable display corresponding to the specific light emitting effect ends. It is possible to control the effect to end the light emission,
If the light emission of the light emitting means in a manner corresponding to the specific light emission performance is not terminated at the predetermined end timing due to the occurrence of a predetermined event, the light emitting means of the light emitting means may emit light at a specific end timing subsequent to the predetermined end timing. Perform special termination control to terminate the
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images